Ford Ranger Owners Manual

FORD RANGER Owner's Manual
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2015
All rights reserved.

Part Number: EB3B-19G219-ZAB 20150817021713
Table of Contents
Introduction Checking MyKey System Status...............33

About This Manual...........................................5 MyKey Troubleshooting...............................34
Symbols Glossary.............................................5
Replacement Parts Locks
Recommendation.........................................7 Locking and Unlocking.................................35
Special Notices..................................................7
Mobile Communications Security
Equipment......................................................8 Passive Anti-Theft System.........................38
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................38
At a Glance
At a Glance..........................................................9 Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel...................40
Child Safety Audio Control..................................................40
Child Restraints................................................14 Voice Control....................................................41
Selecting a Child Restraint System..........14 Cruise Control...................................................41
Installing Child Restraints............................15 Information Display Control........................41
Child Safety Locks.........................................20
Wipers and Washers
Seatbelts Windshield Wipers.........................................42
Principle of Operation....................................21 Autowipers.......................................................43
Fastening the Seatbelts...............................22 Windshield Washers.....................................45
Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................23
Seatbelt Reminder.........................................23 Lighting
Seatbelt Maintenance..................................24 General Information.....................................46
Lighting Control..............................................46
Supplementary Restraints Autolamps........................................................48
System
Daytime Running Lamps............................49
Principle of Operation...................................25
Front Fog Lamps............................................49
Rear Fog Lamps.............................................49
Keys and Remote Controls
Headlamp Leveling.......................................50
General Information on Radio
Frequencies..................................................27 Direction Indicators........................................51
Remote Control...............................................27 Approach Lamps.............................................51
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Interior Lamps.................................................52
Control...........................................................29 Ambient Lighting............................................52
Cargo Lamps....................................................52
MyKey™
Principle of Operation..................................30 Windows and Mirrors
Creating a MyKey.............................................31 Power Windows..............................................54
Clearing All MyKeys........................................31 Global Opening and Closing......................56
Ranger (), EB3B-19G219-ZAB enAUS

Table of Contents
Exterior Mirrors.................................................57 Center Console...............................................110

Interior Mirror...................................................58 Overhead Console........................................110
Cool Box.............................................................111
Instrument Cluster Glasses Holder.................................................111
Gauges...............................................................59 Rear Seat Armrest..........................................111
Warning Lamps and Indicators..................61 Under Seat Storage.......................................111
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............65
Starting and Stopping the
Information Displays Engine
General Information......................................67 General Information.....................................112
Clock....................................................................75 Ignition Switch................................................112
Trip Computer..................................................75 Steering Wheel Lock.....................................112
Personalized Settings...................................75 Starting a Diesel Engine..............................112
Information Messages..................................76 Diesel Particulate Filter...............................113
Switching Off the Engine............................114
Climate Control
Principle of Operation..................................89 Unique Driving Character-
Air Vents............................................................89 istics
Manual Climate Control..............................90 Auto-Start-Stop.............................................115
Automatic Climate Control........................92
Hints on Controlling the Interior Fuel and Refueling
Climate..........................................................95 Safety Precautions........................................117
Heated Windows and Mirrors...................98 Fuel Quality.....................................................118
Cabin Air Filter.................................................98 Running Out of Fuel.....................................118
Catalytic Converter.......................................119
Seats Refueling...........................................................119
Sitting in the Correct Position...................99
Head Restraints..............................................99 Transmission
Manual Seats................................................100 Manual Transmission..................................122
Power Seats...................................................102 Automatic Transmission............................122
Rear Seats.......................................................104
Heated Seats.................................................105 Four-Wheel Drive
Principle of Operation.................................126
Auxiliary Power Points Using Four-Wheel Drive.............................126
Auxiliary Power Points................................107
Rear Axle
Storage Compartments Limited Slip Differential..............................131
Cup Holders...................................................109 Electronic Locking Differential..................131
Glove Box........................................................109

Table of Contents
Brakes Roof Racks and Load Carriers.................166

General Information....................................132 Load Retaining Fixtures..............................167
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Tailgate.............................................................170
Brakes...........................................................132
Parking Brake..................................................132 Towing
Hill Start Assist..............................................132 Towing a Trailer...............................................171
Trailer Sway Control......................................171
Traction Control Recommended Towing Weights.............172
Using Traction Control................................135 Tow Ball............................................................173
Towing Points.................................................175
Stability Control Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels.......175
Principle of Operation.................................136
Using Stability Control...............................136 Driving Hints
Breaking-In......................................................176
Hill Descent Control Reduced Engine Performance.................176
Principle of Operation.................................138 Cold Weather Precautions........................176
Using Hill Descent Control........................138 Driving Through Water.................................177
Floor Mats........................................................177
Parking Aids
Principle of Operation................................140 Roadside Emergencies
Rear Parking Aid.............................................141 Hazard Warning Flashers...........................179
Front Parking Aid..........................................142 Jump Starting the Vehicle.........................179
Rear View Camera........................................143 Transporting the Vehicle...........................180
Cruise Control Fuses

Principle of Operation................................146 Fuse Box Locations......................................182
Using Cruise Control...................................146 Fuse Specification Chart...........................184
Using Adaptive Cruise Control.................147 Changing a Fuse..........................................228
Driving Aids Maintenance

Speed Limiter.................................................153 General Information...................................229
Driver Alert.......................................................153 Opening and Closing the Hood..............229
Lane Keeping System.................................155 Under Hood Overview - 2.2L
Steering............................................................159 Duratorq-TDCi (Puma) Diesel.............231
Pre-Collision Assist.....................................160 Under Hood Overview - 3.2L
Duratorq-TDCi (Puma) Diesel............233
Load Carrying Engine Oil Dipstick......................................235
Engine Oil Check..........................................235
General Information....................................164
Engine Coolant Check................................235
Luggage Covers.............................................164
Brake and Clutch Fluid Check.................237

Table of Contents
Power Steering Fluid Check - Vehicles Audio Troubleshooting..............................289

With: Hydraulic Power Assist Steering
(HPAS).........................................................237
SYNC™
Washer Fluid Check.....................................237
General Information...................................290
Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap........237
Using Voice Recognition............................291
Charging the 12V Battery..........................238
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............294
Changing the 12V Battery.........................239
SYNC™ Applications and Services......305
Checking the Wiper Blades.....................239
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Changing the Wiper Blades.....................239 Player.............................................................312
Removing a Headlamp.............................240 SYNC™ Troubleshooting..........................318
Changing a Bulb..........................................240
Bulb Specification Chart...........................245 SYNC™ 2
Vehicle Care Settings...........................................................338
Cleaning the Exterior..................................247 Entertainment...............................................352
Cleaning the Interior....................................247 Phone................................................................361
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............248 Information....................................................369
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................248 Climate............................................................374
Navigation......................................................376
Wheels and Tires SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................385
Tire Care..........................................................249 Appendices
Using Snow Chains.....................................254 Electromagnetic Compatibility..............393
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........254 End User License Agreement.................394
Changing a Road Wheel...........................258 End User License Agreement.................400
Technical Specifications...........................264 Type Approvals.............................................422
Capacities and Specific-

ations
Vehicle Dimensions....................................266
Vehicle Identification Number................270
Audio System
General Information.....................................271
Audio Unit.......................................................272
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC/Navigation System....................278
Audio Unit Clock and Date Displays......284
Compact Disc Player..................................285
Media Hub......................................................288

Introduction
ABOUT THIS MANUAL

Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about
your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and E154903
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any A Right-hand side.
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe B Left-hand side.
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable These are some of the symbols you may
local laws that may affect the use of see on your vehicle.
electronic devices while driving. Safety alert
Note: This manual describes product

features and options available throughout See Owner's Manual
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the Air conditioning system
vehicle you have purchased.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this E162384
manual may show features as used in Anti-lock braking system

different models, so they may appear
different to you on your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling Battery
your vehicle. It is an integral part of your
vehicle.
Battery acid
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat. Brake fluid - non petroleum
based

Introduction
Brake system Front airbag
Cabin air filter Front fog lamps
Check fuel cap Fuse compartment
Child safety door lock or unlock Hazard warning flashers
Child seat lower anchor Heated rear window
Child seat tether anchor Heated windshield

E91392
Cruise control Interior luggage compartment

release
E71340
Do not open when hot Jack
Engine air filter Lighting control
Engine coolant Lock rear window
Engine coolant temperature Low tire pressure warning
Engine oil Maintain correct fluid level
Explosive gas Panic alarm
Fan warning Parking aid

E139213
Fasten seatbelt Parking brake

Introduction
Power steering fluid Scheduled Maintenance and

Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
Power windows front/rear
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that
Service engine soon conform to the specifications detailed in
this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and
Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
Side airbag specifications.
Collision Repairs
Stability control We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine
Ford replacement collision parts meet our
Windshield wash and wipe stringent requirements for fit, finish,
structural integrity, corrosion protection
and dent resistance. During vehicle
Keep out of reach of children development we validate these parts
deliver the intended level of protection as
E161353 a whole system. A great way to know for
Recyclable product sure you are getting this level of protection
is to use genuine Ford replacement
E161307 collision parts.
Do not dispose of in the trash
because the material contains
Warranty on Replacement Parts
E161354 lead Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
Use safety glasses when
benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage
handling
E161305
caused to your vehicle as a result of the
failure of non-Ford parts may not be
covered by the Ford Warranty. For
REPLACEMENT PARTS additional information, refer to the terms
RECOMMENDATION and conditions of the Ford Warranty.
Your vehicle has been built to the highest SPECIAL NOTICES

standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of If converting or modifying your vehicle from
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts production specification, please see your
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled authorised Ford dealer.
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.

Introduction
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
Using mobile communications equipment
is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
WARNING
loss of vehicle control, crash and
you use extreme caution when using any
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
while driving and encourage the use of
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

At a Glance
Front Exterior Overview
A B C
E D
E207760
A See Locking and Unlocking (page 35).

B See Changing the Wiper Blades (page 239).
C See Maintenance (page 229).
D See Changing a Bulb (page 240).
E Tire pressure. See Technical Specifications (page 264).
F See Changing a Road Wheel (page 258).

At a Glance
Vehicle Interior Overview
A B C D E
I H G F
E173636
A See Transmission (page 122).

B See Locks (page 35).
C See Power Windows (page 54). See Exterior Mirrors (page 57).
D See Head Restraints (page 99).
E See Fastening the Seatbelts (page 22).
F See Rear Seats (page 104).
G See Parking Brake (page 132).
10

At a Glance
H See Manual Seats (page 100). See Power Seats (page 102).
I See Opening and Closing the Hood (page 229).
Instrument Panel Overview

Right Hand Drive
A B C D E F G H
O N M L K J I
E212696
A Air vents.
B Multi-function display. See General Information (page 67).
C Windshield wipers. See Wipers and Washers (page 42).
D Audio control. See Audio Control (page 40).
E Instrument cluster. See Instrument Cluster (page 59). See Auto-Start-Stop
(page 115).
F Cruise control buttons. See Cruise Control (page 146). Adaptive cruise control.
See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 147).
11

At a Glance
G Direction indicators. See Direction Indicators (page 51). Lane keeping system.
See Lane Keeping System (page 155).
H Lighting control. See Lighting Control (page 46).
I Hood release lever. See Opening and Closing the Hood (page 229).
K Ignition switch. See Ignition Switch (page 112).
L Steering wheel adjustment lever. See Adjusting the Steering Wheel (page
40).
M Horn.
N Climate control. See Climate Control (page 89).
O Audio unit. See Audio System (page 271).
12

At a Glance
Rear Exterior Overview
A B C
F E D
E214427
A Fuel filler flap. See Refueling (page 119).

B See Changing a Bulb (page 240).
C Auxiliary battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 239).
D See Changing a Bulb (page 240).
E Tire pressure. See Technical Specifications (page 264).
F See Changing a Road Wheel (page 258).
13

Child Safety
CHILD RESTRAINTS WARNINGS

Seatbelts and seats can become hot
WARNINGS in a vehicle that has been closed up
Children must always be properly in sunny weather, they could burn a
restrained. small child. Check seat covers and buckles
before you place a child anywhere near
This section provides useful them.
information on the installation and
Read and follow the child restraint
safe use of child restraints. Ford
manufacturer’s instructions when
strongly recommends that you read and
you are fitting a child restraint.
understand this section before carrying
children in your vehicle. Do not alter or modify child restraints
in any way.
It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure that Do not hold a child on your lap when
the children are seated in suitable child the vehicle is moving.
restraints prescribed by the laws of the
State or Territory in which the vehicle is Do not leave children unattended in
operated. your vehicle.
If you are in any doubt about the laws that On hot days, the temperature inside
apply in your location, please consult your the vehicle can rise very quickly.
local Authorised Ford Dealer or Local Exposure of people or animals to
Approved Child Restraint Fitting Station these high temperatures for even a short
for assistance. time can cause death or serious heat
related injuries, including brain damage.
WARNING
Small children are particularly at risk.
EXTREME HAZARD! Do not use a
Destroy the child restraint if it has
rearward facing child restraint on a
been in a severe crash, even if no
seat protected by an airbag in front
damage is visible.
of it.
SELECTING A CHILD
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
To provide protection, a child restraint
system should meet three requirements.
E211048
14

Child Safety
1. The child restraint system complies WARNINGS

with Australian Standard AS1754. Do not use a child restraint if the
Infants and children must be properly tether strap falls into a split in the
restrained at all times in an approved vehicle seat back or falls off the edge
child restraint which conforms to of the vehicle seat.
Australian Standards AS1754 - 2004
or later. Look for the Australian
Standard Approval Mark on the child After installing a child restraint system,
restraint. push and pull the system forward and back
and from side to side to verify that it is
2. The child restraint must be suitable secured.
for the size and weight of the child
and must be properly fitted and Be sure to read and follow the instructions
adjusted. Use the child restraint provided by the child restraint
exactly as shown in the instructions manufacturer. If you have any doubts
provided with the child restraint. If you contact the child restraint manufacturer
have any doubts, contact the child or consult an approved Restraint Fitting
restraint manufacturer or consult an Station. Your automobile club or local
approved Restraint Fitting Station. vehicle registration authority can provide
3. The child restraint system should location details of fitting stations.
fit the vehicle seating position (or When installing the child restraint
positions) where it will be used. Due attaching clip to the anchor fitting, raise
to variations in the design of child the head restraint (where fitted) and pass
restraint systems, vehicle seats and the tether strap between the head restraint
seatbelts, all child restraint systems supports. This will prevent the tether strap
may not fit all seating positions. Before from falling off the outboard edge of the
purchasing a child restraint system, it seating positions.
is recommended that the child restraint
system is tested in the specific vehicle
seating position (or positions) where
it is intended to be used. If a previously
purchased child restraint does not fit,
you may need to purchase a different
one that will fit.
INSTALLING CHILD
RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS E166723
EXTREME HAZARD! Do not use a
rearward facing child restraint on a Note: Side curtain air bags (where fitted)
seat protected by an airbag in front will not interfere with a properly installed
of it. child restraint system or booster seat,
because they are designed to inflate
Incorrectly fitted child restraints may downward from the headliner above the
swing, tip or come away causing doors along the side window openings.
death or injury.
15

Child Safety
When a child restraint system is not being 1. Pull the release strap upwards and
used, either remove it and store it in a safe move the seat back forwards. (When
place, or make sure it is properly secured. returning the seat back to the upright
An unsecured child restraint system can position, make sure it is securely
be thrown around the vehicle in a collision latched by attempting to move it back
or sudden stop and injure someone. and forth).
2. Remove the two small rectangular
CHILD RESTRAINT ANCHORAGE cutouts from the rear cloth trim to
LOCATIONS reveal the two child restraint anchor
Upper (top tether) anchorages - Double points (a hole with an internal screw
Cab thread).
WARNING
WARNING: child restraint
anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed 1
by correctly fitted child restraints. Under
no circumstances are they to be used for
adult seatbelts, harnesses or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
2
There are two child restraint anchorage
points on the rear panel of the Double Cab,
one behind each outboard seating position
in the locations shown below. Do not fit a
child restraint to the centre rear seat.
E131744
Installation of a child restraint anchor

fitting – Double Cab
The following illustration shows how to
install anchor fittings to the anchorage
points. Child restraint anchor fittings
conforming to Australian Standard
AS1754-2004 (or later) can be purchased
from child restraint manufacturers or
suppliers.
E136844
The anchorage components must be
selected and assembled as shown in the
illustration.
16

Child Safety
E212688
Illustrations of the restraint attaching clip

and anchor fitting are only applicable to
child restraints conforming to Australian
Standard AS1754-2004 (or later) . If your
child restraint does not have an approved
latched hook attachment clip as shown,
you should consult an approved Restraint
Fitting Station.
5mm 3 WARNINGS
Always ensure that the attaching clip
is properly engaged with the anchor
E134044 fitting and the tether strap length is
adjusted to remove any slack.
Install the standard 30mm bolt and the
5mm spacer, together with the anchor Always ensure that the locking
fitting and lock washer supplied with the mechanism of the rear seat back is
child restraint as illustrated. fully engaged when in the upright
position, by attempting to pull it down
The bolt thread should protrude at least again.
10mm beyond the spacer with the lock
washer, anchor fitting and spacer Do not attach a tether strap to
assembled together. anything other than the correct
tether anchor point.
Tighten the bolt with the anchor fitting
facing toward the front of the vehicle as Make sure that the seat back is
shown. secure and fully engaged in the
catch.
WARNING
Make sure that the tether strap
Do not over-tighten the attachment tightening mechanism remains
bolt. Maximum torque: 20 Nm accessible when the seat back is fully
engaged in the catch.
The diagram below shows the correct
installation and orientation of the
attaching clip and anchor fitting.
17

Child Safety
Upper (top tether) anchorages - Super 2. Lift up the cover on the back panel trim
Cab with a suitable tool.
WARNING The diagram below shows the correct

installation and orientation of the
WARNING: child restraint attaching clip to the anchor fitting.
anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed
by correctly fitted child restraints. Under
no circumstances are they to be used for
adult seatbelts, harnesses or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
There are two child restraint anchor fittings

on the rear panel of the Super Cab, one
behind each rear seating position in the
locations shown.
E175509
A
B
E175458
D
1
E175508
E134042
1. Each anchor fitting is accessed by

removing a plastic cover.
18

Child Safety
Illustrations of the restraint attaching clip

are only applicable to child restraints
conforming to Australian Standard
AS1754-2004 (or later). If your child
restraint does not have an approved
latched hook attachment clip as shown,
you should consult an approved Restraint
Fitting Station.
WARNINGS
Always ensure that the attaching clip
is properly engaged with the anchor
fitting and the tether strap length is
adjusted to remove any slack.
Always ensure that the locking
E132631
mechanism of the rear seat back is
fully engaged when in the upright
position, by attempting to pull it down PROTECTING LARGER CHILDREN
again.
The rear seats (where provided) are the
Do not attach a tether strap to safest place for children.
anything other than the correct
tether anchor point. When a child outgrows the recommended
weight or height limits for a forward facing
Make sure that the seat back is child restraint system, the child should sit
secure and fully engaged in the on a booster seat and wear a lap-sash
catch. seatbelt. The raised seating position will
Make sure that the tether strap allow you to position the shoulder strap of
tightening mechanism remains the adult seatbelt over the centre of your
accessible when the seat back is fully child's shoulder and the lap strap tightly
engaged in the catch. across its hips. A booster seat should be
used until the child is tall enough for the
lap-sash seatbelt to fit properly.
ISOFIX LOWER ANCHORAGES
Typical Booster Seat
WARNING
The ISOFIX lower anchorages must
be used in conjunction with the upper
(top tether) anchorages.
Your vehicle has ISOFIX lower anchorages

located on the outboard rear seats, where
the cushion and backrest meet.
E70710
19

Child Safety
WARNINGS
Do not install a booster seat with
only the lap strap of the seatbelt.
Do not install a booster seat with a
seatbelt that is slack or twisted.
CHECKING SEATBELT FIT

If the lap-sash seatbelt touches or crosses
the child's neck, then the child needs a
booster seat.
WARNINGS
Never wear a seatbelt across the
E132612
neck. This could result in serious neck
injury in the event of a collision.
The childproof locks are located on the
Do not put the seatbelt under your rear edge of each rear door and must be
child's arm or behind its back. set separately for each door.
Do not use pillows, books or towels Left-Hand Side
to boost your child's height.
Turn counterclockwise to lock and
Make sure that your children sit in an clockwise to unlock.
upright position.
Right-Hand Side
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS Turn clockwise to lock and
counterclockwise to unlock.
Manual Child Safety Locks
WARNING
You cannot open the doors from
inside if you have put the child safety
locks on.
20

Seatbelts
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS

Care should be taken to avoid
WARNINGS contamination of the webbing with
The wearing of a seatbelt is a polishes, oils and chemicals, and
mandatory requirement. Seatbelts particularly battery acid. Cleaning may
should be properly fastened and safely be carried out using mild soap and
adjusted before the vehicle is driven. Adjust water. The belt should be replaced if the
the driver's seat position before fastening webbing becomes frayed, contaminated
the seatbelt. or damaged.
Seatbelts are designed to bear upon No modifications or additions should
the bony structure of the body and be made by the user which will either
should be worn low across the front prevent the seatbelt adjusting
of the pelvis or the pelvis, chest and devices from operating to remove slack,
shoulders, as applicable; wearing the lap or prevent the seatbelt assembly from
section of the belt across the abdominal being adjusted to remove slack.
area must be avoided. Seatbelts are designed to be used
Wear a seatbelt and keep sufficient by adult sized occupants.
distance between yourself and the
steering wheel. Only when you use The driver and front passenger seatbelt
the seatbelt properly, can it hold you in systems are fitted with a seatbelt
position to achieve its optimum effect. See pretensioner. Seatbelt pretensioners have
Sitting in the Correct Position (page a lower deployment threshold than the
99). airbags. During minor collisions, it is
Never use a seatbelt for more than possible that only the seatbelt
one person; it is dangerous to put a pretensioners will deploy.
belt around a child being carried on
the occupant's lap. Status after a collision
Use the correct buckle for each WARNINGS
seatbelt. Seatbelts subjected to strain, as a
Do not use a seatbelt that is slack or result of an accident, should be
twisted. renewed and the anchorages
checked by a properly trained technician.
Do not wear thick clothing. The
If a seatbelt pretensioner has been
seatbelt must fit tightly around your
deployed, the seatbelt must be
body to achieve its optimum effect.
renewed.
Position the shoulder strap of the
seatbelt over the centre of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
21

Seatbelts
The seatbelt pretensioners at the front

seating positions are designed to tighten
the seatbelts when activated. In frontal
and near-frontal crashes, the seatbelt
pretensioners may be activated alone or,
if the crash is of sufficient severity, together
with the front airbags. The pretensioners
also activate when side airbags are
deployed.
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS

WARNINGS
Insert the tongue into the buckle until
you hear a distinct click. You have
not fastened the seatbelt properly if
you do not hear a click. E85817
Make sure that the seatbelts are

securely stowed away when not in
use and are not outside your vehicle
when closing the doors.
E212841
Pull the belt out steadily. It may lock if you

pull it sharply or if the vehicle is on a slope.
Press the red button on the buckle to
release the belt. Hold the tongue and let it
retract completely and smoothly to its
E74124
stowed position.
22

Seatbelts
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy
E170730
WARNING
E131388
Position the seatbelt correctly for
your safety and that of your unborn To adjust the shoulder belt height:
child. Do not use only the lap strap
or the shoulder strap. 1. Pull the locking button and slide the
height adjuster up or down.
Pregnant women should always wear their 2. Release the button and pull down on the
seatbelt. The lap belt portion of a height adjuster to make sure it is locked in
combination lap and shoulder belt should place.
be positioned low across the hips below
the belly and worn as tight as comfort will
allow. The shoulder belt should be SEATBELT REMINDER
positioned to cross the middle of the
shoulder and the centre of the chest. WARNING
The system will only provide
SEATBELT HEIGHT protection when you use the seatbelt
correctly.
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Position the seatbelt height adjuster
so that the seatbelt rests across the Type 1: The seatbelt warning lamp will be
middle of your shoulder. Failure to illuminated for 6 seconds when the ignition
adjust the seatbelt correctly could reduce is turned on to remind the driver to fasten
its effectiveness and increase the risk of the seatbelt.
injury in a crash. Type 2: The seatbelt warning lamp will be
illuminated at any time when the drivers
seatbelt is not fastened.
23

Seatbelts
Type 3: The seatbelt reminder warning

lamp illuminates and an audible warning
will sound if the driver or front passenger
seatbelt has not been fastened and the
vehicle exceeds a relatively low speed. It
will also illuminate if either of the seatbelt
is unfastened when the vehicle is moving.
The audible warning will go off after five
minutes but the seatbelt reminder warning
lamp will remain on until the seatbelt is
fastened.
Deactivating the seatbelt reminder

Contact an authorised dealer.
SEATBELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle seatbelts periodically
to make sure they work properly and are
not damaged. Inspect the vehicle seatbelts
to make sure there are no nicks, tears or
cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle
seatbelt assemblies, including retractors,
buckles, front seatbelt buckle assemblies,
buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if
equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters
(if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seat
back (if equipped), should be inspected
after a crash.
Ford Motor Company recommends that
all seatbelt assemblies in use in vehicles
involved in a crash be replaced. However,
if the crash was minor and an authorized
dealer finds that the belts do not show
damage and continue to operate properly,
they do not need to be replaced. Seatbelt
assemblies not in use during a crash should
also be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
Properly care for seatbelts. See Vehicle
Care (page 247).
24

Supplementary Restraints System

Use seat covers designed for seats
WARNINGS with side airbags. Have these fitted
Do not fit a non-Ford approved bull by an authorized dealer. Failure to
bar or nudge-bar to your vehicle as adhere to this warning could result in
this may interfere with the operation serious personal injury or death.
of the restraint system, including the air
bag deployment, and could result in injury Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
to yourself and others. Fitment of a cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
non-Ford approved bull bar or nudge-bar airbag deploys. This is normal.
may also void the vehicle's compliance
Note: Only wipe airbag covers with a damp
with Australian Design Rules.
cloth.
Do not modify the front of your
vehicle in any way. This could DRIVER & FRONT PASSENGER
adversely affect deployment of the AIRBAG
airbags. Failure to adhere to this warning
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
Wear a seatbelt and keep sufficient
distance between yourself and the
steering wheel. Only when you use
the seatbelt correctly, can it hold you in a
position that allows the airbag to achieve
its optimum effect. See Sitting in the
Correct Position (page 99). Failure to
adhere to this warning could result in
serious personal injury or death.
E151127
Repairs to the steering wheel,
steering column, seats, airbags and The driver and front passenger airbag will
seatbelts must be carried out by an deploy during significant frontal or
authorized dealer. Failure to adhere to this near-frontal collisions. The airbags will
warning could result in serious personal inflate within a few thousandths of a
injury or death. second and deflate on contact with the
Keep the areas in front of the airbags occupant, thus cushioning forward body
free from obstruction. Do not affix movement. During minor frontal collisions,
anything to or over the airbag covers. overturns, rear collisions and side
In the event of a crash, hard objects could collisions, the front passenger airbag will
cause serious personal injury or death. not deploy.
Do not puncture the seat with sharp SIDE AIRBAGS

objects. This could damage and
adversely affect deployment of the WARNING
airbags. Failure to adhere to this warning Use seat covers designed for seats
could result in serious personal injury or with side airbags. Have these fitted
death. by an authorized dealer.
25

Supplementary Restraints System
Curtain airbags are fitted inside the trim

panels over the front and rear side
windows. Moulded badges in the B-pillar
trim panels indicate that curtain airbags
are fitted to your vehicle.
The curtain airbags will deploy during
significant lateral collisions. The airbag will
inflate within a few thousandths of a
second and deflate on contact with the
occupants, thus providing protection for
the head. During minor lateral collisions,
front collisions, rear collisions, or overturns
the curtain airbags will not deploy.
E72658
Side airbags are fitted inside the seat back

of the front seats. A label indicates that
side airbags are fitted to your vehicle.
The side airbags will deploy during
significant lateral collisions. The airbags
will inflate within a few thousandths of a
second and deflate on contact with the
occupants, thus providing protection for
the chest and shoulder areas. During minor
lateral collisions, overturns, front collisions
and rear collisions, the side airbags will not
deploy.
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS
E75004
26

GENERAL INFORMATION ON REMOTE CONTROL

RADIO FREQUENCIES
You can program a maximum of eight
Note: Changes or modifications not remote controls to your vehicle. This
expressly approved by the party responsible includes any you recieved with your
for compliance could void the user’s vehicle. The remote controls must remain
authority to operate the equipment. inside your vehicle during the programming
procedure. Fasten the front seatbelts and
The typical operating range for your close all doors to make sure that
transmitter is approximately 10 m. conflicting chimes do not sound during
A decrease in operating range could be programming.
caused by:
Programming a New Remote
• weather conditions Control
• nearby radio towers
Contact an authorized dealer.
• structures around your vehicle
• other vehicles parked next to your Reprogramming the Unlocking
vehicle. Function
The radio frequency used by your remote Note: When you press the unlock button,
control can also be used by other radio either all the doors are unlocked or only the
transmitters, for example amateur radios, driver door is unlocked. Pressing the unlock
medical equipment, wireless headphones, button again unlocks all the doors.
wireless remote controls, cell phones,
battery chargers and alarm systems. If the Press and hold the unlock and lock buttons
frequencies are jammed, you will not be on the remote control simultaneously for
able to use your remote control. You can at least four seconds with the ignition off.
lock and unlock the doors with the key. The direction indicators will flash twice to
indicate a change to the unlocking mode.
Note: Make sure your vehicle is locked
before leaving it unattended. To return to the original unlocking function,
repeat the process.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button Programming the additional key
unintentionally.
Note: You need to have two programmed
Note: The remote control contains sensitive keys for this procedure.
electrical components. Exposure to moisture
or impact may cause permanent damage. 1. Insert the first key and turn the ignition
on.
2. Remove the key within 10 seconds.
3. Insert the second key within 10 seconds
and turn the ignition on.
4. Remove the key within 10 seconds.
5. Insert the additional key within 10
seconds.
27

Changing the Remote Control 3. Carefully remove the cover.

Battery
Make sure that you dispose of
old batteries in an
E107998 environmentally friendly way.
Seek advice from your local authority
about recycling old batteries.
Remote Control With a Folding Key

Blade - Type 1
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
E128811
4. Turn the remote control over to remove

the battery.
1
2
E128809 4
1. Insert a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, in the position shown and E126280
gently push the clip.
Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or
2. Press the clip down to release the the printed circuit board with the
battery cover. screwdriver.
5. Install a new battery with the + facing
upward.
6. Reinstall the battery cover.
Remote Control With a Folding Key

Blade - Type 2
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
E128810
28

E168254
1. Press the button to release the key

before beginning the procedure.
E151800
Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or

the printed circuit board with the
screwdriver.
5. Carefully remove the battery with the
screwdriver.
E168255
2. Insert a suitable tool, for example a

screwdriver, in the position shown and
gently push the clip.
3. Press the clip down to release the
battery cover.
E151801
6. Remove the old battery.

7. Install a new battery with the + facing
upward.
8. Reinstall the battery cover.
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR

REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
E151799 be purchased from an authorized dealer.
4. Carefully remove the cover. Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 38).
29

MyKey™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Configurable Settings

With an admin key, you can configure
MyKey allows you to program keys with
certain MyKey settings when you first
restricted driving modes to promote good
create a MyKey and before you recycle the
driving habits. All but one of the keys can
key or restart the vehicle. You can also
be activated with these restricted modes.
change the settings afterward with an
Any keys that remain unprogrammed are MyKey key.
referred to as administrator keys or admin
• A vehicle speed limit can be set.
keys. They can be used to:
Warnings will be shown in the display
• Create a MyKey. followed by an audible tone when your
• Program configurable MyKey settings. vehicle reaches the set speed. You
cannot override the set speed by fully
• Clear all MyKey features. depressing the accelerator pedal or by
When you have created a MyKey, you can setting cruise control.
access the following information by using
the information display to determine: WARNING
• How many admin keys and MyKeys are Do not set MyKey maximum speed
programmed to your vehicle. limit to a limit that will prevent the
driver from maintaining a safe speed
• The total distance your vehicle traveled considering posted speed limits and
with a MyKey. prevailing road conditions. The driver is
Note: Switch the vehicle on to use the always responsible to drive in accordance
system. with local laws and prevailing conditions.
Failure to do so could result in accident or
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the injury.
same settings. You cannot program them
individually.
• Various vehicle speed minders can be
Non-configurable Settings set. Once you select a speed, it will be
shown in the display, followed by an
The following settings cannot be changed audible tone when the preselected
by an MyKey key user: vehicle speed is exceeded.
• Seatbelt reminder. You cannot disable • Audio system maximum volume of
this feature. The audio system will 45%. A message will be shown in the
mute when the front seat passengers’ display when you attempt to exceed
seatbelts are not fastened. the limited volume. Also, the
• Early low fuel or charge. The low-fuel speed-sensitive or compensated
or low charge warning activates earlier, automatic volume control will be
giving the MyKey user more time to disabled.
refuel or recharge. • Always on setting. When this is
• Driver assist features are forced on: selected, you will not be able to switch
parking aid and Blind Spot Information off AdvanceTrac™ or traction control,
System (BLIS) with cross traffic alert. 911 Assist or Emergency Assistance, or
• Satellite radio adult content the do not disturb feature.
restrictions.
30

MyKey™
CREATING A MYKEY 2. Switch the ignition on.

3. Access the main menu on the
Use the information display to create a information display controls. Use the
MyKey: arrow keys to get to the following menu
1. Insert the key you want to program into selections:
the ignition.
Message Action and Description
Settings Press the OK button or the right arrow key.

MyKey Press the OK button or the right arrow key.
Create MyKey Press the OK button or the right arrow key.
When prompted, hold the OK button until Programming/Changing

you see a message informing you to label Configurable Settings
this key as a MyKey. The key will be
restricted at the next start. Use the information display to access your
configurable MyKey settings.
MyKey is successfully created. Make sure
you label it so you can distinguish it from 1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
the admin keys. key or remote control.
You can also program configurable 2. Access the main menu on the
settings for the key(s). See information display controls. Use the
Programming/Changing Configurable arrow keys to get to the following menu
Settings. selections:
Settings Press the OK button or the right arrow key.

MyKey Press the OK button or the right arrow key.
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey

settings at any time during the same key CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you
have switched the vehicle off, however, you You can clear or change your MyKey
will need an admin key to change or clear settings using the information display
your MyKey settings. control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 67).
Switch the ignition on using an admin key
or remote control.
31

MyKey™
To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, press the left arrow button to access
the main menu and scroll to:
Settings Press the OK button.

MyKey Press the OK button.
Clear MyKey Press and hold the OK button until the following message
displays.
All MyKeys
Cleared
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to
their original admin key status.
32

MyKey™
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM You can find information on programmed

MyKey(s) using the information display
STATUS control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 67).
To find information on programmed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to

access the main menu and scroll to:
Message Description

MyKey Press the OK button.
Select one of the following:
MyKey Dist. Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way
to delete the accumulated distance is by using an admin key
to clear your MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as
expected, then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or
an admin key user recently cleared and then recreated a
MyKey.
{0} MyKeys Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle.
Use this feature to detect how many MyKeys you have for
your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.
{0} Admin Keys Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your
vehicle. Use this feature to determine how many unrestricted
keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional
MyKey has been programmed.
33

MyKey™
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Condition Potential Causes
I cannot create a MyKey. • The key or transmitter used to start the

vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle is the only admin key (there always
has to be at least one admin key).
• SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
I cannot program the configurable • The key or transmitter used to start your
settings. vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 31).
I cannot clear the MyKeys. • The key or transmitter used to start your
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 31).
I lost the only admin key. Purchase a new key from an authorized dealer.
I lost a key. Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft
System (page 38).
MyKey distances do not accumulate. • The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
• An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys
and created new MyKeys.
• The key system has been reset.
34

Locks
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING Note: When the doors have been unlocked
using this method, the doors must be locked
Note: Always take your keys and lock all individually until the central locking function
doors when leaving your vehicle. has been repaired.
Note: All the other doors can be unlocked
Locking and unlocking the doors from inside your vehicle by pressing the
with the key unlock button on the driver or front
passenger door panels.
A A Locking and unlocking the doors
with the remote control
Automatic relocking: The doors will
B B relock automatically if you do not open a
door within 45 seconds of unlocking the
doors with the remote control. The door
locks and the alarm will return to their
previous state.
A
B
B
C
E131447
E131278
A Unlock.
B Lock. A Key fold/unfold button.
Note: To double lock the doors, turn the B Unlock.
key to the lock position twice within three
seconds. C Lock.
Note: If the child safety locks are on and Press the button B once to unlock the
you pull the interior handle, you only switch vehicle.
off the emergency locking, not the child
safety lock. Press the button C once to activate central
locking.
Note: Central locking is activated only when
all the passenger doors are closed.
35

Locks
Press the button C twice within four Child play protection function
seconds to double lock the doors.
If the remote control buttons are pressed
Note: Double locking is activated only when continuously several times, the locking and
all the passenger doors are closed and the unlocking function will be blocked for a
bonnet is closed in the vehicle fitted with while to avoid door latches from
alarm. overheating.
WARNING
Locking and unlocking the doors
Do not activate double locking when from inside
persons or animals are inside the
vehicle. You will not be able to Press the button. For item
unlock the doors from inside if you have location. See At a Glance (page
double locked them. E131288
9).
Note: If the ignition is switched on with the

double locking function activated, the lock
will automatically return to single lock stage.
Double locking is a theft protection feature
that prevents someone from opening the
doors from the inside.
A
Note: The driver’s door can be unlocked B
with the key. This needs to be used if the
remote control is not functioning.
Note: If the vehicle remains locked for E154892
several weeks, the remote control will be
disabled. The vehicle must be unlocked and
the engine started using the key. Unlocking A Unlock.
and starting the vehicle once will enable the B Open.
remote control.
Reprogramming the unlocking function

Driver configuration mode
The unlocking function may be Note: This operation has to be done within
reprogrammed so that only the driver’s 30 seconds.
door is unlocked. See Replacing a Lost 1. Switch the ignition on.
Key or Remote Control (page 29). 2. Press door lock button three times.
Locking and unlocking confirmation 3. Switch the ignition off.
Note: When you lock the doors, the 4. Press door lock button three times.
direction indicators will flash once. 5. Switch the ignition on.
When you double lock the doors, the 6. Press door lock button two times.
direction indicators will flash twice. The system will chirp twice to indicate that
When you unlock the doors the direction the driver configuration mode is enabled.
indicators will flash one long flash.
36

Locks
Once in driver configuration mode, follow

the steps mentioned below to toggle the
status of the automatic locking by speed
or automatic unlocking.
Automatic locking by speed

Note: Automatic locking by speed is default
disabled.
All the doors will lock automatically when
the vehicle is driven at or above 7 km/h.
Press the central lock or unlock button
twice within three seconds and wait for
three seconds to toggle the automatic
locking by speed function. The system will
chirp when toggling.
Automatic unlocking
Note: Automatic unlock is default enabled.
Press the central lock or unlock button
three time within three seconds and wait
for three seconds to toggle the automatic
unlocking function.
If the automatic unlocking function is
enabled:
• All doors will be unlocked while
opening the driver door or front
passenger door (vehicles not delivered
with remote control) from inside, with
the key in ignition.
If the automatic unlocking function is
disabled:
• Only the respective door will be
unlocked while opening from inside.
Note: Opening the rear doors will never
unlock the other doors, when opened from
inside.
37

Security
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT ANTI-THEFT ALARM

SYSTEM
Alarm System
Principle of Operation Your vehicle may have one or more of the
The system prevents someone from following alarm systems:
starting the engine with an incorrectly • Perimeter alarm with interior sensors.
coded key. • Perimeter alarm with interior sensors
and battery back-up sounder.
Coded Keys
• Inclination or motion sensor to set off
If you lose a key, you can purchase a the alarm if the vehicle is moved or
replacement from an authorized dealer. If raised.
possible, provide them with the key
number from the tag provided with the Perimeter Alarm
original keys. You can also obtain extra
The perimeter alarm is a deterrent against
keys from an authorized dealer.
unauthorized access to your vehicle
Note: Have all of your remaining keys through the doors, luggage compartment
erased and recoded if you lose a key. Have and the hood.
replacement keys coded together with
recoding your remaining keys. See an Panic Alarm
authorized dealer for further information.
The alarm can be activated using the
Note: Do not shield your keys with metal remote control.
objects. This may prevent the receiver from
recognizing a coded key. Interior Sensors
Arming the Engine Immobilizer

When you switch the ignition off the engine
immobilizer will arm automatically after a
short time.
Disarming the Engine Immobilizer

When you switch the ignition on the engine
immobilizer will disarm automatically if a E133698
correctly coded key is used.
The sensors act as a deterrent against
If you are unable to start the engine with a unauthorized access by sensing any
correctly coded key, have your vehicle movement within your vehicle.
checked by an authorized dealer.
Arming the alarm turns on the interior
sensors.
Note: Do not cover the interior lamp
scanning sensors.
38

Security
Note: Do not arm the alarm with full guard Note: Do not arm the alarm with full guard
if passengers, animals or other moving if passengers, animals or other moving
objects are inside your vehicle, as this could objects are inside your vehicle, as this could
trigger the alarm. trigger the alarm.
Note: Do not leave the glasses holder open. Reduced Guard
Note: To permanently switch off the interior
motion sensor, see an authorized dealer. In reduced guard, the interior sensors are
off when you arm the alarm.
Note: Fuel fired heater may trigger false
alarms. Note: You can set the alarm to reduced
guard for the current ignition cycle only.
Inclination/ Motion Sensor
Selecting Full or Reduced Guard
The sensors act as a deterrent against
unauthorized access by sensing any Full guard is the standard setting.
movement within your vehicle. You can switch this feature on or off and
adjust the settings using the information
Triggering the Alarm display.
• If someone opens a door or the hood Note: You can set the alarm to reduced
without a valid key or remote control. guard for the current ignition cycle only.
• If someone removes the multi-function The alarm resets to full guard the next time
display. you unlock and then relock the vehicle with
• If you switch the ignition on without a the remote control.
valid key.
Arming the Alarm
• If the interior sensors detect movement
within your vehicle. Press the lock button once to lock your
• On vehicles with a battery back-up vehicle and arm the alarm.
sounder, if someone disconnects your
Disarming the Alarm
vehicle battery or the battery back-up
sounder itself. Disarm the alarm by any of the following
If the alarm sounds, the alarm horn will actions:
sound for 30 seconds and the hazard • Unlock the doors with the key and
warning lamps flash for five minutes. switch the ignition on with a correctly
Any further attempts to carry out one of coded key within 12 seconds.
the above will sound the alarm again. • Unlock the doors or luggage
compartment using the remote control.
Full and Reduced Guard
Full Guard
Full guard is the standard setting.
In full guard, the interior sensors are on
when you arm the alarm.
39

Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE STEERING

WHEEL
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the

correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 99).
2 3
E95179
3. Lock the steering column.
AUDIO CONTROL
Select the required source on the audio
unit.
You can operate the following functions
1 with the control:
E161488
1. Unlock the steering column.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired A
position. B
E
C
D
E199065
A Volume up.
B Seek down or previous.
40

Steering Wheel
C Seek up or next. CRUISE CONTROL

D Mute.
E Volume down.
VOICE CONTROL
A B
A F C
B E D
E200943
C A Cruise control On and off.

B Resume.
C Set speed increase.
E200787
D Set speed decrease.
A Press the button to switch on or E Cancel.

off the voice control. F Speed limiter on and off.
B Press the button to accept
phone call.
INFORMATION DISPLAY
C Press the button to end phone
call. CONTROL
E201420
See General Information (page 67).
41

Wipers and Washers
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Operating this function with the
engine off will drain the battery.
Type 1
A
E222245
A Single wipe.
B B Intermittent wipe.
C C Normal wipe.
D D High-speed wipe.
E131452
Note: Move to position O marked on the
A Single wipe. wiper lever to switch off.
B Intermittent wipe or autowipers. Note: Switch the windshield wipers off
before switching the ignition off. Otherwise,
C Normal wipe. the wipers will stop at the current operating
D High speed wipe. position.
Intermittent Wipe
Type 2
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before engine off will drain the battery.
you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers and vehicle power off before using
an automatic car wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
See Changing the Wiper Blades (page 239).
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield.This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
42

Wipers and Washers
Type 1 Speed Dependent Wipers

When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.
A
AUTOWIPERS
Type 1
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.
B
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
E131453
C
A Long wipe interval. wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
B Intermittent wipe. issue, install new wiper blades.
C Short wipe interval. Note: During wet or winter driving
conditions with ice, snow or a salty road
mist, inconsistent or unexpected wiping or
Type 2 smearing may occur.
In these conditions, you can do the
following:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
• Switch the autowipers off.
Note: Make sure the wiper is switched off
before switching the ignition off. Otherwise,
the wipers will stop at the current operating
position.
E222246
A Short-wipe interval.
B Intermittent wipe.
C Long-wipe interval.
Push the wiper lever up to switch the

wipers on. Use the rotary control to adjust
the intermittent wipe interval.
43

Wipers and Washers

A wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: During wet or winter driving
conditions with ice, snow or a salty road
mist, inconsistent or unexpected wiping or
smearing may occur.
B In these conditions, you can do the
following:
E131453
C • Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
A High sensitivity.
• Switch the autowipers off.
B On.
Note: Make sure the wiper is switched off
C Low sensitivity. before switching the ignition off. Otherwise,
the wipers will stop at the current operating
Autowipers uses a rain sensor located in position.
the area around the interior mirror. The
wipers will operate when the rain sensor
detects water on the windshield. The rain
sensor will continue to monitor the amount
of water on the windshield and
automatically adjust the speed of the
wipers.
Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity of the autowipers. When you
select low sensitivity, the wipers will
operate when the sensor detects a large
amount of water on the windshield. When
you select high sensitivity, the wipers will E222244
operate when the sensor detects a small
amount of water on the windshield. A High sensitivity.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean. B On.
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects C Low sensitivity.
hit the windshield.
Autowipers uses a rain sensor located in
Type 2 the area around the interior mirror. The
wipers will operate when the rain sensor
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before detects water on the windshield. The rain
you switch the windshield wipers on. sensor will continue to monitor the amount
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield of water on the windshield and
wipers off before entering a car wash. automatically adjust the speed of the
wipers.
44

Wipers and Washers
Use the rotary control to adjust the Type 2

sensitivity of the autowipers. When you
select low sensitivity, the wipers will Note: Operating this function with the
operate when the sensor detects a large engine off will drain the battery.
amount of water on the windshield. When Note: Do not operate the washers when
you select high sensitivity, the wipers will the washer reservoir is empty. This may
operate when the sensor detects a small cause the washer pump to overheat.
amount of water on the windshield.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects
hit the windshield.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Type 1
engine off will drain the battery.
E222247
Note: Do not operate the washers when

the washer reservoir is empty.
Pull the lever toward you to operate the
windshield washers. The wiper will be
activated within a second.
In order to reduce water usage, the washer
is functioned to stop after operating
continuously for 10 seconds. Pull the lever
toward you to operate the windshield
washers.
E131460
Note: Do not operate the washers when

the washer reservoir is empty.
Pull the lever toward you to operate the
windshield washers. The wiper will be
activated within a second.
In order to reduce water usage, the washer
is functioned to stop after operating
continuously for 10 seconds. Pull the lever
toward you to operate the windshield
washers.
45

Lighting
GENERAL INFORMATION LIGHTING CONTROL

Condensation in Lamp Assemblies Type 1
Exterior lamps have vents to
accommodate normal changes in air A
pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist D B
can form on the interior of the lens. The
fine mist eventually clears and exits C
through the vents during normal operation. E139254
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours A Off.

under dry weather conditions.
B Auto-light control.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks, C Headlamps.
drip marks or large droplets). D Position lamps, instrument panel
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the lamps, license plate lamps and
lens. tail lamps.
Examples of unacceptable condensation Type 2
are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
E142449
A Off.
B Position lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and
tail lamps.
C Headlamps.
46

Lighting
Position Lamps Select position B on the lighting controls

to switch the position lamps on. The
WARNING position lamps operate with the ignition
Prolonged use of the position lamps on or off.
when the ignition is off will cause the
Parking Lamps
battery to run out of charge.
WARNING
Note: Switch on the position lamp within Prolonged use of the parking lamps
10 minutes from the key out, reinsert the key when the ignition is off will cause the
if exceeded. battery to run out of charge.
Type 1
Note: Switch on the parking lamp within 10
minutes from the key out, reinsert the key if
A exceeded.
Note: The parking lamps are a feature of
the position lamps that uses the direction
indicator to illuminate a single desired
position lamp.
Type 1
D B Select position D on the lighting controls
to switch the parking lamps on. The
C parking lamps operate with the ignition on
E139254
or off.
Select position D on the lighting controls
to switch the position lamps on. The
position lamps operate with the ignition
on or off.
Type 2
E212053
Move the lever up or down to switch on the

desired parking lamp.
E142449
47

Lighting
Type 2 Type 1
Select position B on the lighting controls
to switch the parking lamps on. The
parking lamps operate with the ignition on
or off.
E139256
Type 2
E211866
Move the lever up or down to switch on the

desired parking lamp.
Headlamp Low and High Beam

Push the lever away from you to switch
the high beam on.
Headlamp Flasher E142451
Slightly pull the lever toward you and When the lighting control is in the
release it to flash the headlamps. autolamps position, the headlamps
automatically turn on in low light situations
or when the wipers turn on.
AUTOLAMPS
If equipped, the following also activate
when the lighting control is in the
WARNING
autolamps position and you switch them
The autolamps switch position may on in the information display:
not activate the headlamps in all low • Configurable daytime running lamps.
visibility conditions, such as daytime
fog. Always ensure that your headlamps • Automatic high beam control.
are switched to auto or on, as appropriate, • Adaptive headlamp control.
during all low visibility conditions. Failure
The headlamps remain on for a period of
to do so may result in a crash.
time after you switch the ignition off. Use
the information display controls to adjust
the period of time that the headlamps
remain on. See Information Displays
(page 67).
48

Lighting
Note: With the headlamps in the Type 2

autolamps position, you cannot switch the
high beam headlamps on until the
autolamps system turns the low beam
headlamps on.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS

WARNING
Always remember to switch your
headlamps on in low light situations
E132709
or during inclement weather. The
system does not activate the tail lamps Press the button to switch the fog lamps
and may not provide adequate lighting on or off.
during these conditions. Failure to activate
your headlamps under these conditions Rotate the control lever to switch the fog
may result in a collision. lamps on or off.
You can switch the fog lamps on when the
To switch the system on: lighting control is in any position except
off.
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Switch the lighting control to the off or Note: Only use fog lamps during reduced
autolamp position. visibility, for example fog, snow or heavy
rain.
Note: If you switch autolamps on, you can
FRONT FOG LAMPS only switch the front fog lamps on when the
headlamps are on.
Type 1
REAR FOG LAMPS

Type 1
E205677
E205678
49

Lighting
Rotate the control lever to switch the fog Type 1

lamps on or off.
Type 2
A
1
E132710 B
Press the button to switch the fog lamps E133544
on or off.
You can only switch the rear fog lamps on A Raise headlamp beams.
when the front fog lamps or the B Lower headlamp beams.
headlamps are on.
Note: Use the rear fog lamps only when Type 2
visibility is less than 50 m.
Note: Do not switch on the rear fog lamps
when it is raining or snowing.
Note: If you switch autolamps on, you can
only switch the high beam headlamps on 2
when the autolamps turn the headlamps
on.
2
HEADLAMP LEVELING
1
Headlamp leveling is provided to avoid
glare for other road users when the vehicle
is loaded in a number of different
conditions. E132711
You can adjust the level of the headlamp 1. Press to release the control.
beams according to the vehicle load.
2. Rotate the control to the required
To adjust the level of the headlamp setting.
beams:
3. Press to close the control.
50

Lighting
Headlamp Leveling to Suit Vehicle DIRECTION INDICATORS

Load
1
E169255
Push the lever up or down to use the

1 direction indicators.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times to
2 indicate a lane change.
3 APPROACH LAMPS (If Equipped)

The side repeaters, number plate lamp and
the puddle lamps will come on and stays
illuminated for 25 seconds when the
E206726
vehicle is unlocked with the remote control.
Set the headlamp leveling to the If you open a door the light will stay on
corresponding switch setting, depending until:
on the vehicles loading condition. • The door is closed
Set the headlamp leveling control to zero • Ignition is turned on
when your vehicle is unloaded.
• 10 minutes
51

Lighting
INTERIOR LAMPS Reading lamps
Courtesy lamp
A B C
E112208
If you switch off the ignition, the reading

lamps will go off automatically after some
E112207 time to prevent the vehicle battery from
discharging. To switch them back on,
A Off. switch on the ignition for a short time.
B Door contact.
C On. AMBIENT LIGHTING
If you set the switch to position B, the Adjust the ambient lighting using the
courtesy lamp will come on when you touchscreen. See SYNC™ 2 (page 329).
unlock or open a door. If you leave a door
open with the ignition switch off, the CARGO LAMPS
courtesy lamp will go off automatically
after some time to prevent the vehicle The cargo lamp is located above the load
battery from discharging. To switch it back compartment.
on, switch on the ignition for a short time.
Operation of the cargo lamp is only
The courtesy lamp will also come on when possible when the vehicle is stationary
you switch off the ignition. It will go off (automatic transmission must be in park
automatically after a short time or when (P), park brake must be applied for manual
you start or restart the engine. transmission) and either of the following
If you set the switch to position C with the conditions are met:
ignition switch off, the courtesy lamp will • The driver or passenger door is open.
come on. It will go off automatically after
a short time to prevent the vehicle battery • The engine is off (ignition in the Off or
from discharging. To switch it back on, Acc. Position).
switch on the ignition for a short time.
52

Lighting
E220410
Note: The cargo lamp operates on a timer

and will turn off when the timer runs out or
when one of the conditions are no longer
met.
Once the conditions are met the cargo
lamp will turn on automatically.
If the conditions are met and the timer runs
out the cargo lamp can be activated by
pressing the switch. The cargo lamp
cannot be turned off by pressing the
switch.
53

Windows and Mirrors
POWER WINDOWS Driver’s Door Switches (Double

Cab)
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play B
with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
When closing the power windows,
you should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
A
of the window openings.
If the vehicle is to be left
unsupervised, the vehicle key should E131466
be taken to ensure that the windows

are not operated inadvertently. A Press the switch to open the
When closing the power windows, window.
you should verify they are free of B Lift the switch to close the
obstructions and make sure that window.
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the window openings.
Driver’s Door Switches (Single and
Stretch Cab)
Note: If you operate the switches often
during a short period of time the system
might become inoperable for a certain time B
to prevent damage due to overheating.
Note: If you operate both the switch on the
relevant door and the switch for that
window on the driver’s door at the same
time, the window will stop moving.
A
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows are open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
E131469
A Press the switch to open the

window.
B Lift the switch to close the
window.
54

Windows and Mirrors
Front and Rear Passengers’ Door Note: In vehicles without global opening
Switches and closing, the rear windows cannot be
operated from driver side when the safety
switch is pressed. In certain vehicles front
B passenger windows cannot be operated as
well.
E131467
E131468
A Press the switch to open the Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window. window controls.
B Lift the switch to close the Resetting the Memory of the
window. Electric Windows - Vehicle with
One Touch Up/Down on Driver
Opening and Closing the Driver Side only
Side Window Automatically
WARNING
Press or lift the switch to the second action
point and release it. The bounce back feature remains
turned off until you reset the
Press again or lift it to stop the window. memory.
Opening and Closing Other
Windows Automatically In the event of a flat battery or after the
battery has been disconnected from the
Press or lift the switch to the second action vehicle, you must reset the memory for
point and release it. driver window.
Press again or lift it to stop the window. 1. Open the window and then try to close
using the one-touch feature.
Safety Switch for the Rear
Windows 2. Lift and hold the switch to second
action point until the window is fully
Note: You can always operate the rear closed.
windows and front passenger window from 3. Hold the switch lifted for more than
the driver’s door if global opening and two seconds and release.
closing is fitted.
4. Open the window using the first action
point and try to close it automatically
using second action point.
55

Windows and Mirrors
5. If the window does not open or close 4. The window will go past the point of
automatically when the switch is resistance and you can close it fully.
pressed or lifted to second action See an authorized dealer as soon as
points, repeat the procedure. possible if the window does not close after
Safety Mode the third attempt.
Resetting the Bounce-Back Feature

WARNING
The anti-trap function is not active WARNING
during this procedure. The bounce-back feature remains
turned off until you reset the
If the system detects a malfunction, it memory.
enters a safety mode. The windows will
move for only about 0.5 seconds at a time If you have disconnected the battery, you
and then stop again. Close the windows must reset the bounce-back memory
by pressing the switch again when the separately for each window.
windows stop moving.
1. Lift and hold the switch until the
Contact an authorized dealer. window is fully closed.
Bounce-Back 2. Release the switch.
3. Lift the switch again for one second.
The window will automatically stop and
reverse some distance if it detects an 4. Press and hold the switch until the
obstacle while closing. window is fully open.
5. Release the switch.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
6. Lift and hold the switch until the
WARNING window is fully closed.
When you override the bounce-back 7. Open the window and then try to close
feature the window will not reverse it automatically.
if it detects an obstacle. Take care 8. Reset and repeat the procedure if the
when closing the windows to avoid window does not close automatically.
personal injury.
GLOBAL OPENING AND
Proceed as follows to override this
protection feature when there is a CLOSING
resistance, for example in winter:
You can use the remote control to operate
1. Close the window twice until it reaches the windows with the ignition off.
the point of resistance and let it
reverse. Note: You can enable or disable this feature
in the information display or see an
2. Close the window a third time to the authorized dealer. See General
point of resistance. Information (page 67).
3. The bounce-back feature is now Note: To operate this feature, accessory
disabled and you can close the window delay must not be active.
manually
56

Windows and Mirrors
Opening the Windows

You can only open the windows for a short
time after you unlock your vehicle with the
remote control. After you unlock your
vehicle, press and hold the remote control
unlock button to open the windows and
vent the moonroof. Release the button
once movement starts. Press the lock or
unlock button to stop movement.
Closing the Windows

WARNING B
When closing the windows and A C
moonroof, you should verify they are E131480
free of obstructions and make sure
that children and pets are not in the A Left-hand side.
proximity of the window openings.
B Off.
To close the windows and moonroof, press C Right-hand side.
and hold the remote control lock button.
Release the button once movement starts.
Press the lock or unlock button to stop
movement.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving. This could result
in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
E131481
Press the arrows to adjust the mirror.
Heated Exterior Mirrors

The heated exterior mirrors will remove
ice, mist and fog.
57

Windows and Mirrors
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of

any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
Push the mirror toward the door window petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
glass. products.
Make sure that you fully engage the mirror You can adjust the interior mirror to your
in its support when returning it to its preference. Some mirrors also have a
original position. second pivot point. This lets you move the
mirror head up or down and from side to
Power-Folding Mirrors side.
The power folding mirrors operate with the Pull the tab below the mirror toward you
ignition on, and for several minutes after to reduce glare at night.
you switch the ignition off.
Note: The mirrors no longer operate if you Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
switch the ignition off and open a door. Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. Mirror performance
may be affected. A rear center passenger or
raised rear center head restraint may also
block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce
glare when bright lights are detected from
behind your vehicle. It will automatically
return to normal reflection when you select
reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
E131482
Press the button to fold the mirrors inward.

Release the button to stop and reverse the
direction of movement, or to fold the
mirrors outward.
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirror when your
vehicle is moving.
58

Instrument Cluster
GAUGES
Type 1
E144485
A Tachograph.
B Multi-function display.
C Speedometer.
D Fuel gauge.
E Engine coolant temperature gauge.
59

Instrument Cluster
Type 2
B A B
E205854
A Speedometer.
B Multi-function display.
Note: In the design and manufacture of Compass

instrumentation, Ford comply with the
government regulations that the indicated Displays the vehicle’s heading direction.
value of the speedometer is not less than
the actual speed. In normal operation, Trip Computer
customers may be observed by other
See General Information (page 67).
instruments (such as a GPS Unit) that the
indicated speed is slightly faster than the Vehicle Settings and Personalization
actual vehicle speed. This is normal and
does not represent an instrument See General Information (page 67).
malfunction.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Information Display Gauge
Odometer At normal operating temperature, the
needle will remain in the center section. If
Registers the accumulated distance your the needle enters the red section, the
vehicle has traveled. engine is overheating. Stop the engine,
switch the ignition off and determine the
Outside Air Temperature cause once the engine has cooled down.
Shows the outside air temperature.
60

Instrument Cluster
Note: Do not restart the engine until the • It may take a short time for the needle
cause of overheating has been determined to reach F after leaving the gas station.
and resolved. This is normal and depends upon the
slope of pavement at the gas station.
WARNING
• The fuel amount dispensed into the
Never remove the coolant reservoir tank is a little less or more than the
cap while the engine is running or hot. gauge indicated. This is normal and
depends upon the slope of pavement
Fuel Gauge at the gas station.
• If the gas station nozzle shuts off
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will before the tank is full, try a different
indicate approximately how much fuel is gas pump nozzle.
left in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent to
the fuel pump symbol indicates on which Low Fuel Reminder
side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is
located. A low fuel reminder triggers when the fuel
gauge needle is at approximately 1/16th.
After refueling some variability in needle
position is normal:
Variations:
Driving type (fuel economy Fuel gauge position Distance-to-empty
conditions)
Highway driving 1/16th 56–129 km

Severe duty driving (trailer 1/16th 56 km
towing, extended idle)
Note: Depending on your vehicle

specification, some warning lamps and
WARNING LAMPS AND indicators may not be active.
INDICATORS
Adaptive Cruise Control Lamp
The following warning lamps and
indicators alert you to a vehicle condition The speed control system
that may become serious. Some lamps indicator light changes color to
E144524
illuminate when you start your vehicle to indicate what mode the system
make sure they work. If any lamps remain is in: See Using Cruise Control (page 146).
on after starting your vehicle, refer to the On (white light): Illuminates when the
respective system warning lamp for further adaptive cruise control system is turned
information. on. Turns off when the speed control
Note: Some warning indicators appear in system is turned off.
the information display and operate the Engaged (green light): Illuminates when
same as a warning lamp but do not the adaptive cruise control system is
illuminate when you start your vehicle. engaged. Turns off when the speed control
system is disengaged.
61

Instrument Cluster
Anti-Lock Braking System Warning If it illuminates when you are driving, check
Lamp that the parking brake is not engaged. If
the parking brake is not engaged, this
If it illuminates when you are indicates low brake fluid level or a brake
driving, this indicates a system malfunction. Have your vehicle
malfunction. You will continue checked by an authorized dealer
to have the normal braking system immediately.
(without anti-lock braking system) unless
the brake system warning lamp is also WARNING
illuminated. Have your vehicle checked by Driving your vehicle with the warning
an authorized dealer. lamp on is dangerous. A significant
decrease in braking performance
Automatic High Beam Lamp may occur. It will take you longer to stop
your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked by
It will illuminate when this an authorized dealer immediately. Driving
feature is on. See Autolamps extended distances with the parking brake
(page 48). engaged can cause brake failure and the
risk of personal injury.
Auto Start-Stop Lamp
It will illuminate to inform you Cruise Control Indicator
when the engine shuts down or It will illuminate when you switch
in conjunction with a message. this feature on. See Using
E71340 Cruise Control (page 146).
Battery Warning Lamp
If it illuminates when driving, this Direction Indicator
indicates a malfunction. Switch Illuminates when the left or right
off all unnecessary electrical direction indicator or the hazard
equipment. Have your vehicle checked by warning flasher is turned on. If
an authorized dealer immediately. the indicators stay on or flash faster, check
for a burnt out bulb. See Changing a Bulb
Blind Spot Monitor Indicator (page 240).
It will illuminate when you switch
this feature off or in conjunction Door Ajar Indicator
E124823
with a message. See It will illuminate when the
Information Messages (page 76). ignition is on and any door is not
completely closed.
Brake System Warning Lamp
It will illuminate when you Engine Coolant Temperature
engage the parking brake with Warning Lamp
the ignition on. It will illuminate when the engine
or motor coolant temperature is
high. Stop your vehicle as soon
as possible and contact your authorized
dealer.
62

Instrument Cluster
Engine Oil Warning Lamp Front Fog Lamps Indicator

WARNING It will illuminate when you switch
the front fog lamps on.
If it illuminates when you are driving
do not continue your journey, even if
the oil level is correct. Have your Frost Warning Lamp
vehicle checked.
WARNING
If it illuminates with the engine Even if the temperature rises to
running or when you are driving, above 4°C there is no guarantee that
this indicates a malfunction. the road is free of hazards caused by
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to inclement weather.
do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level.
It will illuminate when the
outside air temperature is 4°C or
Electronic Locking Differential below.
Illuminates when using the
electronic locking differential. Glow Plug Indicator
E163170
With the key in the on position,
Fasten Seatbelt Warning Lamp illuminates when the glow plug
heat is necessary as a starting
It will illuminate and a chime will aid. Wait until the light goes off before
sound to remind you to fasten starting.
your seatbelt. See Seatbelt
Reminder (page 23). After you start the engine, the light should
turn off. When the engine is cold, the light
should always illuminate for a short period.
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators
Illuminates when four-wheel High Beam Indicator
drive low is engaged.
E181780 It will illuminate when you switch
the high beam headlamps on. It
Illuminates when four-wheel will flash when you use the
drive high is engaged. headlamp flasher.
E181779
Front Airbag Warning Lamp Hill Descent Control
If the warning lamp does not Illuminates when hill descent

illuminate during start up, control is switched on.
E163171
remains on or flashes, the
system may be disabled. Hood Ajar Warning Lamp
Have your vehicle checked by an
It will illuminate when the
authorized dealer.
ignition is on and the hood is not
E159324
completely closed.
63

Instrument Cluster
Lane Keeping Aid Indicator Powertrain Fault

It will illuminate when you It will illuminate when a
activate the lane keeping powertrain or a four-wheel drive
E144813
system. fault has been detected. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp
Rear Fog Lamps Indicator
If it illuminates when you are
driving, refuel as soon as It will illuminate when you switch
possible. E67040 the rear fog lamps on.
Low Tire Pressure Warning

Fasten Rear Seatbelt Warning
Will illuminate when your tire Lamp
pressure is low. If the lamp
remains on with the engine It will illuminate and a chime will
running or when driving, check your tire sound to signal the rear
pressure as soon as possible.
E206718
seatbelts are not buckled.
It will also illuminate momentarily when Service Engine Soon

you switch the ignition on to confirm the
lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate The service engine soon
when you switch the ignition on, or begins indicator light illuminates when
to flash at any time, have the system the ignition is first turned on prior
checked by an authorized dealer. to engine start to check the bulb.If the
service engine soon indicator light stays
Low Washer Fluid illuminated after the engine is started, it
indicates that the On Board Diagnostics
It illuminates when the system (OBD) has detected a malfunction
windshield washer fluid is low. of the vehicle emissions control system.
E132353
Refer to the Fuel and Refueling chapter for
more information about having your
Over Speed Warning vehicle serviced.
It will illuminate if the vehicle WARNING
exceeds 120km/h.
E165368
Under engine misfire conditions,
excessive exhaust temperatures
Parking Lamps Indicator could damage the catalytic
converter, the fuel system, interior floor
It will illuminate when you switch coverings or other vehicle components,
the parking lamps on. possibly causing a fire. Have an authorized
dealer service your vehicle immediately.
64

Instrument Cluster
If the light is blinking, an engine misfire is Water-In-Fuel Warning Lamp

occurring which could damage your
catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate It will illuminate when there is
fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and excess water in the fuel filter.
deceleration) and have your vehicle Drain off the water immediately.
serviced immediately. See Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap
(page 237).
Shift Indicator
It will illuminate to inform you AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
that shifting to a higher gear as
indicated may give better fuel INDICATORS
economy and lower CO2
emissions. It will not illuminate during Note: Depending on your vehicle options
periods of high acceleration, braking or and instrument cluster type, not all of the
when the clutch pedal is pressed. audible warnings and indicators will display
or be available.
Speed Limiter Key in Ignition
It will illuminate when you switch Sounds when the driver door is open and
on the speed limiter system. the key is in the ignition.
E172886
Headlamps On
Stability Control Warning Lamp
Sounds when you remove the key from the
It will flash when the system is ignition and open the driver's door and you
active. If it remains illuminated have left the headlamps or parking lamps
E138639 or does not illuminate when you on.
switch the ignition on, this indicates a
malfunction. During a malfunction the Parking Brake On
system will switch off. Have your vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer Sounds when the parking brake is on and
immediately. See Using Stability your vehicle is moving.
Control (page 136). If the warning chime remains on after you
have released the parking brake, have the
Stability Control Off Indicator system checked by an authorized dealer
immediately.
It will illuminate when you switch
the system off. It will go out Door Ajar
when you switch the system
back on or when you switch the ignition Sounds when the driver door is ajar, or
off. See Using Stability Control (page when any door is ajar while the vehicle is
136). travelling over 5 km/h.
Seatbelt Reminder
Sounds when a seatbelt is unfastened in
an occupied seat and your vehicle is
moving.
65

Instrument Cluster
Lane Departure Warning

Sounds when the system detects
unintentional drifting toward the outside
of the lane and alerts or aids you to stay in
the lane through the steering system and
instrument cluster display.
Front and Rear Park Aid

Sounds to alert driver of objects
approaching the front and rear of the
vehicle while moving forward or reversing.
66

Information Displays
GENERAL INFORMATION Information Display

Type 1
WARNING
Make sure you are aware of all applicable E201432

electronic devices while driving. Menu
You can control various systems on your You can access the menu using the
vehicle using the information display information display control.
controls on the steering wheel. Note: It may describe options not fitted to
The information display shows the the vehicle you have purchased.
corresponding information.
Trip 1 and 2
Digital Speedometer
Distance to Empty
Trip Odometer
Trip Timer
Fuel Used
Average Fuel
Outside Temperature
All Values
Note: Press and hold OK on the current

screen to reset the respective trip, distance,
time and fuel information.
67

Fuel economy
Distance to E
Instant Fuel Economy
Average Fuel Economy
Average Fuel
Fuel History
Average Speed
All Values
Auto StartStop
Note: You can reset your average fuel

economy by pressing and holding the OK
button on the left hand side of the steering
wheel controls.
Driver Assist
Traction Control
Hill Start
Front Park Aid
Rear Park Aid
Tire Monitor Tire Press.
Trailer Sway
Settings
Alarm All Sensors
Perim. Sens.
Ask on exit
Vehicle
A. Engine Off
Chimes Park Slot
Information
68

Settings
Lighting Auto Beam
A/lamp Dlay Off
XX Seconds
DRL
Locks Autolock
Autounlock
Relock
Mislock
Unlocking All Doors
Driver Door
Switches Inh.
Power Autofold
Mirror
Reverse Tilt
Oil Life Hold OK to
Reset
Reset Oil Life
Seatbelts
Silent Mode
Windows Remote Open
Rmt Close
Wipers Crtesy wipe
Rain Sensing
Rev. Wiper
Distance Miles & Gal.
Unit
L/100km
Display km/L
Temper- Fahrenh. (°F)
ature
Celsius (°C)
69

Settings
Tire Pres- psi
sure
kPa
bar
Language Choose your applicable setting
Admin "Num" MyKeys
Keys
"Odo" MyKey km
"Num" Admin Keys
MyKey Dist
MyKey Odo Units
Create -
Traction Always On
Ctrl
Selectable
Max Speed selectable based on Region
Speed
Off
Speed Speed selectable based on Region
Minder
Off
Volume Set
Limit
Clear All Clear
70

Information Display Menu

Type 2 You can access the menu using the
information display control.
Note: It may describe options not fitted to
the vehicle you have purchased.
E201433
Display Setup
Distance Unit Miles & Gallons
L/100km
Km/L
Temperature °Fahrenheit
°Celsius
Gauge Display Fuel Gauge
Fuel + Tach
Tire Pressure
Trip 1 and 2
All Values — shows all trip values (Trip Timer, Odometer and Average Fuel).
Note: You can reset your trip information by pressing and holding the OK button on the left
hand steering wheel controls.
71

Fuel Economy
Fuel Economy
Fuel History
Average Speed
Auto StartStop
• Instant Fuel Economy - shows a visual graph of your instantaneous fuel economy.
• Fuel History - shows a bar chart of your fuel history.
• Average Speed - shows your vehicles average speed since the function was last reset.
• Auto-Start-Stop - available Auto-Start-Stop messaging will provide details about
what is happening with your system. See Information Messages (page 76).
Note: You can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the OK button on
the left hand steering wheel controls.
Driver Assist
Blindspot
Cruise Control Adaptive
Normal
Driver Alert Driver Alert
Display
Hill Start
Lane Keeping Sys Mode Alert Only
Aid Only
Both
Intensity High
Normal
Low
Front Park Aid
Rear Park Aid
Chimes
72

Driver Assist
Traffic Signs Display
Always shown
Speed Warning Limits up to 65km/h or
Limits above 65km/h
Chimes
Tire Monitor Tire Press.
Trailer Sway
Settings
Alarm All Sensors Active
Perimeter Sensing
Ask on Exit
Auto Engine Off
Vehicle
Chimes Park Slot Found
Information
Easy Entry/Exit
Lighting Auto Highbeam
Autolamp Delay Off
XX Seconds
Daytime Lights
Locks Autolock
Autounlock
Relock
Mislock
Remote Unlock All Doors
Driver's Door
Switch Inhibit
73

Settings
Mirrors Autofold
Oil Life Hold OK to Reset
Reset
Park Lock Control
Seatbelts
Windows Remote Open
Remote Close
Wipers Courtesy Wipe
Rain Sensing
Reverse Wiper
Distance Miles & Gallons
L/100km
Km/L
Display
Setup Temper- °Fahrenheit
ature
°Celsius
Tire Pres- Choose your applicable setting
sure
Admin "Num" MyKeys
Keys
"Odo" MyKey km
"Num" Admin Keys
MyKey Dist
Odo Units
MyKey
Create -
MyKey
Traction Always On
Control
Selectable
Max Speed selectable based on Region
Speed
Off
74

Settings
Speed Speed selectable based on Region
Minder
Off
Volume Set
Limiter
Clear Hold OK to
MyKeys
Clear MyKeys
Average Speed
CLOCK Indicates the average speed since the
function was last reset.
For detailed instructions on how to adjust
the clock See Audio Unit Clock and Date Outside Air Temperature
Displays (page 284).
Shows the outside air temperature.
TRIP COMPUTER Odometer
Distance to Empty Records the total distance traveled by your
vehicle.
Indicates the approximate distance your
vehicle will travel on the fuel remaining in Resetting the trip computer
the tank. Changes in driving pattern may
cause the value to vary. To reset a particular display:
1. Highlight Trip Computer with the up
Instantaneous fuel consumption and down arrow buttons and press the
right arrow button.
Indicates the current average fuel
consumption. 2. Highlight the function to be reset.
3. Hold the OK button pressed.
Average Fuel Consumption
Indicates the average fuel consumption PERSONALIZED SETTINGS
since the function was last reset.
Languages
Trip Odometer
A selection of languages are available
Records the distance traveled on individual using the menus in the setting menu.
journeys.
Measure units
Digital Speedometer
To toggle between either metric or imperial
The speed your vehicle is traveling at will units, scroll to this display and press the
display as a digital number. OK button.
75

Toggling the units of measure using this • Prevention of turning off some driver
display will affect the following displays: assist systems:
• Distance to empty. • Traction control
• Average fuel consumption. • Park aid
• Instantaneous fuel consumption. • Collision Warning System -
• Average speed. additionally uses maximum
sensitivity as default
Temperature units • Emergency assist
To toggle between metric and imperial • Do not disturb
units, scroll to this display and press the • Mileage logged by MyKeys.
OK button.
Toggling the temperature units using this INFORMATION MESSAGES
display will affect the following displays:
• Outside air temperature. Note: Depending on the vehicle options
• The temperature display in the equipped with your vehicle, not all of the
automatic climate control. messages will display or be available.
Certain messages may be abbreviated or
Chime deactivation shortened depending upon which cluster
type you have.
The following chimes can be switched off:
• Warning messages.
• Information messages.
MyKey
MyKey is a feature which allows customers
to assign keys which will enable extra
safety features designed for use by young
drivers. Features can be adjusted and
customized to suit the level of driver.
Features include:
• Muted audio when seatbelts are E201420
unbuckled.
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
• Vehicle speed limited. remove some messages from the
• Speed minder. information display. Other messages will
be removed automatically after a short
• Volume limiter on audio system.
time.
• Fuel warnings given at higher distance
to empty values. Certain messages need to be confirmed
before you can access the menus.
76

Active Park
Message Action
Active Park Fault Displayed when the system needs service. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Adaptive Cruise Control
Message Action
Adaptive Cruise Displayed when a radar malfunction is preventing the ACC

Malfunction from engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
147).
Adaptive Cruise Not Displayed when conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise
Available cannot function properly. See Using Adaptive Cruise
Control (page 147).
Adaptive Cruise Not Displayed when the radar is blocked because of poor radar
Available Sensor visibility due to bad weather or ice/mud/water in front of
Blocked See Manual radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See
Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 147).
Normal Cruise Active Displayed when the automatic braking has been disabled.
Automatic Braking
Turned Off
Front Sensor Not Aligned Displayed when a radar malfunction is preventing the ACC
from engaging.
Adaptive Cruise - Driver Displayed when the adaptive cruise has reinstated controls
Resume Control to the driver.
Adaptive Cruise Speed Displays when the vehicle speed is too slow to activate the
Too Low to Activate adaptive cruise.
Adaptive Cruise Shift Displays when the adaptive cruise is automatically adjusting
Down the gap distance and the driver needs to shift the transmission
into a lower gear.
77

Airbag
Message Action
Occupant Sensor Displays when the system detects a malfunction due to a

BLOCKED Remove blocked sensor.
Objects Near Passenger
Seat
Alarm
Message Action
Vehicle Alarm To Stop Displays when the alarm has been triggered due to unauthor-
Alarm, Start Vehicle. ized entry.
Auto-Start-Stop
Message Action
Auto StartStop Manual Displayed when Auto-Start-Stop system is not functioning

Restart Required and requires the user to manually restart.
Auto StartStop Press a Displayed when a pedal needs to be pressed to restart the
Pedal to Start Engine engine. See Auto-Start-Stop (page 115).
Auto StartStop Select Displayed when neutral needs to be selected to restart engine.
Neutral To Start Engine See Auto-Start-Stop (page 115).
Vehicle is ON Displayed when the vehicle is in Auto-Start-Stop mode and
the door is opened. Switch the ignition off before leaving the
vehicle if the system has shut down the engine. See Auto-
Start-Stop (page 115).
78

AWD (If Equipped)
Message Action
AWD Temporarily Displayed when the AWD system has been temporarily
Disabled disabled to protect itself from overheating.
AWD OFF Displayed when the AWD system has been automatically
disabled to protect itself. This is caused by operating the
vehicle with the compact spare tire installed or if the system
is overheating.
AWD Restored The AWD system will resume normal function and clear this
message after driving a short distance with the road tire re-
installed or after the system is allowed to cool.
AWD Malfunction Displayed in conjunction with the Throttle Control/Transmis-
Service Required sion/AWD light when the AWD system is not operating prop-
erly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
4x4
Message Action
4x4 Temporarily Displayed when the 4x4 system has been temporarily disabled
Disabled to protect itself from overheating.
4x4 OFF Displayed when the 4x4 system has been automatically
disabled to protect itself. This is caused by operating the
vehicle with the compact spare tire installed or if the system
is overheating.
4x4 Restored The 4x4 system will resume normal function and clear this
message after driving a short distance with the road tire re-
installed or after the system is allowed to cool.
4WD Malfunction Displayed in conjunction with the Throttle Control/Transmis-
Service Required sion/4x4 light when the 4x4 system is not operating properly.
If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your
79

Battery and Charging System
Message Action
Check Charging System Displayed when the charging system needs servicing. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your
Low Battery Features Displayed when the battery management system detects an
Temporarily Turned Off extended low-voltage condition. Various vehicle features will
be disabled to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of
the electrical loads as soon as possible to improve system
voltage. If the system voltage has recovered, the disabled
features will operate again as normal
Turn Power Off To Save Displayed when the battery management system determines
Battery that the battery is at a low state of charge. Turn the ignition
off as soon as possible to protect the battery. This message
will clear once the vehicle has been started and the battery
state of charge has recovered. Turning off unnecessary elec-
trical loads will allow faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Doors and Locks
Message Action
Door Ajar Displays when the door(s) listed is not completely closed and
the vehicle is moving.
Displays when the door(s) listed is not completely closed.
Trunk Ajar Displays when the luggage compartment is not completely
closed.
Hood Ajar Displays when the hood is not completely closed.
Switches Inhibited Displays when the door switches have been disabled.
Security Mode
Child Lock Malfunction Displayed when there is a system malfunction with the child
Service Required locks. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Factory Keypad Code {X Displays the factory keypad code after the keypad has been
X X X X} reset.
80

Driver Alert
Message Action
Driver Alert Warning Rest Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.
Now
Driver Alert Warning Rest Take a rest break soon.
Suggested
Fuel
Message Action
Fuel Level Low Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition.

Check Fuel Fill Inlet Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.
Hill Start Assist
Message Action
Hill Start Assist Not Displays when hill start assist is not available. Contact your
Available authorized dealer. See Hill Start Assist (page 132).
Hill Descent Control
Message Action
For Hill Descent Reduce Displayed when vehicle speed is too high for HDC to engage.
Speed 20MPH or Less Reduce speed to below that indicated in the message to
engage HDC.
Hill Descent Control Off Displayed when HDC cannot be engaged due to excessive
System Cooling heat. Allow system to cool before re-engaging.
Hill Descent Control Displayed when there is a fault with the HDC system. See your
Fault authorized dealer.
For Hill Descent Select Displayed when HDC cannot be engaged due to vehicle not
Gear being in gear. Select gear to engage HDC.
81

Keys and Starting
Message Action
To START Press Brake Displayed as a reminder to press the brake while starting the
vehicle.
Starting System Fault This message is displayed when there is a problem with your
vehicle’s starting system. See your authorized dealer for
service.
To START Press Brake Displayed as a reminder to press the brake and clutch while
and Clutch starting the vehicle.
To START Press Clutch Displayed as a reminder to press the clutch in while starting
the vehicle.
Key Program Successful Displayed during spare key programming, when an intelligent
access key is programmed to the system.
Key Program Failure Displayed during spare key programming, when an intelligent
access key has failed to be programmed.
Max Number of Keys Displayed during spare key programming when the maximum
Learned number of keys have been programmed.
Not Enough Keys Displayed during spare key programming when not enough
Learned keys have been programmed.
Key Battery Low Replace Displays when the key battery is low. Change the battery as
Soon soon as possible.
Could Not Program Displayed when an attempt is made to program a spare key
Integrated Key using two existing keys.
Engine ON Displays to inform the driver that they are exiting the vehicle
and the engine is on.
82

Lane Keeping System
Message Action
Lane Keeping Sys. The system has malfunctioned. Contact your authorized
Malfunction Service dealer as soon as possible.
Required
Front Camera Tempor- The system has detected a condition that has caused the
arily Not Available system to be temporarily unavailable.
Front Camera Low Visib- The system has detected a condition that requires the wind-
ility Clean Screen shield to be cleaned to operate properly.
Front Camera Malfunc- The system has malfunctioned. Contact your authorized
tion Service Required dealer as soon as possible.
Keep Hands on Steering Displayed when the system requests the driver to keep their
Wheel hands on the steering wheel.
Maintenance
Message Action
Low Engine Oil Pressure Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the engine.
Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues to
come on with your engine running, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Change Engine Oil Soon Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 10% or less.
See Engine Oil Check (page 235).
Oil Change Required Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0%. See Engine Oil
Check (page 235).
Brake Fluid Level Low Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system
should be inspected immediately. See Brake and Clutch
Fluid Check (page 237).
Check Brake System Displays when the brake system needs servicing. Stop the
vehicle in a safe place. Contact your authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Over Displays when the engine temperature is too high. Stop the
Temperature vehicle in a safe place and allow the engine to cool. If the
problem persists, contact your authorized dealer. See Engine
Coolant Check (page 235).
Power Reduced to Displays when the engine has reduced power in order to help
Lower Engine Temp reduce high coolant temperatures.
83

Message Action
Transport Mode Contact Displays to indicate that the vehicle is still in Transport mode.
Dealer This may not allow some features to operate properly. See
your authorized dealer.
Factory Mode Contact Displays to indicate that the vehicle is still in Factory mode.
Dealer This may not allow some features to operate properly. See
See Manual Informs the driver that the powertrain needs service due to a
powertrain malfunction.
Parking Aid
Message Action
Check Front Park Aid Displays when the system has detected a condition that
requires service. Contact your authorized dealer. See Front
Parking Aid (page 142).
Check Rear Park Aid Displays when the system has detected a condition that
requires service. Contact your authorized dealer. See Rear
Parking Aid (page 141).
Front Park Aid On Off Displays the parking aid status.
Rear Park Aid On Off Displays the parking aid status.
Parking Brake
Message Action
Park Brake Engaged Displays when the parking brake is set, the engine is running
and the vehicle is driven more than 5 km/h. If the warning
stays on after the parking brake is released, contact your
authorized dealer.
Park Brake Malfunction The parking brake system has detected a condition that
Service Now requires service. See your authorized dealer.
Park Brake Not Applied Displays when the parking brake is not set.
Apply Park Brake
Park Brake Use Switch Displays when the parking brake is set but has not be released.
to Release
84

Message Action
To Release: Press Brake Displays when the parking brake is set but has not be released
and Switch and the vehicle is moving.
Park Brake Limited The parking brake system has detected a condition that
Function Service requires service. See your authorized dealer.
Required
Park Brake System Displays when the parking brake was not released causing it
Overheated to overheat.
Release Park Brake Displays when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is
started.
Park Brake Applied Displays when the parking brake is set.
Park Brake Released Displays when the parking brake is released.
Power Steering
Message Action
Steering Lock Fault The power steering system has detected a condition that
Service Now requires service. See your authorized dealer.
Steering Loss Stop The power steering system is not working. Stop the vehicle a
Safely safe place. Contact your authorized dealer.
Steering Assist Fault The power steering system has detected a condition within
Service Required the power steering system or passive entry or passive start
system requires service. Contact your authorized dealer.
Powertrain
Message Action
Check Locking Differen- Displayed when there is a malfunction with the electronic
tial locking differential that requires service. See your authorized
dealer.
Fuel Pressure Low Displayed when there is a loss in fuel system pressure. See
Stop Safely Now Displayed when there is a powertrain fault and vehicle has
entered limp home mode. See your authorized dealer.
85

Starting System
Message Action
To START Press Brake Displays when starting the vehicle as a reminder to apply the
brake.
Engine Start Pending Displays when the starter is attempting to start the vehicle.
Please Wait
Pending Start Cancelled Displays when the pending start has been cancelled.
Cranking Time Exceeded Displays when the starter has exceeded its cranking time in
attempting to start the vehicle.
Terrain Management System (If Equipped)
Message Action
Terrain Management Displayed when there is a fault with the Terrain Management
System Fault system. See your authorized dealer.
Mode Change Not Displayed when the Terrain Management system was unable
Accepted, Retry to complete a mode change. Retry to enter terrain modes.
To Enter Rock Mode 4x4 Displayed when Terrain Management system is unable to
LOW is Required enter crawl mode as the vehicle is not in AWD Low. Engage
AWD Low to enter crawl mode.
To Exit 4x4 LOW Exit Displayed when AWD Low cannot be disengaged as the
Rock Mode Terrain Management is in crawl mode. Exit crawl mode to
disengage AWD Low.
86

Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Message Action
Tire Pressure Low Displays when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire
pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 254).
Tire Pressure Monitor Displays when the tire pressure monitoring system is
Fault malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to come
on, contact your authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 254).
Tire Pressure Sensor Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or
Fault your spare tire is in use. For more information on how the
system operates under these conditions, See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 254). If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Traction Control
Message Action
Traction Control Off Displays when the traction control system has been switched
off. See Traction Control (page 135).
Traction Control On Displays when the traction control system has been switched
on. See Traction Control (page 135).
Spinout Detected Displays when a Spin out has occurred and the hazards are
Hazards Activated activated.
87

Transmission
Message Action
Transmission Malfunc- See your authorized dealer.

tion Service Now
Transmission Service See your authorized dealer.
Required
Transmission Limited Displays when the transmission has overheated and has
Function See Manual limited functionality. See Automatic Transmission (page
122).
Transmission Not in Park Displays as a reminder to shift into park.
Press Brake Pedal Displays as a reminder to press the brake pedal in order to
select a gear.
Trailer
Message Action
Trailer Brake Module Displayed when there is a fault with the Trailer module. See
Fault your authorized dealer.
Stop Safely Now Displayed when there is a powertrain fault and vehicle has
entered limp home mode. See your authorized dealer.
Trailer Lighting Module Displayed when there is a fault with the Trailer module. See
Fault See Manual your authorized dealer.
Trailer Stop Lamps Fault Displayed when there is a fault with the stop lamps on the
Check Lamps trailer. Check Lamps.
Trailer Park Lamps Fault Displayed when there is a fault with the park lamps on the
Check Lamps trailer. Check Lamps.
Trailer Left Turn Lamps Displayed when there is a fault with the left lamps on the
Fault Check Lamps trailer. Check Lamps.
Trailer Right Turn Lamps Displayed when there is a fault with the right lamps on the
Fault Check Lamps trailer. Check Lamps.
88

Climate Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Cooling the Interior

Direct the air toward your face.
Outside Air
Air Conditioning
Keep the air intakes in front of the
windshield free from obstruction (such as The system directs air through the
snow or leaves) to allow the climate evaporator for cooling. The evaporator
control system to function effectively. extracts humidity from the air to help keep
the windows free of mist. The system
Recirculated Air directs the resulting condensation to the
outside of your vehicle, which may cause
WARNING a small pool to form under your vehicle.
Prolonged use of recirculated air may This is normal.
cause the windows to mist up. If the Note: The air conditioning operates only
windows mist up, follow the settings when the temperature is above 4°C.
for demisting the windshield.
Note: When you use air conditioning, your
vehicle uses more fuel.
The air currently in the passenger
compartment recirculates. Outside air does
not enter your vehicle. AIR VENTS
Heating
Heating performance depends on the
temperature of the engine coolant.
General Information on Controlling

the Interior Climate
Fully close all the windows.
Warming the Interior

Direct the air toward your feet. In cold or
humid weather conditions, direct some of E201078
the air toward the windshield and the door
windows.
89

Climate Control
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
C D E F
B H
A I
E205820
A Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates.
This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors
from entering your vehicle.
B A/C: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning
cools your vehicle.
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even though the air conditioning is
switched off.
C Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.
D Power: Press the button to switch the system on and off.
E Air distribution control: Press the buttons to turn airflow from the windshield,
instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off.
Note: At least one of these buttons illuminates when the system is on.
90

Climate Control
F Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the air circulated in the

vehicle.
G MAX defrost: Adjust the control to turn on defrost. Outside air flows through
the windshield vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use this setting to
defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear window
also automatically turns on when you select maximum defrost.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when
defrost is on.
H MAX A/C: Adjust the control for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows
through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on and
the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
I Heated rear window: Press the button to switch the heated rear window on
and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 98).
91

Climate Control
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

Type 1
C D E F E G H
I
B
J
A
K
L M L
E205818
A MAX A/C: Press the button for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through
the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
B A/C: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning
cools your vehicle. To improve the time to reach a comfortable temperature in
hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air through the air
vents.
switched off.
C Passenger temperature control: Adjust the temperature on the passenger
side.
92

Climate Control
D Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument
panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency.
E Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.
F Air distribution control: Press the button to turn airflow from the windshield,
instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off.
Note: At least one of these buttons illuminates when the system is on.
G AUTO: Press the button to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the
desired temperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and
outside or recirculated air are automatically adjusted to heat or cool the vehicle
to maintain the desired temperature. You can also turn off dual zone mode by
pressing and holding the button for greater than two seconds.
H Driver temperature control: Adjust the temperature setting using the control
on the driver side. This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature
when you switch off dual zone mode.
I Heated rear window: Press the button to switch the heated rear window on
J MAX Defrost: Press the button to switch on defrost. Outside air flows through
the windshield vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, and fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed. You can also use this setting to
defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated rear window
also automatically turns on when you select maximum defrost.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when
defrost is on.
K Power: Press the button to switch the system on and off.
L Heated Seats: Press the button to switch the heated seats on and off.
M Heated Windshield: Press the button to switch the heated windshield on and
off .
93

Climate Control
Type 2
A B C
L D
K E
F J I H G F
E200620
A Passenger temperature control: Adjust the temperature on the passenger

side.
B Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.
C Driver temperature control: Adjust the temperature setting using the control
on the driver side. This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature
when you switch off dual zone mode.
D MAX A/C: Press the button for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through
the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
E Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and
Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument
panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during hot weather to improve
cooling efficiency.
94

Climate Control
F Heated seats: Press the button to switch the heated seats on and off. See
Heated Seats (page 105).
G A/C: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. To improve the
time to reach a comfortable temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows
open until you feel cold air through the air vents.
switched off.
H Power: Press the button to switch the system on and off.
I AUTO: Press the button to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the
desired temperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and
outside or recirculated air are automatically adjusted to heat or cool the vehicle
to maintain the desired temperature. You can also turn off dual zone mode by
pressing and holding the button for greater than two seconds.
J Heated rear window: Press the button to switch the heated rear window on
K Windshield defrost. Press the button to redirect the air flow through windshield
air vents.
L MAX Defrost: Press the button to switch on defrost. Air conditioning
automatically turns on, and fan speed and air inlet positions are automatically
adjusted to best settings required for maximum defrost. You can also use this
setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice. The heated
rear window also automatically turns on when you select maximum defrost.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside

your vehicle, do not drive with the system
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE switched off or with recirculated air always
INTERIOR CLIMATE switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
General Hints seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
WARNING
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
Prolonged use of recirculated air may
the air intake area at the base of the
cause the windows to fog up. If the
windshield.
windows fog up, follow the settings
for demisting the windshield. Note: To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
Note: You may feel a small amount of air drive with the windows open until you feel
from the footwell air vents regardless of the cold air through the air vents.
air distribution setting.
95

Climate Control
Manual Climate Control Note: If you select AUTO during cold

outside temperatures, the system directs
Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield airflow to the windshield and side window
during humid weather, adjust the air vents. In addition, the fan may run at a
distribution control to the windshield air slower speed until the engine warms up.
vents position.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot outside
Automatic Climate Control temperatures, or when the inside of the
vehicle is hot, the system automatically uses
Note: Adjusting the settings when your recirculated air to maximize interior cooling.
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is When the interior reaches the selected
not necessary. The system automatically temperature, the system automatically
adjusts to heat or cool the interior to your switches to using outside air.
selected temperature as quickly as possible.
For the system to function efficiently, the
instrument panel and side air vents should
be fully open.
Heating the Interior Quickly
Vehicle with manual climate control Vehicle with automatic climate control
1 Adjust the fan speed to a high speed Press the AUTO button.
setting.
2 Adjust the temperature control to the Adjust the temperature control to the
full heat setting. desired setting.
3 Select the footwell air vents using the
air distribution buttons.
Recommended Settings for Heating
1 Adjust the fan speed to the center Press the AUTO button.
setting.
midway point of the hot settings. desired setting. Use 22°C as a starting
point, then adjust the setting as neces-
sary.
3 Select the footwell air vents using the
96

Climate Control
Cooling the Interior Quickly
1 Adjust the temperature control to the Press the MAX A/C button.
MAX A/C position.
2 Drive with the windows fully open until
you feel cold air through the air vents.
Recommended Settings for Cooling
1 Adjust the fan speed to the center Press the AUTO button.
setting.
midway point of the cold settings. desired setting. Use 22°C as a starting
sary.
3 Select the instrument panel air vents
using the air distribution buttons.
Side Window Defogging in Cold Weather
1 Select the windshield air vents using the Press the defrost button.
2 Press the A/C button if the indicator is Adjust the temperature control to the
off. desired setting. Use 22°C as a starting
sary.
3 Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
4 Adjust the fan speed to a high speed
setting.
97

Climate Control
HEATED WINDOWS AND CABIN AIR FILTER

MIRRORS
Your vehicle cabin air filter gives you and
Note: Make sure the engine is running your passengers the following benefits:
before operating the heated windows. • It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle concentration.
Heated Windshield • It improves the interior compartment
Press the button to clear the cleanliness.
window of thin ice and fog. • It protects the climate control
components from particle deposits.
• It reduces unpleasant odor and
Heated Rear Window
pollutants (vehicles fitted with odor
Press the button to clear the filter).
E72507
window of thin ice and fog. Press The cabin air filter is behind the glove box.
the button to switch the system
off. The heated rear window will Replace the filter at regular intervals.
automatically turn off after a short period Make sure you have a cabin air filter
of time. installed at all times.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other This prevents foreign objects from entering
sharp objects to clean the inside of the rear the system.
window or to remove decals from the inside
of the rear window. This may cause damage Running the system without a filter in place
to the heated grid lines and will not be could degrade or damage the system.
covered by your warranty.
Heated Exterior Mirror

Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or attempt to readjust the
mirror glass if it is frozen in place. These
actions could cause damage to the glass
and mirrors.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
Both mirrors are heated to remove ice, mist
and fog when the heated rear window is
switched on.
98

Seats
SITTING IN THE CORRECT We recommend that you follow these

guidelines:
POSITION
• Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
WARNINGS
Sitting improperly, out of position or • Do not recline the seatback more than
with the seatback reclined too far 30 degrees.
can take weight off the seat cushion • Adjust the head restraint so that the
and affect the decision of the passenger top of it is level with the top of your
sensing system, resulting in serious injury head and as far forward as possible.
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit Make sure that you remain
upright against your seatback, with your comfortable.
feet on the floor. • Keep sufficient distance between
Do not recline the seatback as this yourself and the steering wheel. We
can cause the occupant to slide recommend a minimum of 25 cm
under the seatbelt, resulting in between your breastbone and the
serious injury in the event of a crash. airbag cover.
Do not place objects higher than the • Hold the steering wheel with your arms
seatback to reduce the risk of serious slightly bent.
injury in the event of a crash or during • Bend your legs slightly so that you can
heavy braking. press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the
seatbelt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Fully adjust the head restraint before
you sit in or operate your vehicle. This
will help minimize the risk of neck
E68595
injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust
When you use them properly, the seat, the head restraint when your vehicle is
head restraint, seatbelt and airbags will moving.
provide optimum protection in the event Raise the rear head restraints when
of a crash. passengers occupy the rear seats.
When front seats are in use the head
restraints must not be removed.
99

Seats
Front head restraints To raise, pull the head restraint up to the

fullest extent. Press the locking button 1 to
lower the head restraint. Press the locking
button 2 to remove the head restraint.
MANUAL SEATS
WARNINGS
with side airbags. Have these fitted
by an authorized dealer.
2
Do not adjust the driver seat when
1 your vehicle is moving.
E140447
Note: Seat covers fitted to your vehicle as
part of a special equipment pack are
To raise, pull the head restraint up to the washable without removing them from the
desired position. To lower, press locking seats.
button 1 and lower the head restraint to Note: Seat covers are designed and fitted
the desired position. Make sure that the to work with the seat's existing features and
head restraint engages properly when in safety systems, and should not require
position. adjustment. If seat cover removal and
The head restraint should be located so installation is required, see an authorized
that the top of the head restraint is level Ford dealer.
with the top of your head fo optimum
support in the event of an impact.
To remove the head restraint
Press locking button 1 and at the same
time release the retaining clip 2 using a
suitable implement.
Rear head restraints (double cab)
E212698
100

Seats
Moving the Seat Backward and Adjusting the Lumbar Support

Forward
E131590
WARNINGS E131595
Make sure the driver seat fully locks

into place by rocking it backward and Adjusting the Height of the
forward. Driver's Seat
Do not move the front seats too
close to the instrument panel.
E131593
101

Seats
Recline Adjustment Bench seat
E131592 E135862
Folding the Seatback - Stretch cab

POWER SEATS
Folding the front passenger seat allows
easy access to the rear seat. WARNINGS
with side airbags. Have these fitted
by an authorized dealer.
Do not adjust the driver seat when
your vehicle is moving.
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seatback before returning
it to the original position.

washable without removing them from the
seats.
Note: Seat covers are designed and fitted
to work with the seat's existing features and
safety systems, and should not require
E136219 adjustment. If seat cover removal and
installation is required, see an authorized
Ford dealer.
102

Seats
Moving the Seat Backward and Adjusting the Height of the

Forward Driver's Seat
E131591 E131594
WARNING Recline Adjustment

Do not move the front seats too
close to the instrument panel.
E131596
103

Seats
Tilting the Seat Folding the Seat Cushion

Super cab
E131743
E131607
Double cab
REAR SEATS 3
Note: Stow the rear seatbelt tongue into
the pockets provided in the sides of the rear
seat back to prevent rattling when not in
use. 2
washable without removing them from the
seats.
Note: Seat covers are designed and fitted
1
to work with the seat's existing features and E133361
safety systems, and should not require

adjustment. If seat cover removal and Unfolding the Seat Cushion
installation is required, see an authorized
Note: The cushion tether strap must be
Ford dealer.
stowed in the pocket provided.
104

Seats
Folding the Seatback Unfolding the Seatback

Double cab Double cab
WARNINGS WARNINGS
When folding the seatbacks down, When folding the seatbacks up,
take care not to get your fingers make sure that the seatbelts are
caught between the seatback and visible to an occupant and not
seat frame. caught behind the seat.
Do not use the rear surface of the Make sure that the seats and the
rear seat back as a load floor. seatbacks are secure and fully
engaged in their catches.
Do not de-latch and fold the
seatback when the seat cushion is
folded up. HEATED SEATS
WARNING
People who are unable to feel pain
to their skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal
1 cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
2 used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the heated seat to overheat.
Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles
or other pointed objects. This may damage
the heating element which may cause the
heated seat to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
E131744
Do not do the following:

1. Pull the release strap upward.
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
2. Push the seatback forward.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow
the seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so could drain
your vehicle battery.
For item location: See Climate Control
(page 89).
105

Seats
The heated seat will only operate with the

ignition switched on.
The maximum temperature is reached
after five or six minutes. It is regulated
thermostatically.
The heated seat will remain on until either
the heated seat switch or the ignition is
switched off.
E131536
Adjust the control to the desired heat

setting.
106

Auxiliary Power Points
12 Volt DC Power Point Locations

WARNING Power points may be in the following
locations:
Incorrect use of the 12 Volt DC Power
Point can cause damage not covered • On the instrument panel above the cup
by your warranty, and can result in holders.
fire or serious injury. • On the rear of the center console.
• In the rear cargo area.
Note: If used when the vehicle is not
running, the battery will run out of charge. AC Power Point
There may be insufficient power to restart
your vehicle. WARNING
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you Do not keep electrical devices
can use the socket to power 12 volt plugged in the power point whenever
appliances with a maximum current rating the device is not in use. Do not use
of 15 amps. any extension cord with the 230 volt or 110
volt AC power point, since it will defeat the
After you switch the ignition off, the power safety protection design. Doing so may
supply works only for a maximum of 75 cause the power point to overload.
minutes. Powering multiple devices can reach
Note: Do not insert objects other than an beyond the 150 watt load limit and could
accessory plug into the power point. This result in fire or serious injury.
damages the outlet and blows the fuse.
Note: Do not hang any type of accessory or Note: Keep the vehicle running to use the
accessory bracket from the plug. power point.
Note: Do not use the power point over the Note: Depending on your vehicle, the power
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 150 watt or a point may open to the right or upward.
fuse may blow. Note: Depending on your vehicle, the power
Note: Incorrect use of the power point can point may provide 230 volt AC power, or 110
cause damage not covered by your volt AC power.
warranty. With the engine off, the power point works
Note: Always keep the power point caps up to maximum 75 minutes (or less). The
closed when not in use. power point turns off automatically if the
battery voltage becomes low. This
Run the engine for full capacity use of the prevents the vehicle battery from running
power point. out of charge.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when your engine is not
running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when your vehicle is in park
(P) for extended periods.
107

Auxiliary Power Points
• Measuring devices, which process

precise data, such as medical
equipment or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an
extremely stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
E206133
You can use the power point for powering

electrical devices that require up to 150
watts. It is on the rear of the center
console.
The power point indicator light, located on
the power point, shows when the power
point is ready for use.
When the power point indicator light is:
• On — the power point is ready to supply
power.
• Off — the power point power supply is
off and so is the ignition.
• Flashing — the power point is in fault
mode, or the battery voltage is to low.
The power outlet temporarily turns off
power when in fault mode if the device
exceeds the 150 watt limit. Unplug your
device and switch the ignition off. Switch
the ignition back on, but do not plug your
device back in. Let the system cool off and
switch the ignition off to reset the fault
mode. Switch the ignition back on and
make sure the indicator light remains on.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven
refrigerators.
108

Storage Compartments
CUP HOLDERS Rear Seat Cup Holder (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not place hot drinks in the cup
holders when your vehicle is moving.
2
Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill. 1
Centre Console Cup Holder - Type 1
E131745
1 Push the seat base.

2 Pull the tab.
GLOVE BOX
E132722
Centre Console Cup Holder - Type 2
E136461
Note: When opening the glove box,

allowing the glove box dampener to lower
it gently until it comes to rest.
The glove box is located on the passenger
E132723
side of the instrument panel. The glove box
is opened using the latch handle.
109

Glove box with key Center Console Armrest
E206091
The glove box can be locked using the

ignition key. To lock, close the glove box,
then insert the ignition key into the glove
box lock and rotate it clockwise. Remove
the key.
E205766
To unlock the glove box, insert the ignition
key into the glove box lock and rotate it A Coin tray.
counter clockwise. The glove box will then
open as normal using the latch handle.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
CENTER CONSOLE
Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:
• Front Cup Holders. See Cup Holders
(page 109).
• Auxiliary Power Points. See Auxiliary
Power Points (page 107).
• Media Hub See Center Console (page E75193
110).
Press near the rear edge of the door to
open it.
110

COOL BOX REAR SEAT ARMREST
2
A
1
E132725
A Open.
E131745
B Close.
1. Push the armrest into the seatback and
hold.
GLASSES HOLDER (If Equipped)
2. Pull the strap and open the armrest.
UNDER SEAT STORAGE

Stretch Cab
E150040
The glasses must be placed in the glasses 2

holder with the lenses facing downward 1
as shown in the picture. If not, the glasses
can fall down when the glasses holder is
open.
E188672
111

Starting and Stopping the Engine
GENERAL INFORMATION Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this

position for too long to avoid your vehicle
General points on starting battery losing charge.
II (on) - All electrical circuits operational.
If the battery has been disconnected the Warning lamps and indicators are
vehicle may exhibit some unusual driving illuminated.
characteristics for approx. 8 kilometers (5
miles) after reconnecting the battery. III (start) - cranks the engine. Release the
key as soon as the engine starts.
This is because the engine management
system must realign itself with the engine.
Any unusual driving characteristics during STEERING WHEEL LOCK
this period may be disregarded.
WARNING
Starting the engine by towing or
pushing Always check that the steering wheel
lock is deactivated before
WARNING attempting to move your vehicle.
Failure to deactivate the steering wheel
To prevent damage you must not
lock could result in a crash.
push or tow start your vehicle. Use
booster cables and a booster battery.
See Jump Starting the Vehicle (page To lock the steering wheel:
179). 1. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
IGNITION SWITCH 2. Rotate the steering wheel slightly to
engage the lock.
Unlocking the Steering Wheel

Vehicles With Automatic Transmission
Switch the ignition on or press the brake
pedal.
Vehicles With Manual Transmission

E72128
Switch the ignition on.
Note: Make sure the key is clean before
inserting it into any lock cylinder. STARTING A DIESEL ENGINE
0(off) - The ignition is off.
Cold or Hot Engine
Note: When you switch the ignition off and
leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in All Vehicles
the ignition. This could cause your vehicle
battery to lose charge. Note: When the temperature is below
-15°C, you may need to crank the engine for
I (accessory) - Allows the electrical up to 10 seconds.
accessories such as the radio to operate
while the engine is not running.
112

Note: You can only operate the starter for DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER
a limited period of time.
Note: After a limited number of attempts The filter forms part of the emissions
to start your engine, the system will not reduction system on your vehicle. It filters
allow you to try again until a period of time harmful diesel particulates (soot) from the
has elapsed, for example 30 minutes. exhaust gas.
Switch the ignition on and wait Regeneration
until the glow plug indicator goes
off. WARNING
Do not park or idle your vehicle over
Vehicles With Manual Transmission dry leaves, dry grass or other
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. combustible materials. The
regeneration process creates very high
Note: Releasing the clutch pedal while the exhaust gas temperatures and the exhaust
engine is starting will stop the engine will radiate a considerable amount of heat
cranking and return to ignition on. during and after regeneration and after you
1. Fully depress the clutch pedal. have switched the engine off. This is a
potential fire hazard.
2. Start the engine.
Vehicles With Automatic Transmission Note: Avoid running out of fuel.

Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. Note: During regeneration at low speed or
engine idle, you may smell a hot metallic
Note: Releasing the brake pedal while the odor and could notice a clicking metallic
engine is starting will stop the engine sound. This is due to the high temperatures
cranking and return to ignition on. reached during regeneration and is normal.
1. Move the transmission selector lever Note: Changes in the engine or exhaust
to position park (P) or neutral (N). sound may be heard during the regeneration
2. Fully depress the brake pedal. process.
3. Start the engine. Note: After you have switched your engine
off the fans may continue to run for a short
Failure to Start period of time.
Vehicles With Manual Transmission The diesel particulate filter on your vehicle
requires periodic regeneration to maintain
If the engine does not crank when the its correct function. Your vehicle will carry
clutch pedal has been fully depressed and out this process automatically.
the ignition key is turned to position III.
If your journeys meet one of the following
1. Fully depress the clutch and brake conditions:
pedals.
• You drive only short distances.
2. Turn the key to position III until the • You frequently switch the ignition on
engine has started. and off.
• Your journeys contain a high level of
acceleration and deceleration.
113

You must carry out occasional trips with

the following conditions to assist the
regeneration process:
• Drive your vehicle in more favorable
conditions, which you will find at higher
vehicle speeds in normal driving, on a
main road or freeway for a minimum
of 20 minutes. This drive may include
short stops that will not affect the
regeneration process.
• Avoid prolonged idling and always
observe speed limits and road
conditions.
• Do not switch the ignition off.
• Select a suitable gear to ideally
maintain engine speed between 1500
and 3000 RPM.
SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE

Vehicles With a Turbocharger
WARNING
Do not switch the engine off when it
is running at high speed. If you do, the
turbocharger will continue running
after the engine oil pressure has dropped
to zero. This will lead to premature
turbocharger bearing wear.
Release the accelerator pedal. Wait until

the engine has reached idle speed and then
switch it off.
114

Unique Driving Characteristics
AUTO-START-STOP 2. Shift into neutral.

3. Release the clutch and accelerator
The system reduces fuel consumption and pedal.
CO2 emissions by shutting down the
engine when your vehicle is idling, for To Re-Start the Engine
example at traffic lights.
Press the clutch pedal.
WARNINGS Note: To obtain maximum benefit from the
The engine may restart system, move the transmission lever to
automatically if required by the neutral and release the clutch pedal during
system. any stop of longer than three seconds.
Switch the ignition off before Note: Start-stop also comes with stall
opening the hood or carrying out any recovery. If you fully depress the clutch
maintenance. pedal after stalling the engine, the engine
Always switch the ignition off before automatically restarts.
leaving your vehicle, as the system
may have shut down the engine but Limitations of Use
the ignition will still be live. The system may not shut down the engine
under certain conditions, for example:
Note: For vehicles with auto-start-stop, the • Low engine operating temperature.
battery requirement is different. Replace it
• To maintain the interior climate.
with one of exactly the same specification
as the original. • The battery charge level is low.
• The outside temperature is too low or
too high.
• The drivers door has been opened.
The auto-start-stop indicator will • When the driver seatbelt is unfastened.
illuminate green when the engine shuts
down. See Warning Lamps and • The heated windshield is on.
Indicators (page 61). It will flash amber • During regeneration of the diesel
with a message when the driver needs to particulate filter.
shift to neutral or press a pedal. See • If 4WD is selected.
Information Messages (page 76).
The system may automatically restart the
engine under certain conditions, for
E146361 example:
The auto-start-stop indicator will remain • To maintain the interior climate, for
gray if the system is not available. See example air conditioning.
Information Displays (page 67). • The battery charge level is low.
Using Auto-Start-Stop Manual • Your vehicle starts to roll downhill in
Transmission neutral.
• The heated windshield is turned on.
To Stop the Engine
• If 4WD is selected.
1. Stop your vehicle.
115

Unique Driving Characteristics
Switching the System On and Off

When you switch the ignition on, the
system automatically turns on.
To switch the system off, press switch
located on the centre console. The word
OFF will illuminate. Press the switch again
to turn the system back on. The system
only switches off for the current ignition
cycle.
Note: If the system detects a malfunction,
it is deactivated. Have the system checked
by a properly trained technician.
Note: The system may not function if you
leave electrical equipment connected with
the ignition off.
116

Fuel and Refueling
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS • Automotive fuels can be harmful or

fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as
gasoline is highly toxic and if
WARNINGS
swallowed can cause death or
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
pressure in an overfilled tank may call a physician immediately, even if no
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray symptoms are immediately apparent.
and fire. The toxic effects of fuel may not be
The fuel system may be under visible for hours.
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound • Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel much fuel vapor of any kind can lead
until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may to eye and respiratory tract irritation.
spray out, which could cause serious In severe cases, excessive or prolonged
personal injury. breathing of fuel vapor can cause
Automotive fuels can cause serious serious illness and permanent injury.
injury or death if misused or • Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If
mishandled. fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove
Flow of fuel through a fuel pump contact lenses (if worn), flush with
nozzle can produce static electricity. water for 15 minutes and seek medical
This can cause a fire if you are filling attention. Failure to seek proper
an ungrounded fuel container. medical attention could lead to
permanent injury.
Gasoline may contain benzene,
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed
which is a cancer-causing agent.
through the skin. If fuel is splashed on
When refueling always shut the the skin, clothing or both, promptly
engine off and never allow sparks or remove contaminated clothing and
open flames near the fuel tank filler wash skin thoroughly with soap and
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone water. Repeated or prolonged skin
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid skin irritation.
inhaling excess fumes. • Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram
Observe the following guidelines when for the treatment of alcoholism.
handling automotive fuel: Breathing gasoline vapors could cause
an adverse reaction, serious personal
• Extinguish all smoking materials and
injury or sickness. If fuel is splashed on
any open flames before refueling your
the skin, wash the affected areas
vehicle.
immediately with plenty of soap and
• Always turn off the vehicle before water. Consult a physician immediately
refueling. if you experience any adverse reactions.
117

Fuel and Refueling
FUEL QUALITY Long-Term Storage

Most diesel fuels contain biodiesel. Do not
WARNINGS leave vehicles filled with B10 fuels parked
Do not mix diesel with oil, gasoline for more than 1 month. Diesel fuels
or other liquids. This could cause a containing biodiesel can degrade quickly
chemical reaction. when stored for long periods of time,
Do not add kerosene, paraffin or especially when exposed to warm and
gasoline to diesel. This could cause humid conditions. Alternatively, we
damage to the fuel system. recommend that you seek advice from your
dealer.
Note: We recommend that you use only Diesel-Winter Driving
high quality fuel.
Diesel fuel purchased in the city and
Note: We do not recommend the use of coastal regions often has different cold
additional additives or other engine temperature properties than diesel sold in
treatments for normal vehicle use. Alpine regions. Wax may form in the fuel
Note: We do not recommend the use of lines in the vehicles left outside in below
additional additives to prevent fuel waxing. zero temperature for a longer time. This
means that the vehicle will not start or run
Biodiesel Usage correctly until the wax has melted. To
avoid this problem, if a prolonged or
WARNING overnight stay is planned in an alpine
Do not use raw oils, fats or waste region then it is strongly recommended
cooking greases, these are not that the vehicle carry enough fuel to get to
biodiesel. the Alpine region and is then refuelled
locally so that at least 50% of the fuel
volume is Alpine mix diesel. At the time of
Your vehicle is suitable for use with publication, Alpine mix diesel is available
biodiesel blends up to 10% (B10).You can at the following BP service stations:
achieve acceptable engine performance Victoria Bright, Corryong and Mansfield
and durability using B10 by adhering to NSW Jindabyne, Thredbo, Tumut,
below guidelines. Talbingo, Adaminaby and Cooma. Please
Note: Use diesel fuel that meets the confirm current availability at the time of
equivalent specification defined by EN 590 your trip.
or the relevant national specification, from
a trusted fuel supplier
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Note: If your vehicle experiences low
temperature fuel waxing issues, consider Avoid running out of fuel. This may have
using different diesel brands or diesel with an adverse effect on powertrain
lower biodiesel content. components.
If you have run out of fuel:
118

Fuel and Refueling
• You may need to cycle the ignition from • Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
off to on several times after refuelling with the fuel container while filling.
to allow the fuel system to pump the • Do not use a device that holds the fuel
fuel from the tank to the engine. On pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
restarting, cranking time will take a few
seconds longer than normal. Crank
time will be longer than usual. CATALYTIC CONVERTER
• Normally, adding 4 L of fuel is enough
to restart the engine. If the vehicle is WARNING
out of fuel and on a steep grade, more Do not park or idle your vehicle over
than 4 L may be required. dry leaves, dry grass or other
combustible materials. The exhaust
Fuel Run Dry Protection Feature will radiate a considerable amount of heat
Your vehicle is fitted with a fuel run dry during use, and after you have switched
protection system to prevent engine the engine off. This is a potential fire
damage. hazard.
The vehicle will enter an engine misfire
mode and shutdown at a pre determined Driving with a Catalytic Converter
distance after the Distance to Empty
WARNINGS
becomes zero.
Avoid running out of fuel.
Refill the fuel tank with a minimum of 4 L
diesel before resetting the feature.
Do not crank the engine for long
Reset the fuel run dry protection feature
periods.
by following the below steps:
1. Insert the ignition key and turn to Do not run the engine when a spark
position II (Ignition). plug lead is disconnected.
2. Hold the key in the position for 20 Do not push-start or tow-start your
seconds and turn back to 0 (Off). vehicle. Use booster cables. See
3. Repeat the steps three times to Jump Starting the Vehicle (page
complete the reset procedure. 179).
Do not switch the ignition off when
Filling a Portable Fuel Container driving.
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up when filling
an ungrounded fuel container:
REFUELING
• Only use an approved fuel container to WARNINGS
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
Do not attempt to start the engine if
container on the ground when filling.
you have filled the fuel tank with the
• Do not fill a fuel container while it is incorrect fuel. This could damage the
inside your vehicle (including the cargo engine. Have your vehicle checked by an
area). authorized dealer immediately.
119

Fuel and Refueling
WARNINGS
Do not use any kind of flames or heat
near the fuel system. The fuel system
is under pressure. There is a risk of
injury if the fuel system is leaking.
If you use a high pressure spray to
wash your vehicle, only spray the fuel
filler flap briefly from a distance not
less than 200 mm.
We recommend that you wait at
least 10 seconds before removing the E131286
fuel nozzle to allow any residual fuel
to drain into the fuel tank. 2. Open the flap fully until it engages.
Stop refueling after the fuel nozzle 3. Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise.
stops the second time. Additional
fuel will fill the expansion space in A
the fuel tank which could lead to fuel
overflowing. Fuel spillage could be
hazardous to other road users.
Do not remove the fuel nozzle from
its fully inserted position during the
refueling process.
Note: Central locking also locks and

unlocks the fuel filler flap. See Locking and
Unlocking (page 35). E139203
B
Vehicles with Fuel Filler Cap 4. Hold the fuel nozzle in position B during
refueling. Holding the fuel nozzle in
position A can affect the flow of fuel
and shut off the fuel nozzle before the
fuel tank is full.
E136220
E119081
1. Press the flap to open it. 5. Slightly raise the fuel nozzle to remove
it.
120

Fuel and Refueling
6. Install the fuel cap by rotating it

clockwise until it clicks.
7. Close and push the fuel filler flap to
lock it.
Note: If you must replace the fuel filler cap,
replace only with the cap designed for your
vehicle. The customer warranty may be void
for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel
system if the correct genuine Ford fuel filler
cap is not used.
121

Transmission
MANUAL TRANSMISSION Selector lever positions
Selecting Reverse Gear

Do not engage reverse gear when your
vehicle is moving. This can cause damage 1
to the transmission.
2
P
R
N
D S+
-
E132720
P Park.
R Reverse.
N Neutral.
E184729
D Drive.
Raise the collar when you select reverse
gear. S Sport mode and manual shifting.
S+ Manual shift up.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION S- Manual shift down.
WARNING
WARNING
Apply the brakes before moving the
Always set the parking brake fully selector lever and keep them applied
and make sure you move the until you are ready to move off.
transmission selector lever to park
(P). Switch the ignition off and remove the
key whenever you leave your vehicle. Note: A cold engine has a higher idle speed.
This will increase the tendency for your
vehicle to creep when you have selected a
drive gear.
Press the button on the transmission
selector lever to select reverse (R) and
park (P).
122

Transmission
The transmission selector lever position Neutral (N)

will be shown in the instrument cluster
display. In this position, power is not transmitted
to the drive wheels but the transmission is
Park (P) not locked. You can start the engine with
the transmission selector lever in this
WARNINGS position.
Move the transmission selector lever
to park (P) only when your vehicle is Drive (D)
stationary. Note: A shift will occur only when your
Apply the parking brake and move vehicle speed and the engine speed are
the transmission selector lever to appropriate.
park (P) before leaving your vehicle. Select drive (D) to shift automatically
Make sure that the transmission selector through the forward gears.
lever is latched in position.
The transmission will select the
appropriate gear for optimum performance
In this position, power is not transmitted based on ambient temperature, road
to the drive wheels and the transmission gradient, vehicle load and your input.
is locked. You can start the engine with the
transmission selector lever in this position. Sport Mode and Manual Shifting
Note: To move the selector lever from park
Sport mode
(P), apply the footbrake with ignition key in
position II. Note: In sport (S) mode the transmission
Note: An audible warning will sound if you operates as normal but gears are selected
open the driver's door and you have not more quickly and at higher engine speeds.
moved the transmission selector lever to Note: In sport mode S will be shown in the
park (P). instrument cluster display.
Note: The battery saver will deactivate the Note: When towing heavy loads or in hilly
audible warning after a period of time. terrain, it is recommended that sport (S)
mode is selected. This will result in cooler
Reverse (R) transmission temperatures and additional
engine braking.
WARNINGS
Move the transmission selector lever Switch on sport (S) mode by moving the
to reverse (R) only when your vehicle transmission selector lever from drive (D)
is stationary and the engine is at idle towards the driver. Sport (S) mode will
speed. remain on until either you shift manually
up or down the gears using + and -.
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting the transmission Manual shifting
selector lever out of reverse (R).
WARNINGS
Move the transmission selector lever to Do not hold the transmission selector
reverse (R) to allow your vehicle to move lever permanently in - or +.
backward.
123

Transmission
WARNINGS Hints on driving with an automatic

The transmission will automatically transmission
downshift when the engine speed is
WARNING
too low.
Do not idle the engine for long
periods of time in drive (D) with the
brakes applied.
Moving off
WARNING
P It is not possible to tow-start or
push-start a vehicle fitted with an
R automatic transmission. See Jump
Starting the Vehicle (page 179).
N
- 1. Release the parking brake.
D S
+ 2. Release the brake pedal and press the
accelerator pedal.
Stopping
1. Release the accelerator pedal and
E136209
press the brake pedal.
Manual shifting can be done only when the 2. Apply the parking brake.
selector lever is in sport (S). Move the 3. Move the transmission selector lever
transmission selector lever forward to to neutral (N) or park (P).
downshift and backward to upshift.
Kickdown
When the vehicle is stationary, only the 1st
and 2nd gears can be selected. Press the accelerator pedal fully with the
Manual shifting is sequential, therefore transmission selector lever in the drive (D)
gears cannot be skipped. to select the lower gear for optimum
performance. Release the accelerator
The transmission will remain in the pedal when you no longer require
selected gear. When the engine speed is kickdown.
too low or idle, it will downshift to 2nd gear.
The selected gear is indicated in the If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
instrument cluster. See General Snow
Information (page 67).
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the
engine may overheat.
124

Transmission
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, 3. Push down the locking button in the
it may be rocked out by shifting between slot and simultaneously move the
forward and reverse gears, stopping selector lever out of park (P).
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press Note: Take care when opening the cover.
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Note: See an authorized dealer as soon as
Emergency Park Position Release possible if this procedure is used.
Lever
WARNINGS
Do not drive your vehicle until you
verify that the brake lamps are
working.
If the parking brake is fully released,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be
working correctly. See an authorized
dealer.
Use the button to move the transmission

selector lever from the park (P) in the
event of an electrical malfunction or if your
vehicle battery has no charge.
E132721
1. Apply the parking brake and switch the

ignition off before performing this
procedure.
2. Lift up the cover in the center console
next to the transmission selector lever
with a suitable tool.
125

Four-Wheel Drive
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Four-Wheel Drive, High Range

(4H)
The four-wheel drive system in your vehicle
is a part-time system activated using the WARNING
rotary switch mounted in the centre Do not use four-wheel drive 4H for
console. In normal rear-wheel drive normal road driving.
operation (2H) drive torque is directed to
the rear axle. When the switch is moved to
4H or 4L, drive torque is directed to both Use for off-road driving.
the front and rear axles, providing We recommend that you frequently
four-wheel drive operation. inspect your vehicle's chassis components
Depending on your vehicle, further if your vehicle is subject to off-road use.
four-wheel drive options may be available Note: The four-wheel drive indicator lamp
on the switch panel located on the centre will come on when the transfer shift switch
console. is in the 4H position. See Warning Lamps
and Indicators (page 61).
USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE Four-Wheel Drive, Low Range (4L)
Note: A clicking sound from the drive line WARNING
may be heard while shifting between ranges,
which is normal. Do not use four-wheel drive 4L for
normal road driving.
Use for more extreme off-road conditions,

such as steep ascents and descents.
Also use when low speed manoeuvring is
necessary, such as negotiating a
boulder-strewn river bed.
We recommend that you frequently
inspect your vehicle's chassis components
if your vehicle is subject to off-road use.
Note: The four-wheel drive low range 4L
and four-wheel drive indicator lamps will
come on when the transfer shift switch is in
the 4L position. See Warning Lamps and
E132692 Indicators (page 61).
Two-Wheel Drive, High Range (2H) Shifting Between 2H and 4H

Use for all normal road driving and also for Note: Shift to 2H will reactivate all the
off-road driving across dry, level terrain. stability control (ESP) functions.
Shift between 2H and 4H can be done with
the vehicle moving up to 110 km/h, but only
with the accelerator pedal released. During
the shift the indicator lamp will flash.
126

Four-Wheel Drive
Shifting Between 2H and 4L Driving in Special Conditions With

Four-Wheel Drive
Note: Shift to 4L will deactivate Engine
Traction Control and Trailer Stability Control Four-wheel drive vehicles are suitable for
but Hill Descent Control, Hill Start Assist driving on sand, snow, mud and rough
and Brake Traction Control remain active. roads and have operating characteristics
Note: Shift to 2H will reactivate all the that are somewhat different from
stability control (ESP) functions. conventional vehicles, both on and off the
freeway.
1. Stop the vehicle when it is safe to do
so. When driving at slow speeds off road under
high load conditions, use a low gear when
2. Fully depress the clutch pedal (manual possible. Low gear operation will maximize
transmission). the engine and transmission cooling
3. Move the transmission selector lever capability.
to neutral (N) (automatic
transmission). Basic Operating Principles
4. Turn the transfer shift switch from 2H When driving your vehicle on surfaces
to 4L or 4L to 2H. made slippery by loose sand, water, gravel,
snow or ice proceed with care.
During the shift the indicator lamp will
flash. If it continues to flash, check meeting If Your Vehicle leaves the Road
the above conditions.
If your vehicle leaves the road, reduce your
Shifting Between 4H and 4L vehicle speed and avoid severe braking.
When your vehicle speed has been reduced
Note: Shift to 4L will deactivate Engine ease your vehicle back onto the road. Do
Traction Control and Trailer Stability Control not turn the steering wheel sharply while
but Hill Descent Control, Hill Start Assist returning your vehicle to the road.
and Brake Traction Control remain active.
It may be safer to stay on the shoulder of
1. Stop the vehicle when it is safe to do the road and slow down gradually before
so. returning to the road. You may lose control
2. Fully depress the clutch pedal (manual if you do not slow down or if you turn the
transmission). steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
3. Move the transmission selector lever It may be less risky to strike small objects,
to neutral (N) (automatic such as freeway reflectors, with minor
transmission). damage to your vehicle rather than
4. Turn the transfer shift switch from 4H attempt a sudden return to the road which
to 4L or 4L to 4H. could cause your vehicle to slide sideways
out of control or roll over. Remember, your
During the shift the indicator lamp will safety and the safety of others should be
flash. If it continues to flash, check meeting your primary concern.
the above conditions.
127

Four-Wheel Drive
Emergency Maneuvers Avoid driving at excessive speeds, this

causes vehicle momentum to work against
In an unavoidable emergency situation you and your vehicle could become stuck
where a sudden sharp turn must be made, to the point that assistance may be
remember to avoid over-driving your required from another vehicle. Remember,
vehicle (i.e. turn the steering wheel only as you may be able to back out the way you
rapidly and as far as required to avoid the came if you proceed with caution.
emergency). Excessive steering can result
in loss of vehicle control. Apply smooth Mud and Water
pressure to the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal when changes in vehicle speed are Mud
required. Avoid abrupt steering,
acceleration and braking. This could result Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
in an increased risk of vehicle roll over, loss speed or direction when you are driving in
of vehicle control and personal injury. Use mud. Even four-wheel drive vehicles can
all available road surface to bring your lose traction in slick mud. If your vehicle
vehicle to a safe direction of travel. does slide, steer in the direction of the slide
until you regain control of your vehicle.
In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
skidding the tires and do not attempt any After driving through mud, clean off residue
sharp steering wheel movements. stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating
If your vehicle goes from one type of driveshafts can cause an imbalance that
surface to another (i.e. from concrete to could damage drive components.
gravel) there will be a change in the way
your vehicle responds to a maneuver (i.e. Water
steering, acceleration or braking).
If you must drive through high water, drive
Sand slowly. Traction or brake capability may
be limited.
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
When driving through water, determine the
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
depth and avoid water higher than the
Shift to a lower gear and drive steadily
bottom of the wheel rims. If the ignition
through the terrain. Apply the accelerator
system gets wet, your vehicle may stall.
slowly and avoid excessive wheel slip.
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Do not drive your vehicle in deep sand for
Wet brakes do not stop your vehicle as
an extended period of time. This will cause
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
the system to overheat.
improved by applying light pressure to the
To resume operation, switch the ignition brake pedal while moving slowly.
off and allow the system to cool down for
Note: Driving through deep water may
a minimum of 15 minutes.
damage the transmission. If the front or rear
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand axle is submerged in water, the axle
under high outside temperatures, use a low lubricant and power transfer unit lubricant
gear when possible. Low gear operation should be checked and changed if
will maximize the engine and transmission necessary.
cooling capability.
128

Four-Wheel Drive
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
Although natural obstacles may make it brake application and brake overheating.
necessary to travel diagonally up or down Do not descend in neutral. Disengage
a hill or steep incline, you should always overdrive or move the transmission
try to drive straight up or straight down. selector lever to a lower gear. When
Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or hills. descending a steep hill, avoid sudden hard
A danger lies in losing traction, slipping braking as you could lose control. The front
sideways and possible vehicle roll over. wheels have to be turning in order to steer
Whenever driving on a hill, determine your vehicle.
beforehand the route you will use. Do not Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore
drive over the crest of a hill without seeing apply the brakes steadily. Do not pump the
what conditions are on the other side. Do brake pedal.
not drive in reverse over a hill without the
aid of an observer. Driving on Snow and Ice
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start
WARNING
in a lower gear rather than downshifting to
a lower gear from a higher gear once the If you are driving in slippery
ascent has started. This reduces strain on conditions that require tire chains or
the engine and the possibility of stalling. cables, then it is critical that you drive
cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for
If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turn
longer stopping distances and avoid
around because this could cause vehicle
aggressive steering to reduce the chances
roll over. It is better to reverse back to a
of a loss of vehicle control which can lead
safe location.
to serious injury or death. If the rear end of
Apply just enough power to the wheels to your vehicle slides while cornering, steer in
climb the hill. Too much power will cause the direction of the slide until you regain
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, control of your vehicle.
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
transmission damage.
Four-wheel drive vehicles have advantages
over two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and
ice but can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and
E143949 ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and
steadily when starting from a full stop.
129

Four-Wheel Drive
Avoid sudden braking. Although a We recommend that you use caution when
four-wheel drive vehicle may accelerate your vehicle has either a high load or device
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in (i.e. ladder or luggage racks). Any
snow and ice, it will not stop any faster as modifications to your vehicle that raise the
braking occurs at all four wheels. Do not center of gravity may cause your vehicle
become overconfident as to road to roll over when there is a loss of vehicle
conditions. control.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance Failure to maintain your vehicle correctly
between you and other vehicles for may void the warranty, increase your repair
stopping. Drive slower than usual and cost, reduce vehicle performance and
consider using one of the lower gears. In operational capabilities and adversely
emergency stopping situations, apply the affect you and your passenger's safety. We
brake steadily. As your vehicle has a four recommend you frequently inspect your
wheel anti-lock brake system, do not pump vehicle's chassis components when your
the brake pedal. See Hints on Driving vehicle is subject to off road usage.
With Anti-Lock Brakes (page 132).
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or

Snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
it may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature,
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
than a minute, damage to the transmission
and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
Maintenance and Modifications

The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and
tested to provide predictable performance
whether loaded or empty. For this reason,
we strongly recommend that you do not
make modifications such as adding or
removing parts (i.e. lift kits or stabilizer
bars) or by using replacement parts not
equivalent to the original factory
equipment.
130

Rear Axle
LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL The electronic differential lock will lock

and unlock when the internal gears are
This axle provides added traction on aligned and no torque load is placed on
slippery surfaces, particularly when one the differential. To aid alignment, drive the
wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under vehicle in a straight line with the
normal conditions, the limited slip axle accelerator pedal released. Alternatively,
functions like a standard rear axle. The axle drive slowly forward and backward while
may exhibit a slight noise or vibration in moving the steering wheel from side to side
tight turns with low vehicle speed. This is to allow the electronic differential lock to
normal behavior and indicates the axle is lock.
working. The system will:
• Automatically disengage when a speed
ELECTRONIC LOCKING of 40 km/h is exceeded.
DIFFERENTIAL • Automatically re-engage when the
speed drops below 30 km/h.
WARNING • Automatically disengage when the
Do not operate the system on sealed ignition is turned off.
roads. Doing so may lead to Note: The system activates when the
excessive tire noise and wear. Use vehicle speed is less than 30 km/h and
the system only in consistently slippery or accelerator pedal released.
loose surface.
Note: The system can be used in any
transmission drive range (2H, 4H or 4L).
The system locks the left and right portions
of the rear axle together to form a solid If the system is selected when driving
driving axle, resulting in increased rear above 40 km/h, the request is stored and
wheel traction in certain conditions. will be engaged when the vehicle speed
reduces to 30 km/h. The electronic
Press the electronic differential lock button differential lock indicator lamp will flash
to activate the system. until either the vehicle speed reduces and
the differential lock is engaged or the driver
deselects the electronic differential lock
button.
Note: When the system is engaged, the
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) functions
such as Stability Control, Traction Control,
Hill Descent Control, Emergency stop signal,
Hill Start Assist and Trailer Stability Control
will be deactivated, the ESP Off indicator
E214414
illuminates, and the HDC on indicator turns
off.
Note: When the anti-lock braking system
is operating, the system will be disengaged.
131

Brakes
GENERAL INFORMATION • You take corners too fast.

• The road surface is poor.
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of PARKING BRAKE
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention. WARNING
Always set the parking brake fully
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If and make sure you shift the gearshift
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or lever to park (P). Switch the ignition
continuous squeal sound is present, the off and remove the key whenever you leave
brake linings may be worn-out. If the vehicle your vehicle.
has continuous vibration or shudder in the
steering wheel while braking, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer. Note: Do not press the release button while
pulling the lever up.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving To apply the parking brake:
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the 1. Press the foot brake pedal firmly.
brakes wear. See Cleaning the Alloy
2. Pull the parking brake lever up to its
Wheels (page 248).
fullest extent.
Wet brakes result in reduced braking Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a facing uphill, shift the gearshift lever to park
few times when driving from a car wash or (P) and turn the steering wheel away from
standing water to dry the brakes. the curb.
Anti-lock Brake System Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and
facing downhill, shift the gearshift lever to
This system helps you maintain steering park (P) and turn the steering wheel toward
control and vehicle stability during the curb.
emergency stops by keeping the brakes
from locking. To release the parking brake:
1. Press the brake pedal firmly.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH 2. Pull the lever up slightly.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES 3. Press the release button and push the
lever down.
Note: When the system is operating, the
brake pedal may pulse and may travel
further. Maintain pressure on the brake HILL START ASSIST
pedal. You may also hear a noise from the
system. This is normal. WARNINGS
The system does not replace the
The anti-lock braking system will not
parking brake. When you leave your
eliminate the risks when:
vehicle, always apply the parking
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in brake and move the transmission selector
front of you. lever into park (P).
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
132

Brakes
WARNINGS Using Hill Start Assist

You must remain in your vehicle once 1. Press the brake pedal to bring your
you have turned the system on. vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep
The system is active unless ESC the brake pedal pressed.
warning lamp is turned off. During all 2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle
times, you are responsible for is on a slope, the system will be
controlling your vehicle, supervising the activated automatically.
system and intervening, if required. 3. When you remove your foot from the
If the engine is revved excessively or brake pedal, your vehicle will remain
if a malfunction is detected, the on the slope without rolling away for
system will turn off and ESC warning approximately two or three seconds.
lamp will turn on. This hold time will automatically be
extended if you are in the process of
There is a short delay in the system
driving off.
activation of up to two seconds after
shifting the lever to drive (D) or 4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
reverse (R) in vehicles with automatic brakes will be released automatically.
transmission.
Enable and Disable the System
The system makes it easier to pull away You can enable the system only if the
when your vehicle is on a slope without the following conditions are met:
need to use the parking brake.
• The engine is running.
When the system is active, your vehicle will • All doors are fully closed.
remain stationary on the slope for two to
three seconds after you release the brake • The parking brake is fully disengaged.
pedal. This allows you time to move your • No failure mode is present.
foot from the brake to the accelerator • Accelerator pedal is not depressed.
pedal. The brakes are released
automatically once the engine has • Vehicle is completely stopped.
developed sufficient drive to prevent your • Uphill: Gear shift lever should be in
vehicle from rolling down the slope. This drive (D) for Automatic transmission
is an advantage when pulling away on a and in any position other than reverse
slope (for example from a car park ramp, (R) for manual transmission.
traffic lights or when reversing uphill into • Downhill: Gear shift lever should be in
a parking space). reverse (R).
The system will turn on automatically on To disable the system, perform one of the
any slope which can result in significant following:
vehicle rollback.
• Apply the parking brake.
Note: Hill start assist is available in vehicles
equipped with electronic stability control • Open any door.
(ESC). • Drive off uphill without re-applying the
brake.
• Wait for one to two seconds after you
remove your foot from the brake pedal.
133

Brakes
• If the system is active in a forward gear,

select reverse gear.
• If the system is active in neutral,
release the clutch pedal (Manual
transmission).
• If the system is active in reverse gear,
select neutral.

Note: You can only switch the system on
and off if your vehicle has a manual
transmission.
Note: The system will remain on or off
depending on how it was last set.
Your vehicle comes with this feature
already enabled. If required, you can switch
this feature off using the information
display. See General Information (page
67).
134

Traction Control
USING TRACTION CONTROL

Traction control forms part of the stability
control system.
Note: The system automatically turns on
every time you switch the ignition on.
Note: Shift to 4L will deactivate engine
traction control but brake traction control
will remain active.
In some situations for example if your
vehicle is stuck in snow or mud, turning the
system off may be beneficial as this allows
the wheels to spin with full engine power.
Traction control is an enhanced feature of
stability control system and automatically
detects the wheel spin when you
accelerate. If this situation occurs, the
system applies your vehicle brakes at
individual wheels and if necessary, reduces
engine power.
Note: Shifting to 4x4 Low deactivates
engine traction control but brake traction
control remains active.
To switch off the traction control, See
Using Stability Control (page 136).
Stability control will remain on even when
you have switched the traction control off.
135

Stability Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The system also provides an enhanced

traction control function by reducing
Electronic Stability Control engine torque if the wheels spin when you
accelerate. This improves your ability to
WARNING pull away on slippery roads or loose
surfaces, and improves comfort by limiting
The system does not relieve you of wheel spin in hairpin bends.
care and attention. Failure to do so Stability Control Warning Lamp
could result in loss of vehicle control,
personal injury or death. While driving, it flashes when the system
is operating. See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 61).
USING STABILITY CONTROL

B Note: The system will be switched on
automatically every time you switch the
ignition on.
B
A
A B A
E207884
The system can be deactivated using the

E72903 switch in the centre console.
Note: When the system is deactivated with
A Without ESC.
the transfer switch in 2H position, the ESC
B With ESC. off indicator will flash twice to indicate that
the system is completely turned off and
The system supports stability when your remains illuminated. Press the switch again
vehicle starts to slide away from your to enable the system. For item location: See
intended path. The system performs this At a Glance (page 9).
by braking individual wheels and reducing
engine torque as required. Note: ESC is switched off when the transfer
switch is in 4L position or the Electronic
Locking Differential is operating.
136

Stability Control
2-wheel drive vehicles

Press and hold the switch for one second
to deactivate Engine Traction Control,
Trailer Stability Control. Hill Start Assist
remains active.
Press and hold the switch for five seconds
to deactivate Engine Traction Control,
Trailer Stability Control and Brake Traction
Control. Hill Start Assist remain active.
4-wheel drive vehicles

Note: All the stability control (ESC)
functions are reactivated when 2H position
is selected.
Transfer shift switch in 4H position:
• Press and hold the switch for one
second to deactivate Engine Traction
Control, Trailer Stability Control and
ESC. Hill Descent Control, Hill Start
Assist and Brake Traction Control
remain active.
Transfer shift switch in 4H or 4L position:
• Press and hold the switch for five
seconds to deactivate Engine Traction
Brake Traction Control. Hill Descent
Control and Hill Start Assist remain
active.
Transfer shift switch in 2H position:
• Press and hold the switch for one
second to deactivate Engine Traction
ESC. Hill Descent Control, Hill Start
Assist and Brake Traction Control
remain active.
• Press and hold the switch for five
seconds to deactivate Engine Traction
Brake Traction Control. Hill Descent
Control and Hill Start Assist remain
active.
137

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Note: HDC will be active at speeds less

than 35 km/h and deactivated above
40 km/h but will not turn off until vehicle
WARNING
exceeds 60 km/h.
Before driving off-road it is
Note: HDC will turn off when you switch
absolutely essential that
the ignition off.
in-experienced drivers become fully
familiar with the vehicle's controls. In The HDC switch will illuminate
particular, Sport (S) mode and Hill Descent continuously to indicate that
Control (HDC). HDC is fully active.
HDC will temporarily deactivate during the

Hill descent control (HDC) operates in
following conditions:
conjunction with stability control (ESC) to
provide greater control when off-road, • The brake is hot. Operation resumes
particularly when descending steep slopes. once the brakes cool down.
HDC operation is fully automatic when • Stability control indicator on warning
engaged. lamp is illuminated and operating.
Engine braking controls the speed of the
descent during an off-road hill descent. If HDC Operation
engine braking alone is insufficient to
control the vehicle's speed, HDC will slow
the vehicle using the braking system.
Note: Use HDC only in first or reverse (R)
gear in manual transmission vehicles.
Note: Use HDC only in drive (D), reverse
(R) or sport (S) mode in automatic
transmission vehicles. When in drive (D),
the vehicle will select the most appropriate
gear.
USING HILL DESCENT

CONTROL
E206132
Note: HDC deactivates when the electronic
locking differential is operating. Cruise control switches on the steering
wheel allows you to control your speed of
Selecting HDC descent. SET + increases the speed and
To select HDC, press the hill SET - decreases the speed.
descent control switch on the
E163171 centre console.
Select HDC at speeds less than 60 km/h.
138

Changing the Set Speed

• Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.
• Press and release SET+ or SET-. The
set speed will change in approximately
1 km/h increments.
Pressing the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal will increase or decrease the speed
respectively.
Note: Each gear has a pre-determined
minimum speed.
Note: Descent speed will only increase on
a slope steep enough to provide additional
momentum. Therefore, use of the SET+
switch on a gentle slope may not increase
the speed.
Note: Brake overrides the HDC if the brake
pedal is pressed and the system resumes
on the release of the brake pedal.
Note: HDC assistance will fade out
gradually if you switch the system off. This
is to prevent the loss of control if you press
the HDC switch unintentionally. If assistance
is still required, you can switch back the HDC
on. The control will resume at a speed the
vehicle is travelling when the pedal is
released.
Note: You may hear a noise from the
system. This is normal.
Note: When HDC is operating, ESC on
warning lamp will flash.
HDC operates only if the vehicle speed is
within the specified range even if the
system is on permanently during off-road
driving.
139

Parking Aids

The parking aid system may not
WARNINGS prevent contact with small or moving
The system does not relieve you of objects that are close to the ground.
your responsibility to drive with due The parking aid system gives an audible
care and attention. warning when it detects a large object
helping to avoid damage to your vehicle.
If your vehicles has a non-Ford To help avoid personal injury you must take
approved trailer tow module the care when using the parking aid system.
system may not correctly detect
objects.
Note: If you use a high pressure spray to
The sensors may not detect objects wash your vehicle, only spray the sensors
in heavy rain or other conditions that briefly from a distance not less than 20 cm.
cause disruptive reflections.
Note: If your vehicle has a tow ball arm, the
The sensors may not detect objects system is turned off automatically when
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic trailer lamps (or lighting boards) are
waves. connected to the 13-pin socket through a
The system does not detect objects Ford approved trailer tow module.
that are moving away from your Note: Keep the sensors free from dirt, ice
vehicle. They will only be detected or snow. Do not clean with sharp objects.
shortly after they start to move toward
your vehicle. Note: The system may emit false alerts if
it detects a signal using the same frequency
Take particular care when reversing as the sensors or if your vehicle is fully
with a tow ball arm or a rear fitted loaded.
accessory. For example, a bicycle
carrier. The rear parking aid will only Note: The outer sensors may detect the
indicate the approximate distance from side walls of a garage. If the distance
the rear bumper to an object. between the outer sensors and the side wall
remains constant for three seconds, the
Sensing is only an aid to detect some alert will turn off. As you continue the inner
objects when moving forward or sensors will detect objects directly behind
backward at low speeds. Traffic your vehicle.
control systems, inclement weather or an
external motor and fan can affect the
sensors; this may include reduced
performance or false activation. To help
avoid personal injury you must read and
understand the limitations of the system
detailed in this section.
140

Parking Aids
REAR PARKING AID The rear parking aid sensors turn on

automatically when you move the
WARNINGS transmission selector lever to reverse (R)
and your vehicle is moving at a speed of
Sensing is only an aid to detect some less than 5 km/h. Moving your vehicle
objects when moving forward or closer to a large object will increase the
backward at low speeds. Traffic audible warning repeat rate. When the
control systems, inclement weather or an object is less than 30 cm from the center
external motor and fan can affect the of your vehicle’s rear bumper the audible
sensors; this may include reduced warning will sound continuously.
performance or false activation. To help
avoid personal injury you must read and
understand the limitations of the system
detailed in this section.
The parking aid system may not
prevent contact with small or moving
objects that are close to the ground.
The parking aid system gives an audible
warning when it detects a large object
helping to avoid damage to your vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury you must take
care when using the parking aid system.
Rear Sensing System

When the parking aid system produces an
audible warning, the audio system may
reduce the set volume to a predetermined
level.
Note: Some add-on equipment can cause
reduced performance or false activation.
For example, large trailer hitches, bike or E205544
surfboard racks.
Note: The parking aid system sensors must A. Sensor coverage area is up to 180 cm
be kept clean and free from snow or ice to from the rear bumper.
avoid reduced performance or false Note: There is a decreased coverage area
activation. Do not clean the sensors with at the outer corners.
sharp objects.
The system detects large objects when
Note: If the parking aid sensors are you move the transmission selector lever
misaligned due to vehicle bumper damage to reverse (R):
it will cause reduced performance or false • Your vehicle is moving backward at low
activation. speed.
• Your vehicle is stationary.
141

Parking Aids
Move the transmission selector lever from Note: Keep the sensors located on the
reverse (R) or press the parking aid button bumper or fascia free from snow, ice and
to switch the system off. If a fault is large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
present in the system, a warning message are covered, the system’s accuracy can be
appears in the information display and affected. Do not clean the sensors with
does not allow you to switch the system sharp objects.
on. See Information Messages (page Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to
76). the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned
or bent, the sensing zone may be altered
FRONT PARKING AID causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false beeps.
WARNINGS When the parking aid system produces an
The parking aid system can only audible warning, the audio system may
assist you to detect objects when reduce the set volume to a predetermined
your vehicle is moving at parking level.
speeds. Take care when using the system
to avoid personal injury.
To help avoid personal injury, always
use caution when in reverse and
when using the sensing system.
This system is not designed to
prevent contact with small or moving
objects. The system is designed to
provide a warning to assist you in detecting
large stationary objects to avoid damaging
your vehicle. The system may not detect
smaller objects, particularly those close to
the ground.
Traffic control systems, inclement E205545
weather, air brakes and external
motors and fans may affect correct A. Sensor coverage area is up to 70 cm
operation of the sensing system; this may from the front bumper and 15–35 cm
include reduced performance or a false to the side of the front bumper.
alerts. When your vehicle approaches an object,
a warning tone sounds. When your vehicle
Front Sensing System moves closer to an object, the warning
tone repeat rate increases. The warning
The front sensors are active when the tone sounds continuously when an object
transmission is in any position other than is 30 cm or less from the front bumper.
park (P).
The system automatically turns off when
You can also press the parking aid button your vehicle speed reaches 12 km/h.
(if equipped) or use the settings menu in
the information menus to switch the front The system detects objects when:
parking aid system on without selecting • Your vehicle is moving forward at low
reverse (R). speed.
142

Parking Aids
Press the parking aid button to switch (if REAR VIEW CAMERA (If Equipped)
equipped) to turn the system off. If a fault
is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information WARNINGS
display and does not allow you to switch The operation of the camera may
the system on. See Information vary depending on the ambient
Messages (page 76). temperature, vehicle and road
conditions.
If the transmission is in reverse (R), the
front sensing system provides audio The distances shown in the display
warnings when the detected obstacle is may differ from the actual distance.
moving towards your vehicle.
Do not place objects in front of the
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If camera.
Equipped)
The camera is located on the tailgate
The system provides obstacle distance below the badge.
indication through the information display.
The indicator displays:
• As the distance to the obstacle
decreases the indicator blocks
illuminate and move towards the
vehicle icon.
• If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks are greyed
out.
Vehicles with automatic transmission

If the gearshift is in neutral (N), the system E133364
provides obstacle distance indication

through the information display. If your Switching the Rear View Camera
vehicle moves the front sensing system On
provides an audible warning when the
vehicle is moving at 12 km/h or below and WARNING
an obstacle is located inside the detection
The camera may not detect objects
area.
that are close to your vehicle.
If the gearshift is in drive (D) or any other
forward gear, the front sensing system
provides audio warnings when the vehicle Switch the ignition and the audio unit on.
is moving below 12 km/h and an obstacle Move the transmission selector lever to
is located inside the detection area. reverse.
The image is displayed on the rear view
mirror screen.
143

Parking Aids
The camera may not operate correctly in

the following conditions: E
• Dark areas. D
• Intense light.
• If the ambient temperature increases C
or decreases rapidly.
• If the camera is wet, for example in rain
or high humidity. B
• If the camera's view is obstructed, for
example by mud.
Using the Display

WARNINGS
Obstacles above the camera position
will not be shown. Inspect the area
behind your vehicle if necessary.
Marks are for general guidance only,
and are calculated for vehicles in
maximum load conditions on an
even road surface.
The lines show the distance from the outer

edge of the front tire plus two inches (51
millimeters) and the rear bumper.
A A
E133365
A Exterior mirror clearance - 4

inches (0.1 meter).
B Red - up to 12 inches (0.3 meter).
C Amber - 39 inches (1 meter).
144

Parking Aids
D Green - 79 inches (2 meter).

E Black - center line of the
projected vehicle path.
Note: When reversing with a trailer, the lines
on the screen are not shown. The camera
will show your vehicle direction and not the
trailer.
Switching the Rear View Camera

Off
Note: Move the transmission selector lever
from reverse gear. The display will switch
off after a short period.
Note: The system will automatically switch
off once your vehicle speed has reached
approximately 15 km/h.
145

Cruise Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Switching Cruise Control On
WARNING
The system does not relieve you of
care and attention.
Cruise control allows you to control your

speed using the switches on the steering
wheel. You can use cruise control when
you exceed approximately 30 km/h.
USING CRUISE CONTROL E201284
Press the button.

WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control in heavy Setting a Speed
traffic, on winding roads or when the
• Accelerate to the desired speed.
road surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, serious • Press and release SET+.
injury or death. The warning indicator will
When you are going downhill, your display in the instrument cluster.
E71340
vehicle speed may increase above
the set speed. The system will not • Take your foot off the accelerator
apply the brakes. Change down a gear to pedal.
assist the system in maintaining the set
speed. Failure to do so could result in loss Changing the Set Speed
of vehicle control, serious injury or death.
• Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
Note: Cruise control will disengage if your speed.
vehicle speed decreases more than 16 km/h
• Press and release SET+ or SET-. The
below your set speed while driving uphill.
set speed will change in approximately
The cruise control switches are located on 1 km/h (1 mph) increments.
the steering wheel. • Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
and release SET+.
Canceling the Set Speed

Press and release CAN or tap the brake
pedal. The system will not erase the set
speed.
Resuming the Set Speed

Press and release RES .
146

Cruise Control
Switching Cruise Control Off WARNINGS

Note: You will erase the set speed if you Do not use the system when towing
switch the system off. a trailer with brake controls.
Aftermarket trailer brakes will not
Press and release OFF or switch the operate when you switch the system on
ignition off. because the brakes are electronically
controlled. Failure to do so may result in
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE loss of vehicle control, which could result
in serious injury.
CONTROL
Do not use tire sizes other than those
recommended because this can
WARNINGS
affect the normal operation of the
Always pay close attention to system. Failing to do so may result in a loss
changing road conditions when using of vehicle control, which could result in
adaptive cruise control. The system serious injury.
does not replace attentive driving. Failing
to pay attention to the road may result in
a crash, serious injury or death. Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert,
drive safely and be in control of the vehicle
Adaptive cruise control is not a crash at all times.
warning or avoidance system.
The system is designed to help you
Adaptive cruise control does not maintain a gap from the vehicle in front of
detect stationary or slow moving you. If there is no vehicle in front of you the
vehicles. system will maintain a set speed. The
system is intended to provide enhanced
Adaptive cruise control does not
operation of your vehicle when following
detect pedestrians or objects in the
other vehicles which are in the same lane
road.
and traveling in the same direction. You
Adaptive cruise control does not can select from one of four gap settings.
detect oncoming vehicles in the
The system is based on the use of a radar
same lane.
sensor which projects a beam directly
Do not use adaptive cruise control forward of your vehicle.
on winding roads, in heavy traffic or
when the road surface is slippery.
This could result in loss of vehicle control,
serious injury or death.
Do not use the system in poor
visibility, for example fog, heavy rain,
spray or snow.
147

Cruise Control
Adaptive Cruise Controls Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed

1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press and release SET- or RES+.
3. The information display shows a green
indicator light, current gap setting and
desired set speed.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
E pedal.
B
A
C
D
E206151
A On, off and cancel. E164805
B Set speed increase and resume. 5. When the system detects a vehicle in
C Set speed and speed decrease. front of you, it will be displayed above
the horizontal bars.
D Gap increase.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is
E Gap decrease. active, the set speed displayed in the
information display may vary slightly from
Switching the System On the speedometer.
Press and release the Adaptive Cruise Changing the Set Speed
Control CNCL/OFF button.
• Press and release SET- or RES+. The
set speed changes in 5 km/h or 2 km/h
E144529 increments depending on your vehicle.
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
and release SET- or RES+.
• Press and hold SET- or RES+. Release
speed.
The system may apply the brakes to slow
E164805
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed displays continuously in the
The cruise control indicator, SET kph information display when the system is
(mph), the current gap setting indicator active.
and Standby displays in the instrument
cluster.
148

Cruise Control
Canceling the Set Speed The lead vehicle graphic illuminates.

Press the brake pedal or the clutch pedal Your vehicle maintains a constant gap
for an extended period, or press and behind the vehicle ahead until:
release the Adaptive Cruise Control • The vehicle in front of you accelerates
CNCL/OFF button. The last set speed to a speed above the set speed.
displays with a strikethrough. • The vehicle in front of you moves out
of your lane or out of view.
Resuming the Set Speed
• The vehicle speed falls below 20 km/h.
Press and release RES+. The vehicle • A new gap is set.
returns to the previously set speed and gap
setting. The set speed displays The system applies the brakes to slow your
continuously in the information display vehicle to maintain a safe gap from the
while the system is active. vehicle in front. The maximum braking
which the system can apply is limited. You
Switching the System Off can override the system by applying the
brakes.
Press and release the Adaptive Cruise
Control CNCL/OFF button when the If the system predicts that its maximum
system is in stand by mode or switch the braking level is insufficient, an audible
ignition off. warning sounds while the system
continues to brake. The red warning bar
Note: You erase the set speed when you appears on the windshield. You should
switch the system off. take immediate action.
Following a Vehicle Note: The brakes may emit a sound when
modulated by the adaptive cruise control
WARNINGS system.
When following a vehicle, your
vehicle does not decelerate Setting the Gap
automatically to a stop, nor does Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
your vehicle always decelerate quickly appropriate to the driving conditions.
enough to avoid a crash without driver
intervention. Always apply the brakes when You can decrease or increase the gap
necessary. Failing to do so may result in a between your vehicle and the vehicle in
crash, serious injury or death. front of you by pressing the gap control.
Adaptive cruise control only warns
of vehicles detected by the radar
sensor. In some cases there may be
no warning or a delayed warning. You
should always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failing to do so may result in a
crash, serious injury or death.
E164805
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in
the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts
to maintain a preset gap.
149

Cruise Control
The selected gap appears in the Note: The gap setting is time dependent
information display as shown by the bars and therefore the distance will
in the graphic. You can select from one of automatically adjust with your speed.
four gap settings.
Adaptive cruise control gap settings

Set speed Graphic display, bars Time gap, seconds Gap
indicated between
km/h vehicles m
100 1 0.8 28
100 2 1.2 39
100 3 1.6 50
100 4 2.1 61
Note: The system status and settings will remain unchanged each time you switch the
ignition on.
Automatic cancellation can also occur if:

Overriding the System • The tires lose traction.
WARNING • The engine speed is too low.
Whenever the driver is overriding the • You apply the parking brake.
system by pressing the accelerator Note: If the engine speed drops too low,
pedal, the system does not the information display indicates low engine
automatically apply the brakes to maintain speed. Shift to a lower gear (manual
separation from any vehicle ahead. transmission only) to avoid automatic
cancellation.
You can override the set speed and gap by
pressing the accelerator pedal. Hilly Condition Usage
When you override the system, You should select a lower gear position
the green indicator light when the system is active in situations
E144529
illuminates and the set speed such as prolonged downhill driving on
text darkens. steep grades, for example in mountainous
areas. The system needs additional engine
The system resumes operation when you
braking in these situations to reduce the
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
load on the vehicle’s regular brake system
speed decreases to the set speed, or a
to prevent them from overheating.
lower speed if following a slower vehicle.
Note: An audible warning sounds and the
Automatic Cancellation system shuts down if it applies brakes for
an extended period of time. This allows the
The system does not operate below brakes to cool down. The system functions
20 km/h. An audible warning sounds and normally again when the brakes have cooled
the automatic braking releases if the down.
vehicle drops below this speed.
150

Cruise Control
Detection Issues Detection issues can occur:
WARNING A With vehicles that edge into your

lane that can only be detected
On rare occasions, detection issues once they have moved fully into
can occur due to the road your lane.
infrastructures, for example bridges,
tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases, B Motorcyclists may be detected
the system may brake late or late, or not at all.
unexpectedly. At all times, you are C With vehicles in front of you
responsible for controlling your vehicle, when going into and coming out
supervising the system and intervening, if of a bend. The detection beam
required. will not follow sharp curves in
the road.
The radar sensor has a limited field of
vision. It may not detect vehicles at all or In these cases the system may brake late
detect a vehicle later than expected in or unexpectedly. You should stay alert and
some situations. The lead vehicle graphic intervene if necessary.
does not illuminate if the system does not If something hits the front of your vehicle
detect a vehicle in front of you. or damage occurs, the radar-sensing zone
may change. This could cause missed or
false vehicle detections. Contact your
System Not Available

Conditions that can cause the system to
deactivate or prevent the system from
activating when requested include:
• A blocked sensor.
• High brake temperature.
• A failure in the system or a related
system.
Blocked Sensor
A message displays if something obstructs
the radar signals from the sensor. The
sensor is located on the lower grille. The
system cannot detect a vehicle ahead and
does not function when something
obstructs the radar signals.
Keep the front of your vehicle free of dirt,
metal badges or objects. Vehicle front
protectors and aftermarket lights may also
E71621
block the sensor.
151

Cruise Control
The following table lists possible causes and actions for this message displaying.
Cause Action
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or obstructed in some way. or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean Wait a short time. It may take several
but the message remains in the display. minutes for the radar to detect that it is free
from obstruction.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the Do not use the system in these conditions
radar signals. because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Swirling water, snow or ice on the surface Do not use the system in these conditions
of the road may interfere with the radar because it may not detect any vehicles
signals. ahead.
It is possible to get a blockage warning and not be blocked. A false blocked condition self
clears or clears after a key cycle.
Switching to Normal Cruise

Control
WARNING
Normal cruise control does not brake
due to slower vehicles. Always be
aware of which mode you have
selected and apply the brakes when
necessary.
You can manually change from adaptive

cruise control to normal cruise control
through the information display.
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
E71340 control indicator light if you
select normal cruise control. The gap
setting does not display, the system does
not automatically respond to lead vehicles
and automatic braking does not activate.
The system remembers the last setting
when you start your vehicle.
152

Driving Aids
SPEED LIMITER Switching the System On and Off

Press switch B. The information display
Principle of Operation will prompt you to set a speed.
WARNING Setting the Speed Limiter
When you are going downhill, your Use the cruise control switches to adjust
vehicle speed may increase above the maximum speed setting.
the set speed. The system will not
apply the brakes but a warning displays. Press switch E or D to select your desired
speed limit. The set speed is stored and
displayed in the information display.
The system allows you to set a speed to
which your vehicle becomes limited. The Press switch C to cancel the limiter and
set speed sets the effective maximum place it in standby mode. The information
speed of your vehicle. You can temporarily display will confirm the system is in
exceed the set speed if required, for standby mode by displaying the set speed
example to overtake. limit as crossed out.
Using the System Press switch A again to resume the limiter.

The information display will confirm this
Note: If you briefly press the accelerator, has been turned on by showing the set
for example when overtaking another speed again.
vehicle, the system temporarily turns off.
Intentionally Exceeding the Speed
The system is operated by the controls Limiter Set Speed
mounted on the steering wheel.
Depress the accelerator fully to temporarily
turn the system off. The speed limiter set
speed resumes when your vehicle speed
drops below the set speed limit.
System Warnings
A E
If you unintentionally exceed the set speed,
B a warning will flash in the information
display and a warning chime will sound.
If you intentionally exceed the set speed,
C D a warning will flash in the information
E200786 display.
A Resume. DRIVER ALERT

B On and off.
C Cancel.
Principle of Operation
D Set speed decrease. WARNINGS
E Set speed increase. The system does not relieve you of
care and attention.
153

Driving Aids
WARNINGS Note: The system calculates an alertness

At all times you are responsible for level at vehicle speeds above approximately
controlling your vehicle, supervising 65 km/h.
the system and intervening if The system automatically monitors your
required. driving behavior.
If the sensor becomes blocked the The system is designed to alert you if it
system may not function. detects that you are becoming drowsy or
if your driving deteriorates.
Take regular rest breaks as required
and do not wait for the system to Using Driver Alert
warn you if you feel tired.
Take rest breaks only where it is safe Switching the System On and Off
to do so. Note: The system will remain on or off
Certain driving styles and behavior depending on how it was last set.
may result in the system issuing a Switch the system on using the information
warning even if you are not feeling display. See Information Displays (page
tired. 67).
In cold and severe weather The system will calculate your alertness
conditions the system may not level based upon your driving behavior in
function. Rain, snow, spray and large relation to the lane markings and other
contrasts in lighting can all influence the factors.
sensor.
System Warnings
The system will not operate if the
sensor cannot track the road lane Note: The system will not issue warnings
markings. below approximately 65 km/h.
The system may not operate in areas The warning system has two stages:
during roadwork construction. 1. A temporary warning is issued to advise
The system may not operate on you to take a rest. This message only
roads with sharp bends or narrow appears for a short time.
lanes. 2. If you do not rest and the system
Do not carry out windshield repairs continues to detect that your driving
in the immediate area surrounding deteriorates, it will issue a further
the sensor. warning. This will remain in the
information display until you cancel it.
If your vehicle has a suspension kit See Information Messages (page
not approved by us, the system may 76).
not function correctly.
Press OK on the steering wheel control to
remove the warning.
Note: Keep the windshield free from
obstructions such as bird droppings, insects
and snow or ice.
Note: The system assists you when driving
on fast main roads and freeways.
154

Driving Aids
System Display Your alertness level will be shown in grey

if:
When active the system will run
automatically in the background and only • the camera sensor cannot track the
issue warnings if required. You can view road lane markings
the status at any time using the • your vehicle speed drops below
information display. See General approximately 40 mph (65 km/h).
Resetting the System
The alertness level is shown by six steps
as a colored bar. You can reset the system by:
• switching the ignition off and on
• stopping your vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver's door.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (If

Equipped)
E131358
Alertness level is fine, no rest required. WARNINGS

The system does not relieve you of
care and attention.
At all times you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising
the system and intervening if
required.
E131359
If the sensor becomes blocked the
Alertness level is critical, indicating that system may not function.
you should take a rest as soon as it is safe
to do so. In cold and severe weather
conditions the system may not
The status bar will travel from left to right function. Rain, snow, spray can all
as the calculated alertness level limit sensor performance.
decreases. As the rest icon is approached
the color turns from green to yellow and Large contrasts in lighting can limit
then finally red when a rest break must be sensor performance.
taken. The system will not operate if the
• Green: No rest required. sensor cannot track the road lane
markings.
• Yellow: First (temporary) warning.
• Red: Second warning. The vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer for inspection if
damage occurs in the immediate
area surrounding the sensor.
Note: The system works above 64 km/h.
155

Driving Aids
Note: The system works as long as the

camera can detect one lane marking.
Note: The system may not function if the
camera is blocked or there is damage to the
windshield.
Note: When Aid mode is on and the system
detects no steering activity for a short
period, the system will alert you to put your
hands on the steering wheel. The system
may detect a light grip or touch on the
steering wheel as hands off driving.
E165515
The system notifies you to stay in your lane
through the steering system and the Alert only – Provides a steering wheel
instrument cluster display when the front vibration when the system detects an
camera detects an unintentional drift out unintended lane departure.
of your lane is likely to occur. The system
automatically detects and tracks the road
lane markings using a camera mounted
behind the interior rear view mirror.

Note: The system on or off setting is stored
until it is manually changed, unless a MyKey
is detected. If the system detects a MyKey
it defaults to on and the mode is set to Alert.
Note: If a MyKey is detected, pressing the
button will not affect the on or off status of E165516
the system.
Aid only – Provides an assistance steering
Press the button on the steering torque input toward the lane center when
wheel stalk to switch the system the system detects an unintended lane
E144813
on or off. departure.
System Settings
The system has optional setting menus
available. To view or adjust the settings,
See General Information (page 67). The
system stores the last-known selection for
each of these settings. You do not need to
readjust your settings each time you turn
on the system.
Mode: This setting allows you to select
which of the system features you can
enable.
156

Driving Aids
System Display
E165517
E151660
A Alert
B Aid When you switch on the system, an
overhead graphic of a vehicle with lane
Alert + Aid – Provides an assistance markings will display in the information
steering torque input toward the lane display. If you select aid mode when you
center. If your vehicle continues drifting out switch on the system, a separate white
of the lane, the system provides a steering icon will also appear or in some vehicles
wheel vibration. arrows will display with the lane markings.
Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate When you switch off the system, the lane
general zone coverage. They do not provide marking graphics will not display.
exact zone parameters. While the system is on, the color of the
Intensity: This setting affects the intensity lane markings will change to indicate the
of the steering wheel vibration used for the system status.
alert and alert + aid modes. This setting Gray: Indicates that the system is
does not affect the aid mode. temporarily unable to provide a warning
• Low or intervention on the indicated side(s).
This may be because:
• Normal
• High • Your vehicle is under the activation
speed.
• The turn indicator is active.
• Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
157

Driving Aids
• The road has no or poor lane markings Yellow: Indicates that the system is
in the camera field-of-view. providing or has just provided a lane
• The camera is obscured or unable to keeping aid intervention.
detect the lane markings due to Red: Indicates that the system is providing
environmental conditions (significant or has just provided a lane keeping alert
sun angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain warning.
or fog), traffic conditions (following a
large vehicle that is blocking or The system can be temporarily suppressed
shadowing the lane), or vehicle at any time by the following:
conditions (poor headlamp • Quick braking.
illumination). • Fast acceleration.
See Troubleshooting for additional • Using the turn signal indicator.
information.
• Evasive steering maneuver.
Green: Indicates that the system is
available or ready to provide a warning or
intervention, on the indicated side(s).
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature

Sun is shining directly into the camera lens
Quick intentional lane change
Staying too close to the lane marking
Driving at high speeds in curves
The last Alert warning or Aid intervention occurred a short time ago
Ambiguous lane markings (mainly in construction zones)
Rapid transition from light to dark or vice versa
Sudden offset in lane markings
ABS or AdvanceTrac activation
Camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield
Driving too close to the vehicle in front of you
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa
Standing water on the road
Faint lane markings (partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads)
158

Driving Aids
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Lane width too narrow or too wide

Camera not calibrated after a windshield replacement
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads
Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in the
Aid or Aid + Alert mode?
High cross winds

Large road crown
Rough roads, grooves, shoulder drop-offs
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure
If the tires have been exchanged (including snow tires), or the suspension has been
modified
WARNINGS
STEERING off the engine. After at least 10 seconds,
reset the system by restarting the engine,
Electric Power Steering and watch the information display for a
steering message. If a steering message
WARNINGS returns, or returns while driving, take the
The electric power steering system vehicle to your dealer to have it checked.
has diagnostic checks that Obtain immediate service if a system
continuously monitor the system to error is detected. You may not notice
ensure proper operation. When a system any difference in the feel of your
error is detected a steering message will steering, but a serious condition may exist.
appear in the information display. Failure to do so may result in loss of
The electric power steering system steering control.
has diagnostic checks that
continuously monitor the system to Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
ensure proper operation of the electronic power-assisted steering system. There is
system. When an electronic error is no fluid reservoir to check or fill.
detected, a message will be displayed in If your vehicle loses electrical power while
the information display. If this happens, you are driving (or if the ignition is turned
stop the vehicle in a safe place, and turn off), you can steer the vehicle manually,
but it takes more effort. Extreme
continuous steering may increase the effort
it takes for you to steer. This occurs to
159

Driving Aids
prevent internal overheating and

permanent damage to your steering
system. If this should occur, you will neither
E156130
lose the ability to steer the vehicle
manually nor will it cause permanent The system alerts you of certain collision
damage. Typical steering and driving risks. The system's sensor detects your
maneuvers will allow the system to cool vehicle's rapid approach to other vehicles
and steering assist will return to normal. traveling in the same direction as your
vehicle.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper vehicle alignment
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds
E156131
may also make the steering seem to
wander or pull. When your vehicle rapidly approaches
another vehicle, a red light bar flashes in
the windscreen (refer to image), a warning
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST lamp with the words "Pre-collision Assist"
is displayed in the instrument cluster and
WARNINGS a tone sounds.
This system is an extra driving aid. It The brake support system assists you in
does not replace your attention and reducing any collision speed by
judgment, or the need to apply the pre-charging the brakes. If the risk of
brakes. This system does NOT collision continues to increase after the
automatically brake your vehicle. If you fail audio-visual warning, the brake support
to press the brake pedal when necessary, prepares the brake system for rapid
you may collide with another vehicle. braking. The system does not
The Pre-Collision Assist system with automatically activate the brakes, but can
brake support cannot help prevent provide supplementary braking power if
all collisions. Do not rely on this the brake pedal is pressed even lightly.
system to replace your judgment and the
need to maintain correct distance and Using the Pre-Collision Assist
speed. System
WARNING
Note: The system does not detect, warn or
respond to potential collisions with vehicles The Pre-Collision Assist system’s
to the rear or sides of your vehicle. brake support reduces collision
speed only if you brake your vehicle
Note: The Pre-Collision Assist system is before any collision. You must press your
active at speeds above approximately brake pedal as you would in any typical
5 km/h. braking situation.
160

Driving Aids
You can adjust the warning system's Distance Indication

sensitivity through your information
display. See General Information (page Distance indication is a function that
67). . provides a graphical indication of the time
gap to other vehicles traveling in the same
Note: When possible, the manufacturer direction.
recommends using the highest sensitivity
setting. If warnings are too frequent, you can
reduce your system's sensitivity. Reduced
sensitivity causes fewer and later system
warnings. See General Information (page
67). .
Distance Alert
If the system detects that your vehicle is E190004
too close to the vehicle in front based on
the current sensitivity setting (see Note: Distance Alert and Distance
Adjusting Pre-Collision Assist Settings Indication deactivates when adaptive cruise
section below) the centre section of the control is active. The distance indication
red light bar in the windscreen will graphics do not display in the information
illuminate (refer to image). display unless adaptive cruise control is OFF.
E184570
Speed Sensitivity Graphics Distance Gap Time Gap
up to up to 0.9
100 km/h Normal Grey
25 m seconds
between
between 0.6
17 m
100 km/h Normal Yellow seconds and 0.9
and
seconds
25 m
up to under 0.6
100 km/h Normal Red
17 m seconds
161

Driving Aids
Adjusting Pre-Collision Assist Settings Blocked Sensors

You can adjust the Pre-Collision Assist and
Distance Alert sensitivity to one of three
possible settings by using the information
display control. See General Information
(page 67).
You can switch the distance alert and
indication function off using the
information display controls. See General
E223376
If a blocked sensor message appears in the

information display, dirt, water, or an object
is blocking the sensor. The sensor is
located behind a cover near the driver side
of the lower grille. If anything blocks the
sensor, your vehicle cannot see through
the sensor, and the pre-collision assist
system will not work. Possible causes for
the blocked sensor message and corrective
actions are listed below.
Cause Action
The radar sensor cover in the grille is dirty Clean the radar sensor cover or remove the
or obstructed obstruction
The surface of the radar sensor cover is Wait a short time. The radar may take
clean but the message remains in the several minutes to reset after you remove
display the obstruction
Heavy rain, spray, snow or fog in the air The Pre-Collision Assist system is tempor-
interferes with the radar signals arily disabled. Shortly after weather condi-
tions improve, the collision warning system
automatically reactivates
Swirling water, snow or ice on the road The Pre-Collision Assist system is tempor-
surface interferes with the radar signals arily disabled. Shortly after weather condi-
tions improve, the collision warning system
automatically reactivates
162

Driving Aids
System Limitations
WARNING
The Pre-Collision Assist system’s
brake support reduces collision
speed only if you brake your vehicle
before any collision. You must press your
brake pedal as you would in any typical
braking situation.
Due to the nature of radar technology,

there may be certain instances where
vehicles do not provide a collision warning.
These include:
• Stationary vehicles or slow moving
vehicles.
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
• Severe weather conditions (see
blocked sensor section).
• Debris build-up on the grille near the
headlamps (see blocked sensor
section).
• Small distance to vehicle ahead.
• Large steering wheel and pedal
movements (very active driving style).
Damage to the front end of your vehicle
may alter the radar sensor's coverage area.
This may result in missed or false collision
warnings. Have an authorized dealer check
your radar sensor for proper coverage and
operation.
163

Load Carrying
GENERAL INFORMATION WARNINGS

To service the roller shutter, see an
WARNINGS authorized dealer.
Use load securing straps to an
approved standard, e.g. DIN. Note: You must secure the loads carried in
Make sure that you secure all loose the loadspace.
items properly. Note: Use the pull strap to close the roller
shutter.
Place luggage and other loads as low
and as far forward as possible within Note: Make sure that the roller shutter is
the luggage or loadspace. free of any obstruction before you open or
close it. For example; snow or ice.
Do not exceed the maximum front
and rear axle loads for your vehicle. Note: Water and dust may enter the
loadspace with the roller shutter closed.
Do not exceed the maximum gross
vehicle weight. Operation
Do not place solid objects outside The roller shutter has four locking
the loadspace area for example positions:
timber and sheet material.
1. Fully closed.
Note: The center of the payload should be 2. 1/3 open.
located within the wheelbase of the vehicle. 3. 2/3 open.
Note: Avoid one sided load distribution. 4. Fully open.
Note: Uneven load distribution could result Note: The locking mechanism does not lock
in unacceptable handling and braking automatically as it passes each locking
characteristics. position.
Locking and unlocking into

LUGGAGE COVERS position
WARNINGS Note: You will hear a click as the roller

shutter passes each locking position.
Do not move your vehicle with
people or animals in the loadspace. Note: Use the pull strap to control the roller
shutter movement while opening.
Do not use the roller shutter pull
strap to secure loads. Lock the roller shutter at the required
locking position by pulling the pull strap to
Do not sit, stand or place anything the left.
on the roller shutter.
164

Load Carrying
E154609
Unlock the roller shutter by pulling the pull

strap to the right or by pressing the lock
buttons.
165

Load Carrying
E154610
WARNINGS
ROOF RACKS AND LOAD Do not exceed the maximum
CARRIERS permissible roof rail load of 80 kg,
including the roof rack.
WARNINGS
If you use a roof rack, the fuel Check the security of the roof rack load:
consumption of your vehicle will be • Before starting.
higher and you may experience
different driving characteristics. • After driving 50 km.
• At 1,000 km intervals.
Read and follow the manufacturers
instructions when you are fitting a
roof rack.
166

Load Carrying
A B C
E131684
A Roof Rail.
B Sports bar.
C Box rail.
Note: Do not sit or stand on items B or C. WARNINGS

Note: Do not use item C to secure loads. Always inspect the tie down points
Note: To reduce fuel consumption, roof before use.
rack cross bars and accessories should be
removed when not in use.
Note: The number of tie down points may
vary depending on your vehicle model.
LOAD RETAINING FIXTURES
Type 1
Tie Down Points WARNING
WARNINGS Do not exceed the load rating for the
Use the tie down points only for tie down points.
restraining the loads within the
loadspace. Using tie down points for
any other purpose may lead to serious
injury or vehicle damage. Do not use the
tie down points for towing.
Each tie down point has a maximum
load rating. Exceeding this may lead
to serious injury and vehicle damage.
167

Load Carrying
E131643 E133896
Load Rating of Type 1 Tie Down Points:

300 kg. A
Type 2
WARNING
Do not exceed the load rating for the B
tie down points.
C
D
E134098
A Cleat.
B Bezel.
C Spring.
E133894
D Pin.
Load Rating of Type 2 Tie Down Points: Do not use the tie down points under the
200 kg. following conditions:
Type 3 • Any sign of wear or damage.
• Rail channels supporting the tie down
WARNING
points show any sign of wear, damage
Do not exceed the load rating for the or distortion.
tie down points.
168

Load Carrying
• Locking bezel is damaged or broken or 1. Engage the base of the tie down point
will not lock into place. into the rail channel while holding the
• Not seated correctly within the support cleat vertically.
rail. 2. Slide along the rail until the pin on the
Load Rating of Type 3 Tie Down Points base of the tie down engages in a
(Rope Hook): 250 kg. desired hole on the rail.
3. Push the tie down in and rotate a
Fitting the Type 3 Tie Down Points quarter turn clockwise until the tie
down cleat is horizontal and the locking
WARNING bezel “snaps” into place.
Bezel must be fully engage into the
rail to secure the tie down point for Removing the Type 3 Tie Down Points
safe use. The word ‘Not Locked’ will 1. Grasp the locking bezel between the
be visible in the incorrectly installed tie thumb and fingers using the finger
downs. recess.
2. Pull the bezel away from the rail until
the base of the tie down point is fully
disengaged from the rail channel.
3. Turn the tie down point a quarter turn
anticlockwise until it snaps out of the
2 rail.
Load Rest
WARNINGS
1 A loaded load rest alters the vehicle's
center of gravity and aerodynamics.
Take care when cornering, driving in
crosswinds and at high speeds.
Do not exceed the permissible gross
weight.
E134099
169

Load Carrying
3
E131682 E135868
Note: Secure luggage or cargo placed on 1. Raise the tailgate slightly.

the load rest with the load rest stoppers. 2. Pull the support cable rearwards.
3. Release the support cable from
TAILGATE tailgate.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to pull out the
WARNINGS support cable on the other side.
Do not exceed the maximum Note: Lower the tailgate for better ingress
permissible tailgate load of 220 kg. or egress of the loads.
Vehicles fitted with a tow bar or rear
bumper should not have the tailgate
lowered without the support cables
in place.
Make sure that you keep a firm grip
of the tailgate to prevent it from
dropping down.
Lowering the Tailgate

WARNINGS
Do not lower the tailgate if a load
bed extension is fitted.
Maximum permissible load for a
tailgate with load bed extension is
50 kg.
170

Towing
TOWING A TRAILER • Reduce the stipulated maximum

permitted gross train weight by 10%
for every additional 1,000 m in high
WARNINGS
altitude regions above 1,000 m.
Do not exceed 100 km/h
• Use a low gear when descending a
steep downhill gradient.
Do not exceed the maximum The stability of your vehicle to trailer
permissible gross train weight stated. combination is very much dependent on
See Recommended Towing the quality of the trailer.
Weights (page 172).
Do not exceed the maximum
permissible nose weight, e.g. vertical TRAILER SWAY CONTROL
weight on the tow ball. See
Recommended Towing Weights (page Note: The system automatically turns on
172). every time you switch the ignition on.
Do not exceed the maximum Note: Switching off the stability control will
permissible axle load stated on your turn off the system.
vehicle identification plate. See Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
Recommended Towing Weights (page sway, but reduces it once it begins.
172).
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
The anti-lock braking system does from swaying.
not control the overrun brake on the
Trailer sway control is an enhanced feature
trailer.
of stability control system and
automatically detects when an attached
Note: Vehicles equipped with electronic trailer starts to sway. This feature applies
stability control (ESC) have trailer stability your vehicle brakes at individual wheels
control included. and if necessary, reduces engine power. If
When towing a trailer: the trailer begins to sway, slow your vehicle
down, pull safely to the side of the road
• Obey country specific regulations for and check for correct load distribution.
towing a trailer. See Towing a Trailer (page 171).
• Do not exceed 100 km/h even if a Note: Shifting to 4x4 Low will deactivate
country allows higher speeds under trailer sway control.
certain conditions.
Note: Switching on the electronic locking
• Place loads as low as possible and
differential will turn off the system.
central to the axle of your trailer. For
best stability of the trailer in an unladen Note: To switch off the trailer sway control
vehicle, place the load in the trailer as required, See Stability Control (page
towards the nose within the maximum 136).
nose load as this gives the best
stability. See Recommended Towing
Weights (page 172).
171

Towing
RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS

Towing capacities
Variant Drive Transmis- Without Trailer With Trailer Max. Gross
sion Brake Brake Train Weight
4x2 Manual 750 kg 2500 kg 5425 kg

2.2L Diesel *
Manual
4x2 and 750 kg 3500 kg 6000 kg
4x4 and Auto
*
4x2 and Manual
3.2L Diesel 750 kg 3500 kg 6000 kg
4x4 and Auto
*
Vehicles with increased ride height; Hi-Rider.
Trailer Nose Weight

WARNING
Do not exceed the maximum permissible nose weight, e.g. vertical weight on the
tow ball. This is important for vehicle and trailer stability.
Variant Minimum Nose Weight Maximum Nose Weight
All models 10% of the towed weight 350 kg
172

Towing
TOW BALL 2. Turn the trailer socket down through

90 degrees until it engages in the
correct position.
WARNINGS
Never leave the detached tow ball Removing the tow ball arm
arm unsecured inside the vehicle.
This would increase the risk of injury
in an accident.
When not in use, always transport
the tow ball arm securely fastened
inside the luggage compartment.
Take special care when fitting the
tow ball arm as the safety of the 2
vehicle and the trailer depends on
this. 3
Do not modify the trailer coupling. E137326
1
1. Push the lever towards the centre of

Do not disassemble or repair the tow the vehicle.
ball arm.
2. Turn the lever anti-clockwise to unlock
the tow ball arm.
Type 1
3. Remove the tow ball arm.
Inserting the tow ball arm
Type 2
E137325
E139242
WARNING
Make sure that the tow ball arm is 1. Tighten the bolts to 218 Nm
fully engaged in the seat.
Note: A trailer socket and the tow ball arm

seat are provided underneath the rear
bumper.
1. Insert the tow ball arm in to the seat.
173

Towing
Type 3 WARNINGS
When not towing, the anti-rattle
pinch bolt should be replaced, and
3 lock nut tightened. Tightening torque
must not exceed 47 Nm.
2
1
E207959
1. Insert the tow ball arm into the tow bar.

2. Insert the pin.
3. Secure the pin in place with the clip.
E222101
Driving with a trailer Remove the tow coupling anti-rattle pinch

WARNINGS bolt (1) by loosening the pinch bolt lock
nut (2).
If any of the below conditions cannot
be met, do not use the tow bar and Driving without a trailer
have it checked by an authorized
dealer. Note: Remove the tow ball arm from the
vehicle when not in use.
Never unlock the tow ball arm with
the trailer attached. 1. Remove the tow ball arm from the
vehicle and keep it securely fastened
inside the luggage compartment.
Before starting your journey
• Confirm that the tow ball arm is Maintenance
correctly engaged and locked in place.
Keep the system clean.
• Install the plug (if equipped) into its
seat. Periodically lubricate the tow ball
mechanism with resin-free grease or oil
Anti-rattle pinch bolt removal (If and the lock with graphite.
equipped)
WARNINGS
Tow coupling anti-rattle pinch bolt
should be removed from towbar
when towing.
174

Towing
TOWING POINTS WARNINGS

Do not use a rigid tow bar on the
front towing eye.
When towing your vehicle you must
select neutral.
Do not tow the vehicle with all
wheels on the ground while in 4WD
mode. Tow your vehicle with all
A wheels off the ground or all wheels on the
ground while the vehicle is in 2WD mode
in an event of a breakdown or mechanical
failure of the transmission.
Drive off slowly and smoothly without

jerking the vehicle you are towing.
Vehicles With Automatic

Transmission
B
E207878
WARNINGS
If a speed of 20 km/h and a distance
A Front towing eye. of 20 km is to be exceeded the drive
wheels must be lifted clear of the
B Rear towing eye. ground.
Note: Some towing points may be optional, It is recommended not to tow with
depending on the vehicle. the drive wheels on the ground.
However, if it is required to move your
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON vehicle from a dangerous location, do not
tow your vehicle faster than 20 km/h or
FOUR WHEELS further than 20 km.
All Vehicles Do not tow your vehicle backward.
WARNINGS In the event of a mechanical failure

Switch the ignition on when towing of the transmission the drive wheels
the vehicle. must be lifted clear of the ground.
The brake and steering assistance Do not tow your vehicle if the
will not operate unless the engine is ambient temperature is below 0°C.
running. Press the brake pedal harder
and allow for increased stopping distances
and heavier steering.
Too much tension in the tow rope
could cause damage to your vehicle
or the vehicle that is towing.
175

Driving Hints
BREAKING-IN REDUCED ENGINE

PERFORMANCE
Tires
WARNING WARNING
New tires need to be run-in for Continued operation of an

approximately 300 miles (500 overheating engine will increase the
kilometers). During this time, you temperature further, and cause the
may experience different driving engine to shut down completely.
characteristics.
Drive the overheating engine only for a brief
Brakes and Clutch amount of time to prevent permanent
damage. The engine will continue to
WARNING operate with limited power. The distance
you can travel depends on ambient
Avoid heavy use of the brakes and temperature, vehicle load, and terrain.
clutch if possible for the first 100
miles (150 kilometers) in town and If the needle in the engine coolant
for the first 1000 miles (1500 kilometers) temperature gauge moves to the upper
on freeways. limit position, the engine is overheating.
See Gauges (page 59).
Engine If the engine temperature continues to rise,
the fuel supply to the engine will reduce.
WARNING The air conditioning will also turn off and
the engine cooling fan will operate.
Avoid driving too fast during the first
1000 miles (1500 kilometers). Vary When this happens, immediately:
your speed frequently and change • Stop your vehicle as soon as possible.
up through the gears early. Do not labor
the engine. • Turn off the engine to prevent severe
engine damage.
Vehicles With a Diesel Engine • Wait for the engine to cool down.
• Check the coolant level. See Engine
During the first 2000 miles (3000 Coolant Check (page 235).
kilometers), you may notice a ticking sound
when your vehicle slows down. This is due • Have the vehicle checked by an
to adjustments of your new diesel engine authorized dealer.
and is normal.
COLD WEATHER
PRECAUTIONS
The functional operation of some
components and systems can be affected
at temperatures below -25°C.
176

Driving Hints
DRIVING THROUGH WATER 4x2 (Vehicles with Increased Ride

Height) and 4x4
WARNINGS
Drive through water in an emergency
only and not as part of normal
driving.
Engine damage can occur if water Y
enters the air filter.
Note: For Chassis Cab vehicles or where a

3rd party tray has been fitted, confirm the
installation is in line with the Ford Body
Builders Guide. This ensures fuel tank E137139
breathers and drive line breathers are
located above the specified water wading Y 800mm (31.5 inches)
lines.
In an emergency, you can drive your vehicle When driving in water, maintain a low
through water to a maximum depth as speed and do not stop your vehicle. After
shown and at a maximum speed of 7 km/h. driving through water and as soon as it is
You must take extra care when driving safe to do so:
through flowing water. • Depress the brake pedal lightly to
4x2 check that the brakes are functioning
correctly.
• Check that the horn works.
• Check that your vehicle's lamps are
fully operational.
• Check the power assistance of the
steering system.
X
FLOOR MATS
WARNINGS
E137140 Always use floor mats that are
designed to fit the foot well of your
X 600mm (23.6 inches) vehicle. Only use floor mats that
leave the pedal area unobstructed. Only
use floor mats that are firmly secured to
retention posts so that they cannot slip out
of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in
other ways.
177

Driving Hints
WARNINGS
Pedals that cannot move freely can
cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal
injury.
Always make sure that the floor
mats are properly attached to the
retention posts in the carpet that are
supplied with your vehicle. Floor mats must
be properly secured to both retention posts
to make sure mats do not shift out of
position. E142666
Never place floor mats or any other To install floor mats, position the floor mat
covering in the vehicle foot well that so that the eyelet is over the retention post
cannot be properly secured to and press down to lock in.
prevent them from moving and interfering To remove the floor mat, reverse the
with the pedals or the ability to control the installation procedure.
vehicle.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering on top of already installed
floor mats. Floor mats should always
rest on top of vehicle carpeting surface and
not another floor mat or other covering.
Additional floor mats or any other covering
will reduce the pedal clearance and
potentially interfere with pedal operation.
Check attachment of floor mats on
a regular basis. Always properly
reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning or
replacement.
Always make sure that objects
cannot fall into the driver foot well
while the vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped under
the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
Failure to properly follow floor mat
installation or attachment
instructions can potentially cause
interference with pedal operation causing
a loss of vehicle control.
178

Roadside Emergencies
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS Connecting the Jumper Cables
The hazard warning button is

E71943
located on the instrument panel.
Use it when your vehicle is creating a safety

hazard for other motorists.
Press the button to turn on the hazard
A
warning function, and the front and rear
direction indicators will flash.
Press the button again to turn them off.
Note: If used when the engine is not
running, the battery will lose charge. There C
may be insufficient power to restart your D
engine.
Note: Depending on applicable laws and
regulations in the country for which your
vehicle was originally built, the hazard
warning flashers may flash if you brake
heavily.
B
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNINGS
Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker
covers or the intake manifold as E102925
grounding points.
Connect batteries with only the same A Flat battery vehicle.
nominal voltage. B Booster battery vehicle.
Use only adequately sized cables C Positive connection cable.
with insulated clamps. D Negative connection cable.
Never jump start the vehicle at the WARNING
auxiliary battery (if equipped).
Do not let the vehicles come into
contact when using booster cables.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system. 1. Position the vehicles in a suitable
arrangement to connect the booster
cables.
2. Switch off the engine and any electrical
equipment.
179

3. Connect the positive (+) terminal of Disconnect the cables in the reverse order.
vehicle B with the positive (+) terminal
of vehicle A (cable C).
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E205764
WARNINGS
Do not connect directly to the
negative (–) terminal of the flat
battery.
Make sure that the cables are clear
of any moving parts and fuel delivery
system parts.
4. Connect the negative (-) terminal of E143886

vehicle B to the ground connection of
vehicle A (cable D). If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional towing service or,
To Start the Engine if you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, your roadside
WARNING assistance service provider.
Do not switch the headlamps on We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
when disconnecting the cables. The dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
peak voltage could blow the bulbs. vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford
Motor Company has not approved a
1. Run the engine of vehicle B at a slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle
moderately high speed. damage may occur if towed incorrectly, or
by any other means.
2. Start the engine of vehicle A.
3. Run both vehicles for a minimum of
three minutes before disconnecting the
cables.
180

Ford Motor Company produces a towing

manual for all authorized tow truck
operators. Have your tow truck operator
refer to this manual for proper hook-up
and towing procedures for your vehicle.
Towing an four-wheel drive vehicle
requires that all wheels be off the ground,
such as using a wheel lift and dollies or
flatbed equipment. This prevents damage
to the transmission, four-wheel drive
system and vehicle.
181

Fuses
FUSE BOX LOCATIONS Pre-fuse Box
Left-Hand Drive
A B C E
E206154
D
E206156
Right-Hand Drive
Your vehicle has a pre-fuse box located in
A B C E the engine compartment attached to the
positive battery post. This box contains
several high current fuses. If replacement
of these high current fuses is required, see
an authorized dealer.
Engine Compartment Fuse Box

(Power Distribution Box - PDB)
E206153
D
A Pre-fuse box.
B Engine compartment fuse box.
(Power Distribution Box - PDB).
C Passenger compartment fuse
box.
D High current fuse box (below
the PDB).
E Auxiliary fuse box (if equipped). E206157
WARNINGS
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high current fuses.
To reduce risk of electrical shock,
always replace the cover to the
engine compartment fuse box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
reservoirs.
182

Fuses
The engine compartment fuse box has Passenger Compartment Fuse Box
high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle's main electrical systems from
overloads.
When you disconnect and reconnect the
battery, you will need to reset some
features.
Lift the release lever at the rear of the cover
to remove it.
High Current Fuse Box
E206167
The fuse box is located behind the access

cover on the outboard side of the steering
column.
E206158
Your vehicle has a pre-fuse box located in Auxiliary Fuse Box

the engine compartment below the engine
compartment fuse box. This box contains
several high current fuses. If replacement
of these high current fuses is required, see
E174325
183

Fuses
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART

Engine Compartment Fuse Box -
Type 1
WARNINGS
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high-current fuses.
E173837
reservoirs.
Release the catches and remove the cover.
The engine compartment fuse box has

high-current fuses that protect your
overloads. When you disconnect and
reconnect the battery, you will need to
reset some features. See Changing the
12V Battery (page 239). Lift the release
levers at the rear of the cover to remove it.
184

Fuses
E133601
Fuse Fuse Amp Protected Components

Rating
1 60 Passenger compartment fuse box supply (Battery).

2 60 Passenger compartment fuse box supply (Battery).
3 (Petrol) 50 Engine cooling fan.
3 (Diesel) 60 Glow plug control module.
4 40 Anti-lock brake system module.
5 30 Power windows (front and rear).
6 - Not used.
7 - Not used.
185

Fuses

Rating
8 - Not used.
9 20 Power seats.
10 20 Auxiliary power socket instrument panel, console top.
11 30 Blower motor.
12 25 Four wheel drive (4WD) motor power.
13 20 Starter solenoid.
14 20 Heated rear window.
15 (Petrol) 10 Flex-fuel pump.
15 (Diesel) 20 Vaporizer glow plug.
16 10 Air conditioning clutch.
17 25 Power windows (front).
18 25 Windscreen wiper motor.
19 - Not used.
20 20 Cigar lighter.
21 15 Horn.
22 15 Fuel injectors, flex-fuel valve.
23 10 Differential lock solenoid.
24 - Not used.
25 15 Ignition coils, temperature and mass air flow sensor, glow
plug module, vacuum control valve (VCV), electronic
vacuum regulator valve (EVRV).
26 7.5 Electronic control module (ECM).
27 10 Transmission control module (TCM).
28 10 Heated exhaust gas oxygen, universal heated exhaust gas
oxygen-sensor, relay coils.
29 15 Electronic control module (ECM).
30 5 Battery monitoring sensor.
186

Fuses

Rating
31 20 Auxiliary power socket (rear console).

32 5 Air conditioning pressure switch.
33 10 Transmission control module (TCM).
34 5 Crew chief module, Spare.
35 20 Passenger compartment fuse box supply (Ignition).
37 10 Headlamp leveling.
38 - Not used.
39 10 Power mirrors.
40 10 Vapourizer pump.
41 10 Heated mirrors.
42 10 Alarm horn.
43 - Not used.
44 - Not used.
46 20 Battery isolator.
47 40 Trailer tow module.
48 - Not used.
49 - Not used.
50 5 Ignition relay, relay coils.
51 20 Trailer Tow (12/13pin Batt feed / Permanent Live.
Relay Number Protected Components
R1 Key interlock.
R2 Wiper on or off.
R3 Horn.
187

Fuses
R4 Air conditioning clutch.

R5 Differential lock.
R6 Wiper Hi or Lo.
R7 Engine cooling fan low.
R8 Engine cooling fan high.
R9 Flex-fuel pump, vaporizer glow plug.
R10 Heated rear window.
R11 Not used.
R12 Not used.
R13 Electronic control module (ECM) power
hold.
R14 Ignition.
R15 4WD motor 2 (clockwise).
R16 4WD motor 1 (counter clockwise).
R17 4WD motor.
R18 Security horn.
R19 Starter.
R20 Not used.
R21 Not used.
R22 Not used.
R23 Not used.
R24 Not used.
R25 Not used.
R26 Blower motor.
R27 Power seat.
188

Fuses
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box - Type 1
E133602
189

Fuses

Rating
56 20 Fuel pump.
57 - Not used.
58 - Not used.
59 5 Passive anti-theft system (PATS).
Interior lamp, driver's door switch pack, mood lights,
60 10
puddle lights, automatic shifter, footwell lamp.
61 - Not used.
62 5 Rain sensor module.
63 - Not used.
64 - Not used.
65 - Not used.
66 20 Driver's door unlock, central double locking.
67 5 Stop lamp switch.
68 - Not used.
Instrument cluster, integrated control module (ICP),
69 5
tracking and blocking module.
70 20 Central locking.
71 5 Air conditioning.
72 7.5 Alarm horn.
73 5 On-board diagnostics II.
74 20 Main beam.
75 15 Front fog lamps.
76 10 Reversing lamp, rear view mirror.
77 20 Washer pump.
78 5 Ignition switch.
79 15 Audio signal DIN, FSAO audio, multi-function display.
80 20 Multi-function display, Hi audio, bluetooth audio.
190

Fuses

Rating
81 5 Interior motion sensor.

82 20 Washer pump ground.
83 20 Central locking ground.
84 20 Driver's door unlock, central double locking ground.
Instrument cluster, parking aid module, rear view camera,
85 7.5 manual air conditioning, rear view mirror, tracking and
blocking module.
86 10 Restraint system, passenger air-bag deactivation indicator.
87 7.5 Tachograph.
88 - Not used.
89 - Not used.
Auxiliary Fuse Box - Type 1
E174549
191

Fuses

Rating
1 25 Driving Light.
2 15 Position lamp.
3 10 LED beacon.
4 15 Work lights.
5 20 Spare.
6 20 Power point.
7 15 Reversing lamp.
8 15 Direction indicators, stop lamp.
9 5 Crew chief.
10 5 Disable fuse (isolator ground).
11 - Not used.
12 - Not used.
R1 Work lights.
R2 LED beacon.
R3 Spare.
R4 Position lamp.
R5 Direction indicator (left).
R6 Direction indicator (right).
R7 Stop lamp.
R8 Not used.
R9 Not used.
192

Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Box - The engine compartment fuse box has
Type 2 (2.5L Gasoline) high-current fuses that protect your
WARNINGS overloads. When you disconnect and
Always disconnect the battery before reconnect the battery, you will need to
servicing high-current fuses. reset some features. See Changing the
12V Battery (page 239). Lift the release
To reduce risk of electrical shock, levers at the rear of the cover to remove it.
reservoirs.
E190797
193

Fuses
Fuse/Relay Fuse Amp Protected Components

Number Rating
1 25
3 Smart wiper module.
2 - Starter motor solenoid relay.

3 15
1 Rain sensor.
4 - Blower motor relay.

5 20
3 Auxiliary power point.
Rear of centre console.
6 - Cooling fan relay.
High-speed cooling fan.
7 20
1 Powertrain control module.
8 20
1 Variable intake manifold.
Powertrain control module.
Evaporative emission canister purge valve.
Heated oxygen sensor.
Catalyst monitoring sensor (CMS).
9 - Powertrain control module relay.
10 20
Cigar lighter.
11 15
Ignition coil.
12 15
2 Not used.
13 15
2 Heater.
Fuel injectors.
14 15
2 Not used.
15 - Starter relay.
16 20
Cigar lighter.
2.
17 20
Rear cargo area.
194

Fuses

Number Rating
18 10
Keep alive power.
19 10
1 Electronic power assist steering.
20 10
1 Lighting control.
Headlamp leveling.
21 - Not used.
22 10
1 A/C clutch.
23 15
1 Head-up display.
Rear parking aid camera.
Adaptive cruise control.
24 5
1 Not used.
25 10
2 Anti-lock brake system.
26 10
2 Mirror adjust switch.
27 5
1 Auxiliary Heater.
28 10
29 - Not used.
30 - Not used.
31 - Not used.
32 - Fuel pump relay.
33 - A/C clutch relay.
34 15
1 Stop lamp.
Center high mount.
35 15
1 Not used.
(Spare).
36 - Not used.
37 10
1 Heated exterior mirror.
38 - Low speed.
195

Fuses

Number Rating
Cooling fan relay.

39 - Not used.
40 - Stop lamp.
Relay.
Center high mount.
41 - Horn relay.
42 - Not used.
43 - Not used.
44 - Not used.
45 10
1 Fuel injectors.
46 10
2 Not used.
(Spare).
47 10
2 Brake pedal switch.
48 20
1 Horn.
49 - Not used.
50 - Not used.
51 - Not used.
52 - Not used.
53 - Not used.
54 - Not used.
55 - Not used.
86 - Not used.
1
Micro fuse.
2
Dual micro fuse.
3
M-type fuse.
196

Fuses
Power Distribution Box - Bottom 2. Raise the rear side of the fuse box from
the cradle.
There are fuses located on the bottom of
the fuse box. To access the bottom of the
fuse box, do the following:
1
3
A 2 5
1
5
E206174
3. Move the fuse box toward the rear side

E206171 of the engine compartment and rotate
as shown in the graphics.
A Towards the front side of the 4. Pivot the rear side of the fuse box to
vehicle. access the bottom side.
1. Release the two latches, located on 5. Release the two latches to open the
both sides of the fuse box. fuse cover.
197

Fuses
E190798
Fuse/Relay Number Fuse Amp Rating Protected Components
56 - Not used.
57 - Not used.
58 - Not used.
59 - Not used.
60 30
4 Fuel Pump Control Module.
61 - Not used.
62 50
4 Body control module 1
(lighting).
63 30
3 Low-speed cooling fan.
64 20
3 Trailer auxiliary
198

Fuses
65 - Not used.
66 - Not used.
67 50
4 Body control module 2.
68 20
3 Rear window defroster.
69 30
Valves.
70 - Not used.
71 50
4 High-speed cooling fan.
72 - Not used.
73 - Not used.
74 20
3 Driver power seat.
75 - Not used.
76 - Not used.
77 - Not used.
78 - Not used.
79 40
4 Blower motor.
80 - Not used.
81 - Not used.
82 60
Pump.
83 25
3 Windshield wiper motor.
84 30
3 Starter motor solenoid.
199

Fuses
85 - Not used.
87 40
4 Trailer module.
1
Micro fuse.
2
Dual micro fuse.
3
M-type fuse.
4
LPJ-type fuse.
Battery Mounted Fuse Link - Type 2

(2.5L Gasoline)
E200936

Rating
1 225 Alternator.
2 125 Electronic power assist steering.
200

Fuses
High Current Fuse Box - Type 2 (2.5L

Gasoline)
E206158

Rating
1 70 Heater Control Unit (cold start).

2 125 Body control module 1.
3 50 Body control module 2.
4 - Busbar through to power distribution box.
5 100 Auxiliary heater (if equipped).
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box

The fuse box is located below and
outboard of the steering column behind
the access cover.
201

Fuses
E145984
Fuse Fuse Amp Rating Protected Components
Glove box lamp.

Map lamp.
Battery saver.
1 10
1
Overhead console.
Sun visor.
Grab handle.
Not used.
2 7.5
1
(Spare).
Driver door latch / Fuel flap unlock relay. Door Double
3 20
1
/ Aux lock relay.
Not used.
4 5
1
(Spare).
Not used.
5 20
1
(Spare).
Not used.
6 10
2
(Spare).
Not used.
7 10
2
(Spare).
8 10
2 Security horn.
202

Fuses
Not used.
9 10
2
(Spare).
Not used.
10 5
2
(Spare).
11 5
2 Interior motion sensor.
Electronic control panel.

12 7.5
2
Climate control.
Instrument cluster.
13 7.5
2
Data link connector.
Steering column control module.
Not used.
14 10
2
(Spare).
15 10
2
OBD II (RHD).
16 15
1 Child lock.
Battery backed sounder. Tracking and Blocking

17 5
2
Module.
18 5
2 Ignition switch.
7.5
2 Not used.
19 (Spare).
-
Not used.
20 7.5
2
(Spare.)
21 5
2 Humidity and in car temperature sensor.
Not used.
22 5
2
(Spare).
Inverter.
23 10
1
Driver door window.
Central locking system.
24 20
1 Central locking system.
Driver door control module (power window - one

25 30
1
touch up/down all doors).
203

Fuses
Driver door power window switch memory (with one

touch up/down driver only).
Passenger door control module (power window)
26 30
1
(one touch up/down).
Not used.
27 30
1
(Spare).
Not used.
28 20
1
(Spare).
Left rear door control module (power window) (one
29 30
1
touch up/down).
Right rear door control module (power window) (one
30 30
1
touch up/down).
Not used.
31 15
1
(Spare).
Radio transceiver module.
SYNC module.
32 10
1
GPS.
Multi-function display.
Door entry remote.
33 20
1 Audio unit.
34 30
1 Starter relay.
35 5
1 Restraints control module.
36 15
1 Auto-dimming interior mirror.
Not used.
37 15
1
(Spare).
Power windows (without door control module) (one
38 30
3
touch up/down - driver only).
1
Micro fuse.
2
Dual micro fuse.
3
PTC fuse
204

Fuses
Auxiliary Fuse Box - Type 2 (2.5L Gasoline)
E174549

Rating
1 25 Driving Light.
2 15 Position lamp.
3 10 LED beacon.
4 15 Work lights.
5 20 Spare.
6 20 Auxiliary power point.
8 15 Direction indicators.
Stop lamp.
9 5 Crew chief.
11 - Not used.
12 - Not used.
205

Fuses
R1 Work lights.
R2 LED beacon.
R3 Spare.
R4 Position lamp.
R5 Direction indicators.
Left.
Right.
R7 Stop lamp.
R8 Not used.
R9 Not used.

Engine Compartment Fuse Box - high-current fuses that protect your
Type 2 (2.2L Diesel) vehicle's main electrical systems from
WARNINGS reconnect the battery, you will need to
Always disconnect the battery before reset some features. See Changing the
servicing high-current fuses. 12V Battery (page 239). Lift the release
reservoirs.
206

Fuses
E190797

Number Rating
1 25

3 15
1 Rain sensor.

5 20
(Console rear).
6 - -
7 20
8 20
Volumetric control valve. EGR cooler bypass. TMAF.
207

Fuses

Number Rating
9 - Powertrain control module relay.

10 20
1.
11 - Not used.
12 15
2 Fan.
Powertrain control module.
Glow plugs.
13 - Not used.
14 15
PCV Heater. (2.2L Diesel).
15 - Starter relay.
16 20
1.
17 20
Rear cargo area.
18 10
1 Not used.
(Spare).
19 10
20 10
1 Headlamp leveling.
Lighting control.
21 - Not used.
22 10
1 A/C clutch.
23 15
1 Rear parking aid camera.
Voltage quality module.
Head-up display.
24 5
1 Air Conditioning pressure switch (Manual transmission
vehicles only).
25 10
26 10
Tachograph.
208

Fuses

Number Rating
27 5
1 Heater. PTC.
28 10
29 - Not used.
30 - Not used.
31 - Not used.
34 15
1 Stop lamp.
Centre high mount.
35 15
1 Transmission control module.
36 - Not used.
37 10
38 - Not used.
39 - Four wheel drive power relay.
40 - Center high mount stop lamp relay.
41 - Horn relay.
42 - Four wheel drive motor no. 2 relay.
43 - -
44 5
1 Not used.
(Spare).
45 10
1 Not used.
(Spare).
46 10
2 Not used.
(Spare).
47 10
48 20
1 Horn.
49 - Not used.
209

Fuses

Number Rating
50 - Not used.
51 - Not used.
52 - Not used.
53 10
1 Rear differential lock.
54 - Not used.
55 - Not used.
86 - Four wheel drive motor -no. 1 relay.
1
Micro fuse.
2
Dual micro fuse.
3
M-type fuse.
Power Distribution Box - Bottom

the fuse box. To access the bottom of the 1
A 2
E206171
A Towards the front side of the

vehicle.
1. Release the two latches located on

both sides of the fuse box.
210

Fuses
2. Raise the rear side of the fuse box from 3. Move the fuse box toward the rear side
the cradle. of the engine compartment and rotate
as shown in the graphics.
4. Pivot the rear side of the fuse box to
access the bottom side.
5. Release the two latches to open the
fuse cover.
3
5
E206174
211

Fuses
E190798
56 - Not used.
57 - Not used.
58 - Not used.
59 25
4 Four Wheel Drive.
60 30
3 Fuel Pump Control Module.
61 30
3 Windshield Defrost (left) (if
fitted).
62 50
(lighting).
63 - Not used.
64 20
3 Trailer tow connector.
212

Fuses
65 20
3 Heated front seats.
66 30
3 Windshield Defrost (right)
(if fitted).
67 50
(lighting).
68 20
69 30
3 Anti-lock brake system
valves.
70 - Not used.
71 - Not used.
72 - Not used.
73 - Not used.
74 20
75 - Not used.
76 - Not used.
77 - Not used.
78 - Not used.
79 40
4 Blower motor.
80 - Not used.
81 40
3 Inverter.
82 60
83 25
84 30
213

Fuses
85 - Not used.
87 40
4 Trailer module.
1
Micro fuse.
2
Dual micro fuse.
3
M-type fuse.
4
LPJ-type fuse.

Engine Compartment Fuse Box - high-current fuses that protect your
Type 2 (3.2L Diesel) vehicle's main electrical systems from
WARNINGS reconnect the battery, you will need to
Always disconnect the battery before reset some features. See Changing the
servicing high-current fuses. 12V Battery (page 239). Lift the release
To reduce risk of electrical shock
reservoirs.
214

Fuses
E190797

Number Rating
1 25

3 15
1 Rain sensor.

5 20
3.
6 - Not used.
7 20
8 20
Volumetric control valve. EGR cooler bypass. TMAF.
215

Fuses

Number Rating
9 - Powertrain control module.

Relay.
10 20
1.
11 15
2 Not used.
Spare.
12 15
2 Powertrain control module. Fan drive. Glow plug control
module.
13 15
2 Not used.
Spare.
14 15
2 Not used.
Spare.
15 - Run/start relay.
16 20
2
17 20
4
18 10
1 Not used.
19 10
20 10
1 Headlamp switch. Headlamp leveling motor.
21 - Not used.
22 10
1 Air conditioning clutch.
23 15
1 Voltage quality module.
Head-up display.
24 5
1 Air Conditioning pressure switch (Manual transmission
vehicles only).
25 10
26 10
Tachograph.
216

Fuses

Number Rating
27 5
1 Auxiliary Heater.
28 10
29 - Not used.
30 - Not used.
32 - Not used.
34 15
1 Stop lamp.
Center high mount.
35 15
1 Transmission control module.
36 - Not used.
37 10
38 - Not used.
39 - Four wheel drive power relay.
40 - Stop lamp.
Center high mount.
Relay.
41 - Horn relay.
42 - Four wheel drive motor no. 2 relay.
43 - Not used.
44 5
1 Not used.
Spare.
45 5
1 Not used.
Spare.
46 10
2 Not used.
Spare.
47 10
217

Fuses

Number Rating
48 20
1 Horn.
49 - Not used.
50 - Not used.
51 - Not used.
52 - Not used.
53 10
1 Rear differential lock.
54 - Not used.
55 - Not used.
86 - Four wheel drive motor no.1 relay.
1
Micro fuse.
2
Dual micro fuse.
3
M-type fuse.
Power Distribution Box - Bottom

the fuse box. To access the bottom of the 1
A 2
E206171
A Towards the front side of the

vehicle.
218

Fuses
1. Release the two latches located on 3. Move the fuse box toward the rear side
both sides of the fuse box. of the engine compartment and rotate
2. Raise the rear side of the fuse box from as shown in the graphics.
the cradle. 4. Pivot the rear side of the fuse box to
access the bottom side.
5. Release the two latches to open the
fuse cover.
3
5
E206174
219

Fuses
E190798
56 - Not used.
57 - Not used.
58 - Not used.
59 25
4 Four wheel drive.
60 30
4 Fuel pump control module.
fuel
61 30
3 Windshield defrost (if
fitted).
62 50
4 Body control module.
63 - Not used.
64 20
3 Trailer tow connector.
220

Fuses
65 20
3 Heated front seats.
66 30
3 Windshield defrost (right)
(if fitted).
67 50
(lighting).
68 20
69 30
Valves.
70 - Not used.
71 - Not used.
72 - Not used.
73 - Not used.
74 20
75 - Not used.
76 - Not used.
77 - Not used.
78 - Not used.
79 40
4 Blower motor.
80 - Not used.
81 40
3 Inverter.
82 60
Pump.
83 25
84 30
221

Fuses
85 - Not used.
87 40
4 Trailer module.
1
Micro fuse.
2
Dual micro fuse.
3
M-type fuse.
4
LPJ-type fuse.
Battery Mounted Fuse Link- Type 2

(2.2L and 3.2L Diesel)
E200936

Rating
1 225 Alternator.
Electronic power assist steering.
2 125
If equipped.
222

Fuses
High Current Fuse Box - Type 2 (2.2L

and 3.2L Diesel)
E206158

Rating
1 60 Glow plug module.

2 125 Body control module.
Body control module.
3 50 Voltage quality module.
Head-up display.
4 - Busbar through to power distribution box.
5 100 Auxiliary heater (if equipped).
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box

The fuse box is located below and
outboard of the steering column behind
the access cover.
223

Fuses
E145984
Automatic transmission gear shifter.

Map lamp.
Grab handle.
1 10
1
Battery saver.
Glove box lamp.
Sun visor.
2 7.5
1 Not used.
Driver door latch / Fuel flap unlock relay. Door Double

3 20
1
/ Aux lock relay.
Not used.
4 5
1
(Spare).
Not used.
5 20
1
(Spare).
Not used.
6 10
2
(Spare).
Not used.
7 10
2
(Spare).
8 10
2 Security horn.
224

Fuses
Not used.
9 10
2
(Spare).
Not used.
10 5
2
(Spare).
11 5
2 Interior motion sensor.
Electronic control panel.

12 7.5
2
control
Climate control.
Instrument cluster.
13 7.5
2
Steering column control module.
Not used.
14 10
2
(Spare).
Gateway module/smart data link connector. OBD II
15 10
2
(RHD).
16 15
1 Child lock.
Battery backed sounder. Tracking and Blocking

17 5
2
Module.
18 5
2 Ignition switch.
7.5
2 Not used.
19 (Spare).
-
20 7.5
2 Headlamp control module.
21 5
2 Humidity and in car temperature sensor.
Not used.
22 5
2
(Spare).
Inverter. Door lock switch. Driver door window switch
23 10
1
(one touch up/down all doors).
24 20
1 Central locking system.
Driver door control module (power window - one

touch up/down all doors).
25 30
1
Driver door power window switch memory (with one
touch up/down driver only).
225

Fuses
Passenger door control module (power window)

26 30
1
(one touch up/down).
Not used.
27 30
1
(Spare).
Not used.
28 20
1
(Spare).
Left rear door control module (power window) (one
29 30
1
touch up/down).
Right rear door control module (power window) (one
30 30
1
touch up/down).
31 15
1 Tachograph.
Radio transceiver module. SYNC. Global positioning

32 10
1
system module. Multi function display. Door entry
remote.
33 20
1 Audio unit.
34 30
1 Starter relay.
35 5
1 Restraints control module.
36 15
1 Auto-dimming interior mirror.
Not used.
37 15
1
(Spare).
Power windows.
38 30
3
(without door control module)
(one touch up/down - driver only).
1
Micro fuse.
2
Dual micro fuse.
3
PTC fuse
226

Fuses
Auxiliary Fuse Box - Type 2 (2.2L and 3.2L Diesel)
E174549

Rating
1 25 Driving Light.
2 15 Position lamp.
3 10 LED beacon.
4 15 Work lights.
5 20 Spare.
6 20 Auxiliary power point.
8 15 Direction indicators.
Stop lamp.
9 5 Crew chief.
11 - Not used.
12 - Not used.
227

Fuses
R1 Work lights.
R2 LED beacon.
R3 Spare.
R4 Position lamp.
(Left).
(right).
R7 Stop lamp.
R8 Not used.
R9 Not used.
If electrical components in your vehicle are

not working, a fuse may have blown. A
CHANGING A FUSE break in the fuse wire will indicate a blown
fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before
WARNINGS replacing any electrical components.
Do not modify the electrical system
of your vehicle in any way. Have
repairs to the electrical system and
the replacement of relays and high current
fuses carried out by an authorized dealer.
Switch the ignition and all electrical
equipment off before attempting to
change a fuse.
Always replace a fuse with one that
has the specified amperage rating.
Using a fuse with a higher amperage
rating can cause severe wire damage and
could start a fire.
E142430
228

Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION • Tire pressures (when cold). See

Technical Specifications (page 264).
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help • Tire condition. See Wheels and Tires
maintain its roadworthiness and resale (page 249).
value. There is a large network of Ford
authorized repairers that are there to help Monthly Checks
you with their professional servicing
expertise. Authorized repairers are best • Engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check
qualified to service your vehicle properly (page 235).
and expertly, with a wide range of highly • Engine coolant level (engine cold). See
specialized tools. Engine Coolant Check (page 235).
In addition to regular servicing, we • Pipes, hoses and reservoirs for leaks.
recommend that you carry out the • Air conditioning operation.
following checks. • Parking brake operation.
WARNINGS • Horn operation.
Switch the ignition off before • Tightness of lug nuts. See Technical
touching or attempting adjustment Specifications (page 264).
of any kind.
Do not touch the electronic ignition OPENING AND CLOSING THE
system parts after you have switched
the ignition on or when the engine is HOOD
running. The system operates at high
voltage. Opening the Hood
Keep your hands and clothing clear
of the engine cooling fan. Under
certain conditions, the fan may
continue to run for several minutes after
you have switched the engine off.
Make sure that you fit filler caps
securely after carrying out
maintenance checks.
Daily Checks
• Exterior lamps.
• Interior lamps.
• Warning lamps and indicators.
Check When Refueling

• Brake fluid level. See Brake and 1
E206129
Clutch Fluid Check (page 237).
• Washer fluid level. See Washer Fluid 1. Pull the hood release lever. See At a
Check (page 237). Glance (page 9).
229

Maintenance
4
2
3
E201861
E207690
2. Slightly lift the hood. 5. The hood strut automatically supports

the hood.
3. Move the catch to the left for vehicles
with left hand drive. Move the catch to Closing the Hood
the right for vehicle with right hand
drive. 1. Lower the hood and allow it to drop
under its own weight for the last
4. Open the hood.
20–30 cm.
2. If necessary, apply a downward force
on the leading edge of the hood prior
to engage with the latch, to latch the
hood fully.
Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly
closed.
230

Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.2L DURATORQ-TDCI (PUMA)

DIESEL
RHD
A B C D E F G
K J I H
E131930
231

Maintenance
LHD
A C D E B F G
K J I H
E131931
A Engine coolant reservoir cap. See Engine Coolant Check (page 235).
B Brake and clutch fluid reservoir cap.
1
C Engine oil dipstick . See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 235).
1
D Engine oil filler cap .
E Fuel filter water trap. See Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap (page 237).
F Engine junction box. See Fuses (page 182).
G Vehicle identificaton plate.
H Battery. See Roadside Emergencies (page 179).
I Power steering fluid reservoir cap. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page
237).
J Washer fluid reservoir cap. See Washer Fluid Check (page 237).
K Air cleaner.
1
The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are colored for easy identification.
232

Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.2L DURATORQ-TDCI (PUMA)

DIESEL
RHD
A B C D E F G
E131967
K J I H
233

Maintenance
LHD
A C D E B F G
K J I H
E131968
A Engine coolant reservoir cap. See Engine Coolant Check (page 235).
B Brake and clutch fluid reservoir cap.
1
C Engine oil dipstick . See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 235).
1
D Engine oil filler cap .
E Fuel filter water trap. See Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap (page 237).
F Engine junction box. See Fuses (page 182).
G Vehicle identificaton plate.
H Battery. See Roadside Emergencies (page 179).
I Power steering fluid reservoir cap. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page
237).
J Washer fluid reservoir cap. See Washer Fluid Check (page 237).
K Air cleaner.
1
The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are colored for easy identification.
234

Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK Adding Oil

WARNINGS
A B Only add oil when the engine is cold.
If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutes
for the engine to cool down. Failure
to take care may result in personal injury.
Do not remove the filler cap when
the engine is running. Failure to take
care may result in personal injury.
E71362
1. Remove the filler cap.
A MIN 2. Add oil that meets Ford specifications.
B MAX 3. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you
feel a strong resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
ENGINE OIL CHECK maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground. Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.
2. Switch off the engine and wait 10
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan. ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint free cloth. Replace the WARNINGS
dipstick and remove it again to check Do not dispose of engine coolant in
the oil level. the household refuse or the public
If the oil level is at the minimum mark, add sewage system. Use an authorized
oil immediately. waste disposal facility.
Note: Check the oil level before starting the Do not put engine coolant in the
engine. windshield washer fluid container. If
sprayed on the windshield, engine
Note: Make sure that the oil level is coolant could make it difficult to see
between the minimum and the maximum through the windshield.
marks.
Note: Do not use oil additives or other
engine treatments. Under certain conditions,
they may damage the engine.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
5,000 km.
235

Maintenance
WARNINGS
Do not allow the coolant to touch
your skin or eyes. If this happens,
rinse the affected areas immediately
with plenty of water and contact your
physician.
Undiluted coolant is flammable and
may ignite if spilled on a hot exhaust.
Do not mix different colors or types
of coolant in your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company does not recommend

the use of recycled engine coolant since a
E206128 Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the Note: Add a 50/50 mixture of antifreeze
coolant reservoir. If the coolant level is at and water or prediluted engine coolant that
or below the minimum mark, add coolant meets the correct specification.
immediately. Note: Use coolants which meet the
Maintain coolant concentration within specifications or requirements defined. Use
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze of other coolants may lead to damage
point between -29°C and -34°C. which is not covered by your vehicle's
Warranty.
Note: Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground. To top up the coolant level do the
following:
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may expand beyond the MAX mark. 1. Unscrew the cap SLOWLY. Any
pressure will escape as you unscrew
Note: Do not use Stop Leak Pellets, cooling the cap.
system sealants or additives as they can
cause damage to the engine cooling or 2. Add engine coolant to the MAX mark,
heating systems. do not overfill.
3. Refit filler cap. Turn it clockwise until
Adding Engine Coolant you feel a strong click.
WARNINGS Note: In case of emergency, you can add
water without engine coolant in order to
Do not remove the coolant reservoir reach a vehicle service location.
cap while the engine is running or hot.
Note: Prolonged use of an incorrect dilution
Only add coolant when the engine is of engine coolant can cause engine damage,
cold. If the engine is hot, wait 10 such as corrosion, overheating or freezing.
minutes for the engine to cool down.
Note: The cooling system filler cap should
be inspected and cleaned regularly. The cap
should be replaced if there is any evidence
of deterioration of the sealing.
236

Maintenance
BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID If the level is at the MIN mark, top up
immediately.
CHECK
Topping up
WARNINGS
Remove the filler cap.
Use of any fluid other than the
recommended brake fluid may CAUTION
reduce brake efficiency and not meet
Ford's performance standards. Do not top up further than the MAX
mark.
Do not allow the fluid to touch your
skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the
affected areas immediately with Top up with fluid that meets the Ford
plenty of water and contact your doctor. specification.
If the level is at the MIN mark, have

the system checked by a properly WASHER FLUID CHECK
trained technician as soon as
possible. Top up the washer fluid reservoir when the
washer fluid level indicator is on. See
Warning Lamps and Indicators (page
Note: Keep brake fluid clean and dry. 61).
Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
products or other materials may result in When adding fluid, use a mixture of washer
brake system damage and possible failure. fluid and water to help prevent freezing in
cold weather and improve the cleaning
Note: The brake and the clutch systems are capability.
supplied from the same reservoir.
Top up with fluid that meets the Ford
specification.
DRAINING THE FUEL FILTER
WATER TRAP
POWER STEERING FLUID WARNING
CHECK - VEHICLES WITH:
Do not dispose of fuel in the
HYDRAULIC POWER ASSIST household refuse or the public
STEERING (HPAS) sewage system. Use an authorized
waste disposal facility.
WARNING
Do not allow the fluid to touch your Note: Only add fuel that meets the Ford
skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the specification. See Fuel Quality (page 118).
affected areas immediately with Note: The in-tank pump will turn off
plenty of water and contact your doctor. automatically after approximately 40
seconds.
CAUTION
Make sure that the level is between
the MIN and the MAX marks.
237

Maintenance
CHARGING THE 12V BATTERY

A Battery Management System
The battery management system monitors
battery conditions and takes actions to
extend battery life. If excessive battery
drain is detected, the system may
temporarily disable certain electrical
features to protect the battery. Those
electrical accessories affected include the
rear defrost, heated/cooled seats, climate
E208053
control fan, heated steering wheel, audio
and navigation system. A message may be
A Front of Vehicle. shown in the information displays to alert
the driver that battery protection actions
For item location: See Under Hood are active. These messages are only for
Overview (page 233). notification that an action is taking place,
1. Switch the ignition off. and not intended to indicate an electrical
problem or that the battery requires
2. Attach a tube to the drain plug and replacement.
place the end of the tube into a
suitable container. Electrical accessory installation
3. Loosen the drain plug approximately To ensure proper operation of the Battery
1.5 turns. Management System, any electrical
4. Switch the ignition on to activate the devices that are added to your vehicle
in-tank pump. should not have their ground connection
5. Allow the water to drain. made directly at the negative battery post.
6. Switch the ignition off. A connection at the negative battery
terminal can cause inaccurate
7. Tighten the drain plug until you feel a measurements of the battery condition
strong resistance. and potential incorrect system operation.
8. Remove the tube from the drain plug. When a battery replacement is required,
9. Start the engine. you must use a recommended
10. Check for leaks. replacement battery that matches the
electrical requirements of the vehicle.
Note: The water-in-fuel indicator lamp will
go out after approximately 2 seconds, with After battery replacement, or in some
the engine running. cases after charging the battery with the
external charger, the Battery Management
System requires eight hours of vehicle
sleep time (key off with doors closed) to
relearn the new battery state of charge.
Prior to relearning the state of charge, the
Battery Management System may disable
electrical features (to protect the battery)
earlier than normal.
238

Maintenance
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY CHECKING THE WIPER

BLADES
WARNING
For vehicles with start-stop the
battery requirement is different. You
must replace the battery with one of
exactly the same specification.
Main Battery
Note: Where applicable you must
reprogram the audio system using the
keycode.
The battery is located in the engine
compartment. See Maintenance (page E222238
229).
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
Auxiliary Battery the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
WARNING
alcohol or windscreen washer concentrate.
Never jump start the vehicle at the
auxiliary battery.
CHANGING THE WIPER
The auxiliary battery is located in the
BLADES
loadspace. The auxiliary battery powers
the auxiliary loads connected to the vehicle
Changing the Windshield Wiper
regardless of the engine status. The vehicle Blades
charging system charges it when the Note: The windshield wiper blades are
engine is running. When the engine is not different in length.
running, it is isolated from the vehicle
power supply to prevent drain from the Note: If you install wiper blades of the
main battery. wrong length, the wiper blades can clash
damaging the wiper system.
Note: The auxiliary battery does not provide
cranking power to the engine.
E170913
239

Maintenance
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away Examples of acceptable condensation are:
from the glass. • Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip
marks or droplets).
2 • Fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable moisture
(usually caused by a lamp water leak) are:
• Water puddle inside the lamp.
1 • Large water droplets, drip marks or
E72899 streaks present on the interior of the
lens.
2. Press and hold the locking button.
Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if
3. Remove the wiper blade. any of the above conditions of
4. Install in the reverse order. unacceptable moisture are present.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks Replacing the Headlamp Bulbs
into place.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
REMOVING A HEADLAMP
Contact an authorized dealer. A B C
CHANGING A BULB
Lamp Assembly Condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to
accommodate normal changes in pressure.
Condensation can be a natural occurrence
of this design.
When moist air enters the lamp assembly
through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur in cold
temperatures.
D
When normal condensation occurs, a thin
E205822
film of mist can form on the interior of the
lens. Headlamp assembly:
The mist eventually clears and exits A. Front parking lamp bulb.
through the vents during normal operation. B. High beam headlamp bulb/ Daytime
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours running lamp bulb.
under dry weather conditions. C. Low beam headlamp bulb.
D. Direction indicator lamp bulb.
240

Maintenance
2
Replacing the High Beam Headlamp - Reflector type headlamp assembly.
Bulb
Replacing the Front Parking Bulb
1. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
3. Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing the Direction Indicator Lamp

E205833
3 1 Bulb
1. Carefully remove the cover. 1. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise

and remove it.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Press the bulb in and turn the bulb
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and counterclockwise to remove it.
remove it.
Side Repeater
Replacing the Low Beam Headlamp
Bulb
3 1 E133682
E205825 1. Slide the lens to the rear and remove

it.
1. Carefully remove the cover.
3. Remove the bulb from the headlamp
assembly by turning it
counterclockwise and pull it straight
1
out.
4. Release the retainer spring and remove
the bulb from the headlamp assembly
2
by pulling it straight out.
1
- Projector type headlamp assembly.
241

Maintenance
Approach Lamp and Side Direction

Indicator
A
B
E133683
A Side direction indicator.

B Approach lamp.
Note: These lamps are not serviceable, see
an authorized dealer if it they fail.
E205849
Front Fog Lamps
and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
Rear Lamps
Type 1
Tail, Brake, Reversing, Fog Lamp and
Direction Indicator
3
E205847
2
1. Remove the screws.
2. To access the bulb, reach behind the
bumper.
E133757
242

Maintenance
Type 2
Tail, Brake, Reversing Lamp and
4 Direction Indicator
5 A
A B C
1
E133685
C
A Rear direction indicator.
D B Stop and rear lamp.
C Reversing lamp.
E133684
A Stop and rear lamp. 2. Remove the lamp lens.
B Rear direction indicator. 3. Remove the bulb.
C Reversing lamp. License Plate Lamp
D Rear fog lamp.
Type 1
1. Pull up on the manual tailgate handle
to release the tailgate.
3. Use a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, to carefully remove the 2
lamp.
and remove it. 3
5. Remove the bulb.
E133686
243

Maintenance
1. Use a suitable tool, for example a 1. Remove the lamp lens.

screwdriver, to carefully remove the 2. Remove the screws.
lamp.
3. Carefully prise out the lamp.
2. Rotate the housing counterclockwise
to the unlock position.
3. Remove the bulb.
Type 2
3 2 1
4 5 6
E133755
E133687 4. Disconnect the electrical connector.

5. Turn the bulb holder 45°
counterclockwise and remove it.
2. Remove the lamp lens.
6. Remove the bulb.
3. Remove the bulb.
Type 2
Central High Mounted Brake Lamp
Type 1
3 2 1
E134135
1. Remove the lamp lens.

E133756
244

Maintenance
3. Carefully prise out the lamp. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector.

5. Remove the bulb holder by pulling it
straight out.
5
6. Remove the bulb.
6
E134136
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Bulb Specification Power ( Watts)

+
Headlamp low beam. H7 55
Headlamp low beam.
++ H11 55
*
Headlamp high beam. H15 55
Headlamp high beam.
** HB3 60
Daytime running lamps. H15 15

Front position lamp. W5W 5
Front fog lamp. H8 35
Front direction indicator. P21W 21
Side direction indicator. 1

-
Rear direction indicator. WY21W 21

Rear position lamp. W5W 5
Rear position/Stop lamp. W21/5W 21/5
Central high mounted brake W5W 5
lamp.
245

Maintenance
Bulb Specification Power ( Watts)
Reversing lamp. W21W 21

Rear fog lamp. W21W 21
License plate lamp. W5W 5
Roof bar lamp. W5W 5
Interior lamp. W5W 5
Reading lamp. W5W 5
+
Reflector type.
++
Projector type.
*
With Daytime running lamps.
**
Without Daytime running lamps.
1
Bulb replacement is not possible as the bulb is an integral part of the unit. The side
direction indicator lamp unit has to be replaced
246

Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR Cleaning the Headlamps
We recommend that you wash your vehicle WARNINGS

regularly with a sponge and lukewarm Do not scrape the headlamp lenses
water containing a neutral pH car or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents
shampoo. or chemical solvents to clean them.
Never use strong household detergents or Do not wipe the headlamps when
soap, such as dish washing or laundry they are dry.
liquid. These products can discolor and
can cause spotting on painted surfaces.
Cleaning the Chrome Trim
Never wash your vehicle when it is hot to
the touch or during exposure to strong, Do not use abrasives or chemical solvents.
direct sunlight. Use soapy water.
Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft Do not apply cleaning product to hot
terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water surfaces.
spotting. Do not leave cleaning product on chrome
Immediately remove items such as surfaces longer than recommended.
gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings and Industrial-strength (heavy-duty) cleaners,
insect deposits as they can cause damage or cleaning chemicals, may cause damage
to your vehicle’s paintwork and trim over over a period of time.
time.
Suntan lotions and insect repellents can Underbody
damage any painted surface. If these Flush the complete underside of your
substances come in to contact with your vehicle frequently. Keep body and door
vehicle, wash them off as soon as possible. drain holes free from packed dirt.
Using a Car Wash Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts
WARNINGS Use only approved products to clean
If you use a car wash with a waxing plastic parts.
cycle, make sure that you remove the
wax from the windshield.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
Switch the heater blower off to
prevent contamination of the fresh Note: Do not allow air fresheners and hand
air filter. sanitizers to spill on interior surfaces. If a
spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Damage
Prior to using a car wash facility check the may not be covered by your warranty.
suitability of it for your vehicle.
Seatbelts
Some car wash installations use water at
high pressure. This could damage certain Note: Do not use abrasives, or chemical
parts of your vehicle. solvents to clean them.
Remove any exterior accessories, including Note: Do not allow moisture to penetrate
the antenna, before using an automatic the seatbelt retractor mechanism.
car wash.
247

Vehicle Care
Note: Cleaning may safely be carried out Note: Industrial-strength (heavy-duty)

using mild soap and water . Let them dry cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, in
naturally, away from artificial heat. combination with brush agitation to remove
brake dust and dirt, could wear away the
Instrument Cluster Screens, LCD clear coat finish over a period of time.
Screens and Radio Screens
Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based
Note: Do not use abrasives, alcoholic or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel
solvents or chemical solvents to clean the wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
instrument cluster screens, LCD screens or Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for
radio screens. These cleaning products can an extended period after cleaning the
damage the screens. wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your
Clean the instrument panel and cluster vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.
lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth, This will reduce the risk of increased
then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry corrosion of the brake discs, brake pads and
these areas. linings.
Note: Some automatic car washes may
Rear Windows cause damage to the finish on your wheel
Note: Do not use any abrasive materials to rims and covers.
clean the interior of the rear windows. Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated
Note: Do not install stickers or labels to the with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain
interior of the rear windows. their condition we recommend that you:
• Clean them weekly with the
recommended wheel and tire cleaner.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
• Use a sponge to remove heavy
DAMAGE deposits of dirt and brake dust
accumulation.
You should repair paintwork damage
caused by stones from the road or minor • Rinse them thoroughly with a
scratches as soon as possible. A choice of pressurized stream of water when you
products are available from an authorized have completed the cleaning process.
dealer. We recommend that you use Ford service
Remove particles such as bird droppings, wheel cleaner. Make sure that you read
tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road and follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
salt and industrial fallout before repairing Using other non-recommended cleaning
paint chips. products can result in severe and
Always read and follow the manufacturer’s permanent cosmetic damage.
instructions before using the products.
CLEANING THE ALLOY

WHEELS
Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
248

Wheels and Tires
GENERAL INFORMATION You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire

pressure gauge, as automatic service
A decal with tire pressure data is located station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford
in the driver’s door opening or on the B recommends the use of a digital or
pillar. dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a
stick-type tire pressure gauge.
Check and set the tire pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are Use the recommended cold inflation
intending to drive your vehicle and when pressure for optimum tire performance and
the tires are cold. wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may
cause uneven treadwear patterns.
Note: Check your tire pressures regularly to
optimize fuel economy. WARNING
Note: Use only approved wheel and tire Under-inflation is the most common
sizes. Using other sizes could damage your cause of tire failures and may result
vehicle and will make the National Type in severe tire cracking, tread
Approval invalid. separation or blowout, with unexpected
loss of vehicle control and increased risk
Note: If you change the diameter of the tires of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall
from that fitted at the factory, the flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in
speedometer may not display the correct heat buildup and internal damage to the
speed. Take your vehicle to an authorized tire. It also may result in unnecessary tire
dealer to have the engine management stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle
system reprogrammed. control and accidents. A tire can lose up
to half of its air pressure and not appear
TIRE CARE to be flat!
Tire Care Always inflate your tires to the Ford

recommended inflation pressure even if it
Inflating Your Tires is less than the maximum inflation
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that pressure information found on the tire. The
your tires are properly inflated. Remember Ford recommended tire inflation pressure
that a tire can lose up to half of its air is found on the Tire Label located on door
pressure without appearing flat. opening or on the B-pillar. Failure to follow
the tire pressure recommendations can
Every day before you drive, check your tires. cause uneven treadwear patterns and
If one looks lower than the others, use a adversely affect the way your vehicle
tire gauge to check the pressure of all tires handles.
and adjust if required.
At least once a month and before long
trips, inspect each tire and check the tire
pressure with a tire gauge (including spare,
if equipped). Inflate all tires to the inflation
pressure recommended by the Ford Motor
Company.
249

Wheels and Tires
Note: Do not reduce tire pressure to change Note: If you are checking tire pressure when
the ride characteristics of the vehicle. If you the tire is hot, (for example, driven more
do not maintain the inflation pressure at the than 1.6 km, never bleed or reduce air
levels specified by Ford, your vehicle may pressure. The tires are hot from driving and
experience a condition known as shimmy. it is normal for pressures to increase above
Shimmy is a severe vibration and oscillation recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at
in the steering wheel after the vehicle travels or below recommended cold inflation
over a bump or dip in the road that does not pressure could be significantly
dampen out by itself. Shimmy may result under-inflated.
from significant under-inflation of the tires, Note: If you have to drive a distance to get
improper tires (load range, size, or type), or air for your tire(s), check and record the tire
vehicle modifications such as lift-kits. In the pressure first and add the appropriate air
event that your vehicle experiences shimmy, pressure when you get to the pump. It is
you should slowly reduce speed by either normal for tires to heat up and the air
lifting off the accelerator pedal or lightly pressure inside to go up as you drive.
applying the brakes. The shimmy will cease
as the vehicle speed decreases. 2. Remove the cap from the valve on one
tire, then firmly press the tire gauge onto
Maximum Inflation Pressure is the tire the valve and measure the pressure.
manufacturer's maximum permissible
pressure and the pressure at which the 3. Add enough air to reach the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. recommended air pressure.
This pressure is normally higher than the Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by
manufacturer’s recommended cold pressing on the metal stem in the center of
inflation pressure which can be found next the valve. Then recheck the pressure with
to the driver's seat on the Tire Label your tire gauge.
located on the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver's door. The cold inflation pressure 4. Replace the valve cap.
should never be set lower than the 5. Repeat this procedure for each tire,
recommended pressure on the Safety including the spare.
Compliance Certification Label or Tire
Label. Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher
inflation pressure than the other tires. For
When weather temperature changes full-size and dissimilar spare tires, see the
occur, tire inflation pressures also change. Dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
A 6°C temperature drop can cause a information for a description. Store and
corresponding drop of 7 kPa in inflation maintain at the higher of the front and rear
pressure. Check your tire pressures inflation pressure as shown on the Tire
frequently and adjust them to the proper Label.
pressure which can be found on the Tire
Label. 6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure
there are no nails or other objects
To check the pressure in your tire(s): embedded that could poke a hole in the
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning tire and cause an air leak.
they are not hot from driving even a mile. 7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there
are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
250

Wheels and Tires
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve Damage

Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads and
Periodically inspect the tire treads for sidewalls for damage (such as bulges in
uneven or excessive wear and remove the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread
objects such as stones, nails or glass that groove and separation in the tread or
may be wedged in the tread grooves. sidewall). If damage is observed or
Check the tire and valve stems for holes, suspected have the tire inspected by a tire
cracks, or cuts that may permit air leakage professional. Tires can be damaged during
and repair or replace the tire and replace off-road use, so inspection after off-road
the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls use is also recommended.
for cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs
of damage or excessive wear. If internal Age
damage to the tire is suspected, have the
tire demounted and inspected in case it WARNING
needs to be repaired or replaced. For your Tires degrade over time depending
safety, tires that are damaged or show on many factors such as weather,
signs of excessive wear should not be used storage conditions, and conditions
because they are more likely to blow out of use (load, speed, inflation pressure) the
or fail. tires experience throughout their lives.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
In general, tires should be replaced after
maintenance can cause tires to wear
six years regardless of tread wear.
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including
However, heat caused by hot climates or
the spare, frequently, and replace them if
frequent high loading conditions can
one or more of the following conditions
accelerate the aging process and may
exist:
require tires to be replaced more
Tire Wear frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when

you replace the road tires or after six years
due to aging even if it has not been used.
Tire Replacement Requirements

Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires and
E142546 wheels that are the same size, load
Tire wear indicators are moulded in to the index, speed rating and type (such
bottom of the tread grooves to aid in as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season
determining when to replace the tire. Tires versus all-terrain) as those originally
should be replaced before the tread wears provided by Ford. The recommended tire
down to the same height as the wear and wheel size may be found on the Tire
indicators. Label. Refer to See Technical
Specifications (page 264). If this
251

Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS Safety Practices

information is not found on these labels WARNINGS
then you should contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Use of any tire If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud,
or wheel not recommended by Ford can or sand, do not rapidly spin the tires;
affect the safety and performance of your spinning the tires can tear the tire
vehicle, which could result in an increased and cause an explosion. A tire can explode
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle in as little as three to five seconds.
rollover, personal injury and death. Do not spin the wheels at over
Additionally the use of non-recommended 56 km/h. The tires may fail and injure
tires and wheels could cause steering, a passenger or bystander.
suspension, axle, transfer case or power
transfer unit failure. If you have questions Driving habits have a great deal to do
regarding tire replacement, contact your with your tire mileage and safety.
To reduce the risk of serious injury, *Observe posted speed limits
when mounting replacement tires *Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
and wheels, you should not exceed
*Avoid potholes and objects on the road
the maximum pressure indicated on the
sidewall of the tire to set the beads without *Do not run over curbs or hit the tire
additional precautions listed below. If the against a curb when parking
beads do not seat at the maximum
pressure indicated, re-lubricate and try Highway Hazards
again. No matter how carefully you drive there’s
always the possibility that you may
Important: Remember to replace the eventually have a flat tire on the highway.
wheel valve stems when the road tires are Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of
replaced on your vehicle. traffic. This may further damage the flat
The two front tires or two rear tires should tire, but your safety is more important.
generally be replaced as a pair. If you feel a sudden vibration or ride
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the disturbance while driving, or you suspect
wheels are not designed to be used in your tire or vehicle has been damaged,
aftermarket wheels. immediately reduce your speed. Drive with
caution until you can safely pull off the
The use of wheels or tires not road. Stop and inspect the tires for
recommended by Ford Motor Company damage. If a tire is under-inflated or
may affect the operation of your tire damaged, deflate it, remove wheel and
pressure monitoring system. replace it with your spare tire and wheel.
If the tire pressure monitoring system If you cannot detect a cause, have the
indicator is flashing, the system is vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility
malfunctioning. Your replacement tire or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
might be incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or some
component of the system may be
damaged.
252

Wheels and Tires
Tire and Wheel Alignment Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with
a dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly.
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
can cause the front end of your vehicle to is defined as a spare wheel and tire
become misaligned or cause damage to assembly that is different in brand, size or
your tires. If your vehicle seems to pull to appearance from the road tires and wheels.
one side when you’re driving, the wheels If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
may be out of alignment. Have an assembly it is intended for temporary use
authorized dealer check the wheel only and should not be used in a tire
alignment periodically. rotation.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear Note: After having your tires rotated,
can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of inflation pressure must be checked and
your tires and should be corrected by an adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
authorized dealer. Front-wheel drive
vehicles and those with an independent Rotating your tires at the recommended
rear suspension may require alignment of interval of between 5,000 km to
all four wheels. 10,000 km will help your tires wear more
evenly, providing better tire performance
The tires should also be balanced and longer tire life.
periodically. An unbalanced tire and wheel
assembly may result in irregular tire wear. Rear-wheel drive vehicles and four-wheel
drive vehicles (front tires at left of
Tire Rotation diagram)
WARNING
If the tire label shows different tire
pressures for the front and rear tires
and the vehicle is equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring system, then the
settings for the system sensors need to be
updated. Always perform the system reset
procedure after tire rotation. If the system
is not reset, it may not provide a low tire
pressure warning when necessary. See the
tire pressure monitoring system reset
procedure in this chapter. E142548
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be

Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask corrected by rotating the tires.
an authorized dealer to check for and correct
any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or WARNING
mechanical problem involved before tire Do not scrub the sidewalls of the
rotation. tires when you are parking.
If you have to mount a curb, do so slowly

and approach it with the wheels at
right-angles to the curb.
253

Wheels and Tires
Examine the tires regularly for cuts, foreign TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
objects and uneven wear of the tread.
Uneven wear could mean that the wheel SYSTEM
alignment is outside specification.
WARNING
Check the tire pressures (including the
spare) when cold, every two weeks. The tire pressure monitoring system
is not a substitute for manually
checking tire pressures. You should
USING SNOW CHAINS periodically check tire pressures using a
pressure gauge. Failure to correctly
WARNINGS maintain tire pressures could increase the
Do not exceed 50 km/h. risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle
rollover and personal injury.
Do not use snow chains on snow-free

roads.
Only fit snow chains to specified
tires. See Technical Specifications You must check the tire pressures
(page 264). (including the spare tire where applicable)
every two weeks when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has wheel trims,
remove them before fitting snow You must inflate the tires to the correct
chains. pressure.
See Wheels and Tires (page 249). The tire
Only use snow chains of 10 mm or smaller. pressures are also on the tire inflation
pressure label (located on the edge of
Only use snow chains on the rear axle.
driver door or the B-Pillar).
Note: The anti-lock brake system will
As a driver assistance feature, your vehicle
continue to operate normally.
has a tire pressure monitoring system. A
Vehicles with Stability Control warning lamp will illuminate when one or
more of the tires are significantly
When stability control is on, your vehicle under-inflated. If the low tire pressure
may exhibit some unusual driving warning lamp illuminates, you should stop
characteristics. To reduce this, switch your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so,
traction control off. See Using Traction check the tires and inflate them to the
Control (page 135). correct pressure.
Driving on under-inflated tires can:
• Cause them to overheat.
• Lead to tire failure.
• Reduce fuel efficiency.
• Reduce tire life.
• Affect vehicle handling or stopping
ability.
254

Wheels and Tires
The system is not a substitute for correct If the vehicle is stationary overnight and
tire maintenance. the temperature is significantly lower than
the daytime temperature, tire pressures
You must maintain the correct tire
may decrease by up to 0.2 bar when there
pressures, even if low tire pressure has not
is a drop in the ambient temperature of
illuminated the warning lamp.
17°C or more. The system detects this
The tire pressure monitoring system has a pressure decrease as being significantly
system malfunction indicator to warn you below the correct inflation pressure and
when the system is not operating correctly. the warning lamp illuminates.
The malfunction indicator and low tire
pressure warning lamp have a combined Changing Tires With a Tire
function. When the system detects a Pressure Monitoring System
malfunction, the warning lamp will flash
for approximately one minute and then
remain illuminated. This sequence will
occur every time you switch the ignition on
while the malfunction remains. The system
has detected a fault that requires service.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressures. A
malfunction may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of a
replacement tire or wheel that prevents
the system from functioning correctly. E142549
Always check the tire pressure monitoring

You should always have tires serviced by
system malfunction warning after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on
your vehicle. Make sure the replacement Note: Each road wheel and tire is fitted with
tires or wheels allow the system to a tire pressure sensor located inside the
continue to function correctly. See When wheel and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
the Temporary Spare Tire is Installed sensor attaches to the valve stem. The tire
in this section. covers the pressure sensor and it is not
visible unless the tire is removed. Take care
How Temperature Affects the Tire when changing the tire to avoid damaging
Pressures the sensor.
Under normal driving conditions tire Understanding the Tire Pressure
pressures may increase by up to 0.3 bar Monitoring System
from a cold start situation.
You must maintain the correct tire
pressures, even if low tire pressure has not
illuminated the warning lamp.
The system measures the pressure in the
road tires and displays a warning lamp in
the instrument cluster when a low pressure
is detected. See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 61).
255

Wheels and Tires
The system detects this lower pressure as When You Believe the System is Not
being significantly below the correct Operating Correctly
inflation pressure and the warning lamp
illuminates. The main function of the system is to warn
you when the tire pressures are low. It can
When the Temporary Spare Tire is also warn you in the event the system is
Installed no longer capable of operating correctly.
See the following chart for information
If you need to replace a road wheel and concerning the system:
tire with the temporary spare wheel, the
system will continue to identify a defect. When Inflating the Tires
This is to remind you to repair the damaged
road wheel and tire and refit the repaired When inflating the tires the system may
road wheel and tire assembly to your not respond immediately to the air added
vehicle. To restore the correct operation to the tires.
of the system, you must have the repaired
road wheel and tire assembly refitted to
your vehicle.
256

Wheels and Tires
System Warning Lamps
Warning lamp Description Action
Solid warning lamp Tire(s) under-inflated 1. Make sure tires are at the correct
pressure. See Wheels and Tires
(page 249). The tire pressures are also
on the tire inflation pressure label
(located on the edge of driver door
or the B-Pillar).
2. After inflating the tires to the correct
pressure you must carry out the tire
pressure monitoring system reset
procedure. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Reset
Procedure in this chapter.
Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
and refit the repaired road wheel and tire
assembly to your vehicle to restore the
correct operation of the system.
Tire pressure monitoring If the tires are correctly inflated and the
system malfunction spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, the system has detected a
fault that requires service.
Solid warning lamp Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
initially followed by and refit the repaired road wheel and tire
a flashing warning assembly to your vehicle to restore the
lamp correct operation of the system.
Tire pressure monitoring If the tires are correctly inflated and the
system malfunction spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, the system has detected a
fault that requires service.
If the Warning Lamp is On: Tire Pressure Monitoring System

Reset Procedure
1. Check each tire to verify that none are
flat. Overview
2. If one or more tires are flat, repair as You must carry out the system reset
necessary. procedure after each tire replacement or
3. Check the tire pressures and inflate all adjustment of the tire pressures.
the tires to the correct pressure.
4. Carry out the tire pressure monitoring
system reset procedure.
257

Wheels and Tires
To maintain your vehicle load carrying The tires need to be periodically rotated
capability, your vehicle requires different to provide consistent performance and
tire pressures in the front tires compared maximum tire life, the system needs to
to the rear tires. know when the tires have been rotated to
The system illuminates the warning lamp determine which set of tires are on the
at different pressures for the front and rear front and rear axles. With this information,
tires. the system can detect and correctly warn
of low tire pressures.
Carrying Out the System Reset

Procedure
1. Check the tire pressures and inflate all
the tires to the correct pressure.
2. See Information Displays (page 67).
To reset the tire pressure monitoring system, scroll to:

Message Description and Action

Driver assist Press the OK button.
Tire Monitor Press and hold the OK button until confirmation appears.
Alternatively, if your vehicle has a tire pressure monitoring
system reset button, press and hold the button until
confirmation appears.
Type Approvals Vehicles with a Spare Wheel

Refer to See Type Approvals (page 422). If the spare wheel is the same type and
for Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor Radio size as your vehicle road wheel, you can fit
Frequency Compliance details. the spare wheel and continue to drive in
the normal manner.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL WARNING

Only fit snow chains to specified
Locking Wheel Nuts tires. See Technical Specifications
(page 264).
You can obtain a replacement locking
wheel nut key and replacement locking
wheel nuts from your dealer using the Note: Your vehicle may exhibit some
reference number certificate. unusual driving characteristics.
258

Wheels and Tires
Vehicle Jack Single Cab
WARNINGS
Ensure screwthread is adequately
lubricated before use.
The jack should be used on level firm
ground wherever possible.
Switch the ignition off and apply park
brake fully before lifting vehicle.
It is recommended that the wheels
of the vehicle be chocked, and that
no person should remain in a vehicle
that is being jacked.
No person should place any portion
of their body under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
WARNING: Do not get under a
vehicle that is supported by a jack. E133591
1. Fold the left-hand side seat back

forward.
2. Remove the locking strap and remove
the tools.
E166722
WARNING
WARNING: The jack supplied with
this vehicle is only intended for
changing wheels. Do not use the
vehicle jack other than when you are
changing a wheel in an emergency.
The jack, wheel brace, and jack handle are

located in the cab.
E135841
259

Wheels and Tires
1. Fold the right-hand side seat back

forward.
2. Loosen the jack, remove the bolt and
remove the jack.
Super Cab
4
E133592
E134701
1. Pull the release strap. 4. Remove the bolt.

2. Remove the rear seats. 5. Remove the jack.
6. Remove the tools.
Double Cab
E131838
3. Remove the cover.

E133593
1. Lift the release strap.
260

Wheels and Tires
2. Lower the seat back. 2. Fully insert the jack handle into the
3. Remove the locking strap. guide hole. Turn counter-clockwise
until the wheel rests on the ground, and
4. Remove the bolt. there is slack in the cable.
5. Remove the jack.
Spare Wheel
Note: The spare wheel is located
underneath the rear of the vehicle.
2
1
3
E133590
E79153 3. Pass the bracket and cable through the

wheel opening.
1. Assemble the handle.
Jacking and Lifting Points
WARNING
Use only the specified jacking points.
If you use other positions, you may
damage the body, steering,
suspension, engine, braking system or the
fuel lines.
E133589
261

Wheels and Tires
E133594
A. Emergency use only. Removing a Road Wheel

B. Maintenance
WARNINGS
Park your vehicle in such a position
that neither the traffic nor you are
hindered or endangered.
Make sure that the wheels are
pointing straight ahead.
If your vehicle has a manual
transmission, move the selector lever
to first or reverse gear. If it has an
automatic transmission, move the selector
lever to position (P).
Secure the diagonally opposite
wheel with an appropriate block or
wheel chock.
E134692
Make sure that the jack is vertical to
the jacking point and the base is flat
on the ground.
Never place anything between the
vehicle jack and your vehicle.
262

Wheels and Tires
Note: Do not lay alloy road wheels face Installing a Road Wheel
down on the ground.
WARNINGS
2 Use only approved wheel and tire
1 sizes. Using other sizes could
damage the vehicle and will void the
warranty. See Technical Specifications
(page 264).
Do not fit run flat tires on vehicles
that were not originally fitted with
3 them. Please contact your dealer for
more details regarding compatibility.
E79153
Make sure that there is no lubrication
(grease or oil) on the threads or the
1. Assemble the jack handle. interface between wheel studs and
Note: Assemble the three handles to jack nuts.
the rear of the vehicle. Have the tightening torque of the
2. Ensure screw thread on the jack is wheel nuts and the tire pressure
adequately lubricated before use. checked as soon as possible.
3. Loosen the wheel nuts. Do not install alloy wheels using
wheel nuts designed for use with
4. Raise your vehicle until the tire is clear steel wheels.
of the ground.
Note: The wheel nuts of alloy wheels and
spoked steel wheels can also be used for
the steel spare wheel for a short time
(maximum two weeks).
Note: Make sure the wheel and hub contact
surfaces are free from foreign matter.
Note: Make sure that the cones on the
wheel nuts are against the wheel.
1. Install the wheel.
2. Install the wheel nuts finger tight.
3. Install the locking wheel nut key.
E134693
5. Remove the wheel nuts and the road

wheel.
263

Wheels and Tires
WARNING
Have the wheel nuts checked for
tightness and the tire pressure
checked as soon as possible.
Note: If the spare wheel is different in size

or construction to the road wheels, have this
replaced as soon as possible.
Stowing the Flat Tire

WARNING
E79156 Do not raise the spare wheel carrier
without the wheel attached. Damage
4. Partially tighten the wheel nuts in the
can occur to the winch mechanism
sequence shown.
if raised without a wheel attached.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.
6. Fully tighten the wheel nuts in the 1. Place the wheel flat on the ground,
sequence shown. See Technical with the outside of the wheel facing up.
Specifications (page 264).
2. Tilt the bracket, and pass it through the
7. Make sure that the projection of the centre of the wheel.
cap is positioned on the same position
3. Fully insert the jack handle into the
as the projection of the hub.
guide hole and turn clockwise.
4. Stow the wheel brace, jack, and jack
handle away.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Nut Torque
Vehicle Type Torque
All 135 Nm
264

Wheels and Tires
Tire Pressures (Cold Tires)

Variant Tyre Size Normal Load ECO** Full Load
Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear
4X2 215/70 241 kPa/ 241 kPa/ 262 kPa / 262 kPa / 262 kPa / 372 kPa /
R16* 35 psi 35 psi 38 psi 38 psi 38 psi 54 psi
All 255/70 241 kPa/ 241 kPa/ 262 kPa / 262 kPa / 262 kPa / 303 kPa /
*Only fit snow chains to specified tires.

** ECO tire inflation pressures are recommended for optimal fuel consumption.
265

Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE DIMENSIONS
Single cab
A
E
D
A
E207864
Item Dimension Description Dimension in mm

(inches)
A Maximum length 5362 (211.1)

A Maximum length - with bull bars 5434 (214.0)
B Overall width - excluding exterior mirrors 1860 (73.2)
C Overall height (4x2) 1703 (67.0)
266


(inches)
*
C Overall height (4x2 or 4x4) 1800-1806 (70.9-71.1)
D Wheelbase 3220 (126.8)
E Track - front and rear (4x2) 1590 (62.6)
*
E Track - front and rear (4x2 or 4x4) 1560 (61.4)
*
Vehicles with increased ride height
Stretch cab
A
E
D
A
E207866
267


(inches)

* 1

*
1
Depending on tyre size
*
268

Double cab
A
E
D
A
E207865

(inches)

A Maximum length - with bull bars 5434 (214.0)
* 1
269


(inches)

*
1
Depending on tyre size
*
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is on the
left-hand side of the instrument panel.
A
E133363
The vehicle identification number is also

stamped beneath the front door on the
chassis, on the right-hand side.
270

Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception Factors
Radio reception factors
Distance and Strength The further you travel away from an FM station, the weaker
the signal and the weaker the reception.
Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Station overload When you pass near a radio transmission tower, a stronger
signal can override a weaker signal and can cause interfer-
ence in the audio system.
CD and CD Player Information MP3 and WMA Track and Folder

Structure
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.75-inch (12 centimeter) audio compact Audio systems capable of recognizing and
discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks
certain recordable and re-recordable and folder structures work as follows:
compact discs may not function correctly • There are two different modes for MP3
when used in Ford CD players. and WMA disc playback: MP3 and
WMA track mode (system default) and
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade MP3 and WMA folder mode.
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to • MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any
become jammed. You should use a folder structure on the MP3 and WMA
permanent felt tip marker rather than disc. The player numbers each MP3
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs. and WMA track on the disc (noted by
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please the MP3 or WMA file extension) from
contact an authorized dealer for further T001 to a maximum of T255. The
information. maximum number of playable MP3 and
WMA files may be less depending on
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped the structure of the CD and exact
discs or discs with a scratch protection film model of radio present.
attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD
cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the
disc toward the edge. Do not clean in a
circular motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or
heat sources for extended periods.
271

Audio System
• MP3 and WMA folder mode represents In track mode, the system displays and
a folder structure consisting of one plays the structure as if it were only one
level of folders. The CD player numbers level deep (all MP3 and WMA files play,
all MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc regardless of being in a specific folder). In
(noted by the MP3 or WMA file folder mode, the system only plays the
extension) and all folders containing MP3 and WMA files in the current folder.
MP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder)
T001 (track) to F253 T255.
AUDIO UNIT
• Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through
WARNING
the disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA
discs, it is important to understand how
the system reads the structures you create.
While various files may be present, (files
with extensions other than MP3 and
WMA), only files with the MP3 and WMA
extension are played; other files are
ignored by the system. This enables you to
use the same MP3 and WMA disc for a
variety of tasks on your work computer,
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
home computer and your in-vehicle
system.
272

Audio System
A B C D E F G
U H
1 2 3
T
4 5
S I
7 8 9
R
0
+
Q P O N M L K
E135351
A Function button 1: Press the button to select different functions of the audio
system depending on which mode (i.e. radio or CD) you are in.
B Function button 2: Press the button to select different functions of the audio
C Seek down: Press the button to go to the next station down the radio frequency
band or the previous track on a CD.
D On, Off and Volume: Press the button to switch the audio system on or off.
Turn the dial to adjust the volume.
E Seek up: Press the button to go to the next station up the radio frequency band
or the next track on a CD.
F Function button 3: Press the button to select different functions of the audio
G Function button 4: Press the button to select different functions of the audio
273

Audio System
H OK: Press the button to confirm on-screen selections.

I Numeric keypad: Press the button to recall a previously stored station. To
store a favorite station press and hold until the sound returns. In CD mode, press
a number to select a track. In phone mode, use the buttons to dial a phone
number.
J Cursor arrows: Press a button to scroll through on-screen choices.
K TA: Press the button to turn traffic announcements on or off and cancels
announcements during an active announcement.
L INFO: Press the button to access radio, CD, USB and IPod information.
M Door lock button.
N Hazard warning flasher switch.
O Door lock indicator.
P SOUND: Press the button to adjust the sound settings for bass, treble, middle,
balance and fade.
Q MENU: Press the button to access different audio system features.
R PHONE: Press the button to access the phone feature of the SYNC system.
S AUX: Press the button to access the AUX and SYNC features, it will also cancel
the menu or list browsing.
T RADIO: Press the button to select different radio bands, it will also cancel the
menu or list browsing.
U Eject: Press the button to eject a CD.
V CD: Press the button to change source to CD, it will also cancel the menu or
list browsing.
Note: An integrated multi-function display,

located above the audio system shows
important information about your audio
system controls.
274

Audio System
3. Use the left and right arrow buttons to

make the necessary adjustment. The
display indicates the level selected.
4. Press the OK button to confirm the
new settings.
Waveband Button
Press the RADIO button to select from the
wavebands available.
You can use the selector to return to radio
reception when you have been listening to
another source.
Alternatively, press the left arrow button
1 2 3 4 to display the available wavebands. Scroll
to the required waveband and press OK.
Station Tuning Control

E104157 A Seek Tuning
Select a waveband and briefly press one
A Descriptions for function buttons of the seek buttons. The unit will stop at
1-4 the first station it finds in the direction you
have chosen.
Function buttons 1 to 4 are context
dependent, and change according to the Manual Tuning
current unit mode. The description for the
function displays in the screen. 1. Press function button 2.
On, Off Control tune down or up the waveband in small
Press the On, Off control. This will also increments or press and hold to
operate the unit for up to one hour with the increment quickly, until you find a
ignition turned off. station you want to listen to.
The radio will switch off automatically 3. Press OK to continue listening to a
after one hour. station.
Scan Tuning
Sound Button
Scan allows you to listen to a few seconds
This will allow you to adjust the sound
of each station detected.
settings (for example bass, middle and
treble). 1. Press function button 3.
1. Press the SOUND button. 2. Use the seek buttons to scan up or
down the selected waveband.
2. Use the up and down arrow buttons to
select the required setting. 3. Press function button 3 again or OK
to continue listening to a station.
275

Audio System
Station Preset Buttons Turning Traffic Announcements On and

Off
This feature allows you to store your
favorite stations, they can be recalled by Before you can receive traffic
selecting the appropriate waveband and announcements, you must press either the
pressing one of the preset buttons. TA or TRAFFIC button. A TA display will
appear to show the feature is switched on.
1. Select a waveband.
If you are already tuned to a station that
2. Tune to the station required.
broadcasts traffic information, TP will also
3. Press and hold one of the preset be displayed. Otherwise the unit will search
buttons until you hear a beep. When for a traffic program.
the station has been stored, the preset
number along with the station name When traffic information is broadcast, it
or frequency is displayed for will automatically interrupt normal radio
confirmation. or CD playback and Traffic
announcement will appear in the display.
You can repeat this on each waveband and
for each preset button. If a non-traffic station is selected or
recalled using a preset button, the audio
Note: When you drive to another part of the unit will remain on that station unless TA
country, stations that broadcast on or TRAFFIC is turned off, then on again.
alternative frequencies and are stored on
preset buttons, may be updated with the Note: If TA is on and you select a preset or
correct frequency and station name for that manual tune to a non TA station no traffic
area. announcement will be heard.
Note: When you are listening to a non
Autostore Control traffic announcement station and turn
traffic announcement off and on again a TP
This will store up to a maximum of the six
seek will occur.
strongest signals available, either from the
AM or the FM waveband and overwrite the Traffic Announcement Volume
previously stored stations. You can also
store stations manually in the same way Traffic announcements interrupt normal
as other wavebands. broadcasts at a preset minimum level that
is usually louder than normal listening
1. Press and hold function button 1 or
volumes.
the RADIO button.
2. When the search is complete, sound is To adjust the preset volume:
restored and the strongest signals are • Use the volume control to make the
stored on the autostore presets. necessary adjustment during an
incoming traffic announcement
Traffic Information Control broadcast. The display will show the
level selected.
Many stations that broadcast on the FM
waveband have a TP code to signify that
they carry traffic program information.
276

Audio System
Ending Traffic Announcements 3. Scroll to the required DSP function.

The audio unit will return to normal 4. Use the up and down arrow buttons to
operation at the end of each traffic select the required setting.
announcement. To end the announcement 5. Press the OK button to confirm your
prematurely, press TA or TRAFFIC during selection.
the announcement. 6. Press the MENU button to return.
Note: If you press TA or TRAFFIC at any
other time it will switch all announcements News Broadcasts
off.
Your audio unit may interrupt normal
Automatic Volume Control reception to broadcast news bulletins from
stations on the FM waveband, radio data
When available, automatic volume control system (RDS) or other enhanced network
(AVC) adjusts the volume level to linked stations.
compensate for engine noise and road The display will indicate there is an
speed noise. incoming announcement, during news
1. Press the MENU button and select broadcasts. When the audio unit interrupts
AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS. for a news broadcast the preset volume
2. Select AVC LEVEL or ADAPTIVE level will be the same as traffic
VOL. announcements.
3. Use the left or right arrow button to 1. Press the MENU button.
adjust the setting. 2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS.
4. Press the OK button to confirm your 3. Scroll to NEWS and turn on or off with
selection. the OK button.
5. Press the MENU button to return. 4. Press the MENU button to return.
Digital Signal Processing (DSP) Alternative Frequencies
DSP Occupancy The majority of programs that broadcast
on the FM waveband have a program
This feature takes into account the identification code, it can be recognized by
differences in distance from the various audio units.
speakers in the vehicle to each seat. Select
the sitting position for which the audio is When your vehicle moves from one
to be correctly enhanced. transmission area to another with the
alternative frequencies tuning switched
DSP Equalizer on, this function will search for the
strongest station signal.
Select the music category that most suits
your listening preference. The audio output Under certain conditions, alternative
will change to enhance the particular style frequencies tuning may temporarily disrupt
of music chosen. normal reception.
Changing the DSP Settings

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS.
277

Audio System
When selected, the unit continually Regional mode ON: This prevents random
evaluates signal strength and, if a better alternative frequency switches when
signal becomes available, the unit will neighboring regional networks are not
switch to that alternative. It mutes while carrying the same programming.
it checks a list of alternative frequencies Regional mode OFF: This allows a larger
and if necessary, it will search once across coverage area if neighboring regional
the selected waveband for a genuine networks are carrying the same
alternative frequency. programming, but can cause random
It will restore radio reception when it finds alternative frequency switches if they are
one or if one is not found, the unit will not.
return to the original stored frequency. 1. Press the MENU button.
When selected, AF will be shown in the 2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS.
display.
3. Scroll to RDS REGIONAL and turn on
1. Press the MENU button. or off with the OK button.
2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS. 4. Press the MENU button to return.
3. Scroll to ALTERNAT FREQ. or
ALTERNATIVE FREQ. and turn on or
off with the OK button.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
4. Press the MENU button to return.
AM/FM/CD/SYNC/
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Regional Mode
WARNING
Regional mode controls the behavior of
alternative frequencies switching between Driving while distracted can result in
regionally related networks of a parent loss of vehicle control, crash and
broadcaster. A broadcaster may run a fairly injury. We strongly recommend that
large network across a large part of the you use extreme caution when using any
country. At various times of the day this device that may take your focus off the
large network may be broken down into a road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
number of smaller regional networks, operation of your vehicle. We recommend
typically centered on major towns or cities. against the use of any hand-held device
When the network is not split into regional while driving and encourage the use of
variants, the whole network carries the voice-operated systems when possible.
same programming. Make sure you are aware of all applicable
278

Audio System
A B C D E F G
X H
W
1 2 3
V
4 5 6 I
U 8 9
7
T J
0
+
K
L
E135352 S R Q P O N M
A Function button 1: Press the button to select different functions of the audio
B Function button 2: Press the button to select different functions of the audio
C Seek down: Press the button to go to the next station down the radio frequency
band or the previous track on a CD.
D On, Off and Volume: Press the button to switch the audio system on or off.
Turn the dial to adjust the volume.
E Seek up: Press the button to go to the next station up the radio frequency band
or the next track on a CD.
F Function button 3: Press the button to select different functions of the audio
G Function button 4: Press the button to select different functions of the audio
279

Audio System
H OK: Press the button to confirm on-screen selections.

I Numeric keypad: Press the button to recall a previously stored station. To
store a favorite station press and hold until the sound returns. In CD mode, press
a number to select a track. In phone mode, use the buttons to dial a phone
number. In Navigation mode, use the buttons to enter the destination.
J Clock: Press the button to set the clock.
K TA: Press the button to turn traffic announcements on or off and cancels
announcements during an active announcement.
L Cursor arrows: Press a button to scroll through on-screen choices.
M MAP: Press the button to view the map.
N INFO: Press the button to access radio, CD, USB and IPod information.
O Door lock indicator.
P Hazard warning flasher switch.
Q Door lock button.
R NAV: Press the button to navigate the route.
S MENU: Press the button to access different audio system features.
T PHONE: Press the button to access the phone feature of the SYNC system.
U AUX: Press the button to access the AUX and SYNC features, it will also cancel
the menu or list browsing.
V RADIO: Press the button to select different radio bands, it will also cancel the
menu or list browsing.
W Eject: Press the button to eject a CD.
X CD: Press the button to change source to CD, it will also cancel the menu or
list browsing.
Note: An integrated multi-function display,

located above the audio system shows
important information about your audio
system controls.
280

Audio System
Station Tuning Control

Seek Tuning
Select a waveband and briefly press one
of the seek buttons. The unit will stop at
the first station it finds in the direction you
have chosen.
Manual Tuning
1. Press function button 2.
tune down or up the waveband in small
increments or press and hold to
increment quickly, until you find a
1 2 3 4 station you want to listen to.
3. Press OK to continue listening to a
station.
E104157 A Scan Tuning

Scan allows you to listen to a few seconds
A Descriptions for function buttons of each station detected.
1-4
1. Press function button 3.
Function buttons 1 to 4 are context 2. Use the seek buttons to scan up or
dependent, and change according to the down the selected waveband.
current unit mode. The description for the
function displays in the screen. 3. Press function button 3 again or OK
to continue listening to a station.
On, Off Control
Station Preset Buttons
Press the On, Off control. This will also
operate the unit for up to one hour with the This feature allows you to store your
ignition turned off. favorite stations, they can be recalled by
selecting the appropriate waveband and
The radio will switch off automatically pressing one of the preset buttons.
after one hour.
1. Select a waveband.
Waveband Button 2. Tune to the station required.
Press the RADIO button to select from the 3. Press and hold one of the preset
wavebands available. buttons until you hear a beep. When
the station has been stored, the preset
You can use the selector to return to radio number along with the station name
reception when you have been listening to or frequency is displayed for
another source. confirmation.
Alternatively, press the left arrow button You can repeat this on each waveband and
to display the available wavebands. Scroll for each preset button.
to the required waveband and press OK.
281

Audio System
Note: When you drive to another part of the Note: If TA is on and you select a preset or
country, stations that broadcast on manual tune to a non TA station no traffic
alternative frequencies and are stored on announcement will be heard.
preset buttons, may be updated with the Note: When you are listening to a non
correct frequency and station name for that traffic announcement station and turn
area. traffic announcement off and on again a TP
Autostore Control seek will occur.
This will store up to a maximum of the six Traffic Announcement Volume

strongest signals available, either from the Traffic announcements interrupt normal
AM or the FM waveband and overwrite the broadcasts at a preset minimum level that
previously stored stations. You can also is usually louder than normal listening
store stations manually in the same way volumes.
as other wavebands.
To adjust the preset volume:
1. Press and hold function button 1 or
the RADIO button. • Use the volume control to make the
necessary adjustment during an
2. When the search is complete, sound is incoming traffic announcement
restored and the strongest signals are broadcast. The display will show the
stored on the autostore presets. level selected.
Traffic Information Control Ending Traffic Announcements
Many stations that broadcast on the FM The audio unit will return to normal
waveband have a TP code to signify that operation at the end of each traffic
they carry traffic program information. announcement. To end the announcement
prematurely, press TA or TRAFFIC during
Turning Traffic Announcements On and
the announcement.
Off
Note: If you press TA or TRAFFIC at any
Before you can receive traffic other time it will switch all announcements
announcements, you must press either the off.
TA or TRAFFIC button. A TA display will
appear to show the feature is switched on. Automatic Volume Control
If you are already tuned to a station that When available, automatic volume control
broadcasts traffic information, TP will also (AVC) adjusts the volume level to
be displayed. Otherwise the unit will search compensate for engine noise and road
for a traffic program. speed noise.
When traffic information is broadcast, it 1. Press the MENU button and select
will automatically interrupt normal radio AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS.
or CD playback and Traffic
announcement will appear in the display. 2. Select AVC LEVEL or ADAPTIVE
VOL.
If a non-traffic station is selected or
recalled using a preset button, the audio 3. Use the left or right arrow button to
unit will remain on that station unless TA adjust the setting.
or TRAFFIC is turned off, then on again. 4. Press the OK button to confirm your
selection.
282

Audio System
5. Press the MENU button to return. It will restore radio reception when it finds
one or if one is not found, the unit will
News Broadcasts return to the original stored frequency.
Your audio unit may interrupt normal When selected, AF will be shown in the
reception to broadcast news bulletins from display.
stations on the FM waveband, radio data 1. Press the MENU button.
system (RDS) or other enhanced network
linked stations. 2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS.
The display will indicate there is an 3. Scroll to ALTERNAT FREQ. or
incoming announcement, during news ALTERNATIVE FREQ. and turn on or
broadcasts. When the audio unit interrupts off with the OK button.
for a news broadcast the preset volume 4. Press the MENU button to return.
level will be the same as traffic
announcements. Regional Mode
1. Press the MENU button. Regional mode controls the behavior of
2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS. alternative frequencies switching between
regionally related networks of a parent
3. Scroll to NEWS and turn on or off with broadcaster. A broadcaster may run a fairly
the OK button. large network across a large part of the
4. Press the MENU button to return. country. At various times of the day this
large network may be broken down into a
Alternative Frequencies number of smaller regional networks,
typically centered on major towns or cities.
The majority of programs that broadcast When the network is not split into regional
on the FM waveband have a program variants, the whole network carries the
identification code, it can be recognized by same programming.
audio units.
Regional mode ON: This prevents random
When your vehicle moves from one alternative frequency switches when
transmission area to another with the neighboring regional networks are not
alternative frequencies tuning switched carrying the same programming.
on, this function will search for the
strongest station signal. Regional mode OFF: This allows a larger
coverage area if neighboring regional
Under certain conditions, alternative networks are carrying the same
frequencies tuning may temporarily disrupt programming, but can cause random
normal reception. alternative frequency switches if they are
When selected, the unit continually not.
evaluates signal strength and, if a better 1. Press the MENU button.
signal becomes available, the unit will
switch to that alternative. It mutes while 2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS.
it checks a list of alternative frequencies 3. Scroll to RDS REGIONAL and turn on
and if necessary, it will search once across or off with the OK button.
the selected waveband for a genuine
4. Press the MENU button to return.
alternative frequency.
283

Audio System
AUDIO UNIT CLOCK AND DATE Vehicles with

AM/FM/Cd/Bluetooth/NAV
DISPLAYS
Changing the Time 2. Use the up and down arrow button to
The clock can be set at any time when the select the clock settings.
system is in the one hour mode or the 3. Press OK button or right arrow button
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. to enter clock settings.
Note: Vehicles with AM/FM/CD: The time 4. Use the up and down arrow button to
can be adjusted using the hour and minute select the set time.
buttons on the screen. 5. Use the up and down arrow button to
To advance the hours, press the HOUR adjust hours.
SET button. To advance the minutes, press 6. Use the right and left arrow button to
the MINUTE SET button while the time is scroll to the minutes.
flashing.
7. Use the up and down arrow button to
Note: Vehicles with Bluetooth/NAV: The adjust minutes.
time can be adjusted using the clock button 8. Use the OK button to save the settings.
on the audio control panel.
Note: The time can be adjusted using the Exact Hour Adjustment
cursor arrow buttons on the audio control
panel. You can set the time to the beginning of
an hour using this feature.
Vehicles with AM/FM/CD • Press the CLOCK button for about two
seconds until a beep is heard. The
clock's current time will flash.
2. Rotate the Volume button to select
• Press the CLOCK button again and the
the date/time.
time will be adjusted as follows:
3. Short press the OK button to enter
date/time. Example
4. Rotate the Volume button to select • Current set time between 12:01 and
the hour set and enter. 12:29 will change to 12:00 exactly.
5. Rotate the Volume button to adjust • Current set time between 12:30 and
the hours. 12:59 will change to 1:00 exactly.
6. Use BACK button to return to previous Note: If the power supply to the unit is
menu. interrupted (if the fuse blows or the vehicle's
battery is disconnected), the clock will need
7. Rotate the Volume button to select to be reset.
minute set and enter.
8. Rotate the Volume button to adjust
minutes.
9. Use the OK button to save the settings.
284

Audio System
COMPACT DISC PLAYER Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, you can

have the system shuffle tracks for the whole
Compact Disc Playback CD, or within the current folder.
Note: During playback, the display indicates Type 2

the disc, track and time that have elapsed Press the MENU and select CD MODE.
since the start of the track.
Select SHUFFLE, which then enables the
During radio reception, press CD once to function to be selected on or off.
start CD playback.
Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, you can
After a disc is loaded, playback starts have the system shuffle tracks for the whole
immediately. CD, or within the current folder.
Track Selection Type 3
• Press the seek up once to move to the Press function button 2.
next track or press it repeatedly to
access later tracks. Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, you can
have the system shuffle tracks for the whole
• Press the seek down once to replay the
CD, or within the current folder. Pressing
current track. If pressed within two
function button 2 toggles these options.
seconds of the start of a track, the
previous track plays. Use the seek up or down button to select
• Press the seek down repeatedly to the next track to shuffle, if required.
select previous tracks.
Repeat Compact Disc Tracks
• Press the up or down arrow to select
the required track, then press OK. Type 1
You can select a track by using the numeric Press REPEAT in CD mode.
keypad. Dial the required track number Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, you can
until complete (for example, 1 then 2 for have the system repeat the current track or
track 12), or dial the number and directly all tracks within the current folder.
press OK.
Type 2
Fast Forward and Reverse
Press the MENU button and select CD
Press and hold the seek down or up to MODE.
search backward or forward within the
tracks on the disc. Select REPEAT, which then enables the
function to be selected on or off. The track
Shuffle and Random will replay once ended.
Random track playback, also known as Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, you can
shuffle, plays all tracks on the CD in have the system repeat the current track or
random order. all tracks within the current folder.
Type 1 Type 3
Press the SHUFFLE in CD mode. Press function button 1.
285

Audio System
Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, you can You can play MP3 files recorded on
have the system repeat the current track or CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW formats. The
all tracks within the current folder. Pressing disc must be in the ISO 9660 level 1 or level
function button 1 toggles these options. 2 format, or Joliet or Romeo in the
expansion format. You can also use a disc
Compact Disc Track Scanning recorded in multi session.
The Scan function allows you to preview ISO 9660 Format
each track for approximately 8 seconds.
This is the most common international
Type 1 standard for the logical format of files and
folders on a CD-ROM.
Press CD/AUX to select CD MODE.
There are several specification levels. In
Short press SCAN/AS button to scan CD. Level 1, file names must be in the 8.3
Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, you can format (no more than eight characters in
have the system scan tracks on the CD or the name, no more than three characters
within the current folder. Pressing in the extension MP3 and WMA) and in
SCAN/AS button toggles these options. capital letters.
Type 2 Folder names can be no longer than eight

characters. There can be no more than
Various scan modes are possible, eight folder levels (trees). Level 2
according to the type of CD currently specifications allow file names up to 31
playing. characters long.
Press the MENU button and select CD Each folder can have up to eight trees.
MODE. For Joliet or Romeo in the expansion
Select SCAN, which then enables the format, consider these restrictions when
function to be selected on or off. configuring your CD writing software.
Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, you can Multi Session
have the system scan tracks on the CD or
within the current folder. Pressing OK button This recording method enables adding of
toggles these options. data using the track-at-once method.
Type 3 Conventional CDs begin at a CD control

area called the lead-in and end at an area
Press function button 3. called lead-out. A multi session CD is a CD
having multiple sessions, with each
Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, you can
segment from lead-in to lead-out regarded
have the system scan tracks on the CD or
as a single session.
within the current folder. Pressing function
button 3 toggles these options. CD-Extra: The format that records audio
(audio CD data) as tracks on session 1, and
MP3 File Playback records data as tracks on session 2.
MP3 (MPEG 1 Audio Layer-3) is a standard Mixed CD: In this format, data records as
technology and format for compressing track 1 and audio (audio CD data) records
audio data. This allows a more efficient as track 2.
use of the media.
286

Audio System
File Formats
With formats other than ISO 9660 level 1
and level 2, folder names or file names may
not display correctly.
When naming, be sure to add the file
extension MP3 to the file name.
If you put the extension MP3 to a file other
than MP3, the unit cannot recognize the
file correctly and generates random noise
that could damage your speakers.
The following discs take a longer time to
start playback.
• A disc recorded with complicated tree
structure.
• A disc recorded in multi session.
• A non-finalized disc, where you can add
more data.
Playing a Multi Session Disc

When the first track of the first session is E104206
audio CD data only, the audio CD data of
the first session plays. Non-audio CD data, ID3 Tag Version 2
MP3 file information (such as track number
The following occurs when an MP3 file
and time) displays with no sound.
containing a tag plays:
When the first track of the first session is
• When skipping a portion of a tag (at
not audio CD data:
the beginning of the track) there is no
• If an MP3 file is on the disc, the system sound output. Skip time changes
skips these file and other data. Audio depending on the tag capacity.
CD data is not recognized. Example: At 64 kbytes, it is about 2
• If no MP3 file is in the disc, nothing seconds (with RealJukebox).
plays. Audio CD data is not recognized. • The displayed elapsed playing time
when skipping a portion of the tag is
MP3 Files Playback Order inaccurate. For MP3 files of a bit rate
The playback order of the folders and files other than 128 kbps, time does not
are as shown. display accurately during playback.
• When an MP3 file is created with MP3
Note: The system skips any folder that does
conversion software (such as
not include an MP3 file.
RealJukebox - a registered trademark
To specify a desired playback order before of RealNetworks Inc.), the tag
the folder or file name, input the order by generates automatically.
number (for example, 01 or 02) then record
the contents onto a disc. The order differs
depending on the writing software.
287

Audio System
MP3 Navigation • The disc name.

You can record MP3 tracks on the CD in • The artist name.
several ways. You can place them in the • The track name.
root directory like a conventional audio CD,
Note: You can select these display options
or in folders that may represent categories,
in the same way as MP3 displays.
such as album, artist, or genre.
The normal playing sequence on CDs with Ending Compact Disc Playback
multiple folders is:
To restore radio reception on all units,
• Play the tracks within the root (top press RADIO.
level) first
Note: The CD does not eject. The disc
• Then the tracks in any folder(s) within pauses at the point where radio reception
the root returned.
• Then move onto the second folder, and To resume CD playback, press CD again.
so forth.
To navigate to a track:
MEDIA HUB (If Equipped)
1. Press the up or down arrow buttons to
enter the track list. Type 1
2. Navigate the hierarchy using the arrow
buttons to select another folder or A
track (file).
3. Press OK to select a highlighted track.
MP3 Display Options

When an MP3 disc is playing, certain
information encoded in each track can
display. Such information normally
includes:
• The file name. E217515
• The folder name.
• ID3 information, which might be the A LINE IN.
album or artist name.
The unit normally shows the file name that
is playing. To select one of the other items
of information, press INFO repeatedly until
the required item appears in the display.
CD Text Display Options

When an audio disc with CD text is playing,
limited information encoded in each track
can display. Such information normally
includes:
288

Audio System
Type 2 Type 3
A B
A B
E217516 E170492
C
A LINE IN. A LINE IN.

B USB ports. B USB ports.
C SD card slot.
AUDIO TROUBLESHOOTING
Audio unit display Rectification
PLEASE CHECK CD General error message for CD fault conditions, such as

cannot read the CD, data-CD inserted, etc. Make sure
the disc is loaded correct way up. Clean and re-try, or
replace disc with known music disc. If error persists
contact your dealer.
CD DRIVE MALFUNCTION General error message for CD fault conditions such as
possible mechanism fault.
CD DRIVE HIGH TEMP Ambient temperature too hot – unit will not work until
it has cooled down.
IPOD ERROR READING DEVICE General error message for iPod fault conditions, such
as cannot read the data. Ensure iPod is inserted
correctly. If error persists contact your dealer.
289

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION
E142598
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications • Use the advanced voice recognition

system that works with your system
Bluetooth-enabled cell phone and • Charge your USB device (if your device
portable media player. supports this)
This allows you to: *
These features are not available in all
• Make and receive calls markets and may require activation.
• Access and play music from your Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
media player market.
• Use Emergency Assistance and Make sure that you review your device's
applications, via SYNC Applink
*
manual before using it with SYNC.
• Access phonebook contacts and music Support
using voice commands
• Stream music from your connected cell For further support, see an authorized
phone dealer. For more information, visit the
regional Ford website.
• Select pre-defined text messages (if
your device supports this)
290

Safety Information supported media content. The system also

records a short development log of
WARNING approximately 10 minutes of all recent
Driving while distracted can result in system activity. The log profile and other
loss of vehicle control, crash and system data may be used to improve the
injury. We strongly recommend that system and help diagnose any problems
you use extreme caution when using any that may occur.
device that may take your focus off the The cell phone profile, media player index
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe and development log will remain in the
operation of your vehicle. We recommend system unless deleted. They are generally
against the use of any hand-held device accessible in your vehicle only when you
while driving and encourage the use of connect your cell phone or media player.
voice-operated systems when possible. If you no longer plan to use the system or
Make sure you are aware of all applicable your vehicle, we recommend you complete
local laws that may affect the use of a master reset to erase all stored
electronic devices while driving. information. See SYNC™ (page 290).
Special equipment is required to access
When using SYNC: system data. Access to your vehicle's
• Do not operate playing devices if the SYNC module is also required. We will not
power cords or cables are broken, split access the system data for any purpose
or damaged. Carefully place cords and other than as described without consent.
cables where you cannot step on them Examples where system data can be
or they do not interfere with the accessed are for a court order, where
operation of pedals, seats, required by law enforcement, other
compartments or safe driving abilities. government authorities or other third
parties acting with lawful authority. Other
• Do not leave playing devices in your
parties may seek to access the information
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
independently of us. Further privacy
could cause them damage. Refer to
information is available. See SYNC™
your device's manual for further
Applications and Services (page 305).
information.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. See an authorized dealer. USING VOICE RECOGNITION
Privacy Information This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
When a cell phone is connected to SYNC, allows you to keep your hands on the
the system creates a profile that is linked steering wheel and focus on what is in front
to that cell phone. The system creates the of you.
profile to offer you more mobile features
and to operate more efficiently. Among Helpful Hints
other things, this profile may contain data
about your phonebook, text messages Make sure the interior of your vehicle is as
(read and unread) and call history. This quiet as possible. Wind noise from open
will include the history of calls when your windows and road vibrations may prevent
cell phone was not connected to the the system from correctly recognizing
system. If you connect a media player, the spoken commands.
system creates and retains an index of
291

Before giving a voice command, wait for You can interrupt the system at any time
the system announcement to finish while it is speaking by pressing the voice
followed by a single beep. Any command button. You can also cancel a voice session
spoken before this does not register with at any time by pressing and holding the
the system. voice button.
Speak naturally, without long pauses Initiating a Voice Session
between words.
Press the voice button located
on the steering wheel. A list of
E142599 available commands appears in
the display.
Global voice commands
(cancel | stop | exit) This command ends the voice session. You
can also cancel a session by holding the
voice button for two or more seconds.
help This command provides you with hints,
examples and instructions.
main menu This command restarts the voice session
from the initial starting point.
The default setting is to a higher level of

System Interaction and Feedback interaction in order to help you learn to use
the system. You can change these settings
The system provides feedback through at any time.
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the Adjusting the Interaction Level
situation and your chosen level of
interaction. You can customize the voice Press the voice button. When
recognition system to provide more or less prompted:
E142599
instruction and feedback.
Command Description
voice settings Provides access to change the interaction level.
Then any of the following:
Command Description
interaction mode Provides less audible interaction and more tone prompts.
advanced
interaction mode novice Provides more detailed interaction and guidance.
292

Confirmation prompts are short questions example, the system may ask if the
the system asks when it is not sure of your command phone is correct.
request or when there is more than one
Press the voice button. When prompted:
possible response to your request. For
Command Description
voice settings Provides access to change the confirmation prompt setting.
Command Description
confirmation prompts off Makes a best guess from the command. You may still occa-
sionally be asked to confirm settings.
confirmation prompts on Clarifies your voice command with a short question.
The system creates suggestion lists when

it has the same confidence level of several
options based on your voice commands.
When switched on, the system may
prompt you with as many as four
possibilities for clarification.
Command Description
media candidate lists off Makes a best guess from the media suggestion list. The
system may occasionally ask you questions.
media candidate lists on Clarifies your voice command for media suggestions.
phone candidate lists off Makes a best guess from the cell phone suggestion list. The
system may occasionally ask you questions.
phone candidate lists on Clarifies your voice command for cell phone suggestions.
Press the MENU button.

Changing the Voice Settings
You can change the voice settings using
the information and entertainment display.
293

You can then select the following:

Action Message
SYNC-Settings
Voice settings Enters menu for voice options.
Note: To scroll through the menus, press

the up or down arrows on your audio system.
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
1. Make sure the Bluetooth feature on
PHONE your cell phone is switched on before
starting the search. Refer to your
Hands-free calling is one of the main
device's manual if necessary.
features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are 2. Press the PHONE button. When the
dependent on your cell phone's audio display indicates that no phones
functionality. are paired, select the option to add.
At a minimum, most cell phones with 3. When a message to begin pairing
Bluetooth wireless technology support the appears in the audio display, search for
following functions: SYNC on your cell phone to start the
pairing process.
• Answering an incoming call.
4. Select SYNC on your cell phone.
• Ending a call.
5. Wait until the PIN appears on the
• Using privacy mode.
phone display. Compare the PIN on the
• Dialing a number. phone with the PIN shown in the audio
• Redialing. display and accept the request on the
phone and the vehicle display. The
• Call waiting notification.
display indicates when the pairing is
• Caller ID. successful.
Other features such as text messaging Note: In some cases the phone will request
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook to enter a PIN. Enter the six-digit PIN
download are cell phone dependent provided by the system in the audio display.
features. To check your cell phone's The display indicates when the pairing is
compatibility, refer to your device's manual successful.
or visit the regional Ford website.
Depending on your cell phone's capability
Pairing a Cell Phone For the First and your market, the system may prompt
Time you with questions such as setting the
current cell phone as the primary cell
Wirelessly pairing your cell phone with the phone (the cell phone the system
system allows you to make and receive automatically tries to connect with first
hands-free calls. when you switch the ignition on) or
downloading your phonebook.
Note: You must switch the ignition and
radio on.
294

1. Make sure the Bluetooth feature on

your cell phone is switched on before
starting the search. Refer to your
The information display may show your device's manual if necessary.
cell phone's battery charge level and signal 2. Press the PHONE button.
strength.
3. Select the option for Bluetooth devices.
Using Voice Commands 4. Press the OK button.
5. Select the option to add. This starts
the pairing process.
E142599
Make sure to switch on your phone's 6. When a message to begin pairing
Bluetooth feature before starting the appears in the audio display, search for
search. See your device's manual if SYNC on your device to start the
necessary. pairing process.
Press the voice button and when 8. Wait until the PIN appears on the
prompted say: phone display. Compare the PIN on the
Voice Command Action and Descrip- phone with the PIN shown in the audio
tion display and accept the request on the
phone and the vehicle display. The
(pair ([Bluetooth] Follow the instruc- display indicates when the pairing is
device | phone | tions on the audio successful.
Bluetooth audio) | display. Note: In some cases the phone will request
add phone) to enter a PIN. Enter the six-digit PIN
provided by the system in the audio display.
Words in square brackets [ ] are optional
The display indicates when the pairing is
and do not have to be spoken for the
successful.
system to understand the command.
The system may prompt you with
Depending on your phone's capability and questions such as setting the current cell
your market, the system may prompt you phone as the primary cell phone or
with questions, such as setting the current downloading your phonebook.
phone as the primary phone (the phone
SYNC automatically tries to connect with Cell Phone Voice Commands
first upon vehicle start-up) and
downloading your phonebook.
E142599
Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones
Press the voice button and when prompted
Wirelessly pairing your cell phone with the say:
system allows you to make and receive
hands-free calls.
Note: You must switch the ignition and
radio on.
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up or down arrows on your audio system.
295

Voice Command
Voice Command
(mute call off | un-mute call) 2
(phone | Blackberry | iPhone)

(turn ringer on | silent mode off)
Then say any of the following:
(turn ringer off | silent mode [on])
call (___)
[text] (messages | message) 3
call ___ at home
call ___ ([at] work | [(in | at) [the]] office) help
call ___ on (mobile | cell) ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it

could be the name of anything, such as a
call ___ on other group, artist or song. For example you
could say "Play artist The Beetles".
dial [[a] number] 1
1
See Dial table below.
([go to] privacy [on] | transfer to 2 2
These commands are only valid while in
phone | handsfree off)
a phone call.
(hold call [on] | place call on hold) 2 3
See the text message table below.
join (calls | call) 2
Dial Commands
mute call [on] 2 Press the voice button and when prompted
say any of the following commands:
Voice Command Action and Description
Pound This will add a # symbol to the number or name.

Number 0 (zero) to 9 (nine)
Asterisk or Star This will add a * symbol to the number or name.
clear Deletes all entered digits
(delete | correct) Deletes the last set of entered digits.
Plus This will add a + symbol to the number or name.
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the phone button or any button on the audio unit.
Phonebook Hints
To hear how the SYNC system speaks a
name browse phonebook, select a contact
and press:
296

To end the call, press the end call button

Menu Item on the steering wheel or select the end call
option in the audio display and press OK.
Hear it
Receiving a Call
Making a Call When receiving a call, you can:
Press the voice button and when prompted • Answer the call by pressing the accept
say either: call button on the steering wheel or by
selecting the accept call option in the
Voice audio display and pressing the OK
Action and Description button.
Command
• Reject the call by pressing the reject
call [[a] call button on the steering wheel or by
name] selecting the reject call option in the
audio display and pressing the OK
dial [[a] SYNC prompts you to say
button.
number] the numbers that you wish
to dial. After you say the • Ignore the call by doing nothing.
numbers, the system
confirms it. Cell Phone Options During an
Active Call
When the system has stated the During an active call, you have extra menu
number, you say any of the following: features which become available, for
example putting a call on hold.
Voice
Action and Description To access this menu, choose one of the
Command
options available at the bottom of the
(dial | This initiates the call. audio display or select the option for more.
send)
(delete | To erase the last spoken
correct) digit.
clear To erase all spoken digits.
Menu Item Action and Description
Mic. off Turn your vehicle's microphone off. To turn the microphone
on, select the option again.
Privacy Switch a call from an active hands-free environment to your
cell phone for a more private conversation. When selected,
the audio display will indicate the call is private.
Hold Put an active call on hold. When selected, the audio display
will indicate the call is on hold.
297

Dial a number Enter numbers using the audio system numeric keypad, for
example numbers for passwords.
Join calls Join two separate calls. The system supports a maximum of
three callers on a multi-party or conference call.
1. Select the option for more.
2. Access the desired contact through the system or use
voice commands to place the second call. Once actively
in the second call, select the option for more.
3. Scroll to the option to join calls and press the OK button.
Phonebook Access your phonebook contacts.

2. Scroll to the option for phonebook and press the OK
button.
3. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
4. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
appears in the audio display.
5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
Call history Access your call history log.

2. Scroll to the option until call history appears. Press the
OK button.
3. Scroll through your call history options (incoming,
outgoing or missed).
The system attempts to automatically

Accessing Features Through the re-download your phonebook and call
Cell Phone Menu history each time your cell phone connects
to the system. You must turn on the auto
You can access your call history, download feature if your cell phone
phonebook, sent text messages as well as supports it.
access cell phone and system settings.
You can also access advanced features Note: This is a cell phone dependent
such as emergency assistance. feature.
1. Press the PHONE button to enter the
cell phone menu.
298

2. Select one of the options available.
Dial a number Dial a number using the audio system numeric keypad.
Redial Redial the last number called (if available). Press the OK
button to select.
Phonebook Access your downloaded phonebook.
1. Press the OK button to confirm and enter. You can use
the options at the bottom of the screen to quickly access
an alphabetical category. You can also use the letters on
the keypad to jump in the list.
2. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
Call history Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls.

1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select either incoming calls, outgoing calls or
missed calls. Press the OK button to make your selection.
Speed Dial Select one of 10 speed dial entries. To set a speed dial entry,
go to the phonebook and press and hold one of the numbers
on the audio system numeric keypad.
Text messaging Send, download and delete text messages.
BT Devices Access the following option for Bluetooth device menu list-
ings:
Add
Delete
Conn.
Discon.
Master
Phone settings View various settings and features on your cell phone.
299

Text Messaging Receiving a Text Message
WARNING Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.

Your phone must support downloading text
Local laws may prohibit some or all messages using Bluetooth to receive
of the text messaging functions while incoming text messages.
driving. Check your local road rules
before using these functions. Note: This is a speed-dependent feature
and is only available when your vehicle is
traveling at 5 km/h or less.
The system allows you to receive, send,
download and delete text messages. The When a new message arrives, an audible
system can also read incoming text tone sounds and the audio display
messages to you so that you do not have indicates you have a new message.
to take your eyes off the road.
To hear the message you can say:
Note: This is a cell phone dependent
feature. Voice command Action and Descrip-
tion
(listen to | read) Select this option

([text] message) to have the system
read the message
to you.
Using the screen you also have the following options:

Menu Action and Description
Item
Ignore Select this option, or do nothing, and the message goes into your text message
inbox.
View Select the view option to open the text message. Once selected, you have
the ability to have the message read to you, to view other messages. For
additional options select:
More... If you select this option, use the arrow button to scroll through the
following options:
Reply to Press the OK button to access, and then scroll
sender through a list of pre-defined messages to send.
Call sender Press the OK button to call the sender of the
message.
Forward Press the OK button to forward the message to
msg. anyone in your phonebook or call history. You can
also choose to enter a number.
300

Sending, Downloading and Deleting 2. Select the text messaging option, then
Your Text Messages press the OK button.
1. Press the PHONE button. Choose from the following:
New When you select the option to send a text message, a list of
pre-defined messages appear in the audio display. Allows
you to send a new text message based on a pre-defined set
of 15 messages.
View Allows you to read the full message and in addition provides
the option to have the message read out to you by the system.
To go to the next message select the more option. This allows
you to reply to the sender, call the sender or forward the
message.
Delete Allows you to delete current text messages from the system
(not your cell phone). The audio display indicates when all
your text messages have been deleted.
More... Allows you to delete all messages or to manually trigger a
download of all unread messages from your cell phone.
Note: Only one recipient is allowed per text

Sending a Text Message message.
1. Select the send option when the
desired selection is highlighted in the
Accessing Your Cell Phone
audio display.
Settings
2. Select the confirmation option when These are cell phone dependent features.
the contact appears and press the OK Your cell phone settings allow you to
button again to confirm when the access and adjust features such as your
system asks if you would like to send ringtone, text message notification, modify
the message. Each text message is your phonebook and set up automatic
sent with a pre-defined signature. download.
Note: You can send text messages two 1. Press the PHONE button.
ways. You can chose a contact from your 2. Scroll until the phone settings option
phonebook, call history or by entering a appears, then press the OK button.
phone number and selecting the text option
from the audio display. You can also reply 3. Scroll to select from the following
to a received message in the inbox. options:
301

Set as master If this option is checked, the system will use this cell phone
as the master when there is more than one cell phone paired
to the system. This option can be changed for all paired cell
phones (not only for the active one) using the Bluetooth
devices menu.
Phone status See the cell phone name, provider name, cell phone number,
signal level and battery level. When done, press the left arrow
button to return to the cell phone status menu.
Set ringtone Select which ringtone sounds during an incoming call (one
of the system's or your cell phone's). If your cell phone
supports in-band ringing, your cell phone's ringtone sounds
when you choose the cell phone ringtone option.
1. Press the OK button to select and scroll to hear each
ringtone.
2. Press the OK button to select.
Text msg notify Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you when
a text message arrives. Press the OK button to turn the
audible tone on or off.
Phonebook pref. Modify the contents of your phonebook, e.g. add, delete,
download. Press the OK button to select and scroll between
the options in the table below.
To modify the phone book preferences,

choose from the following:
302

Add contacts Push the desired contacts on your cell phone. Refer to your
device's manual on how to push contacts. Press the OK
button to add more contacts from your phonebook.
Delete When a message asking you to delete appears, select the
option to confirm. Press the OK button to delete the current
phonebook and call history. The system takes you back to
the menu for phone settings.
Download now Press the OK button to select and download your phonebook
to the system.
Auto-download When automatic download is switched on, any changes,
additions or deletions saved in the system since your last
download are deleted.
When automatic download is switched off, your phonebook
will not be downloaded when your cell phone connects to
the system.
Your phonebook, call history and text messages can only be
accessed when your paired cell phone is connected to the
system.
Check or uncheck this option to automatically download your
phonebook each time your cell phone connects to the system.
Downloading times are cell phone dependent and quantity
dependent.
Bluetooth Devices Menu Options

Bluetooth Devices
1. Press the PHONE button.
This menu provides access to your
Bluetooth devices. Use the arrow buttons 2. Scroll until the Bluetooth device option
to scroll through the menu options. It appears, then press the OK button.
allows you to add, connect and delete 3. Scroll to select from the following
devices and set a cell phone as primary. options:
Add Pair additional cell phones to the system.

1. Select the option to add to start the pairing process.
2. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio
display, search for SYNC on your cell phone. Refer to your
device's manual if necessary.
303

4. Wait until the PIN appears on the phone display. Compare

the PIN on the phone with the PIN shown in the audio
display and accept the request on the phones and the
vehicles display. The display indicates when the pairing
*
is successful.
5. When the option to set the cell phone as the primary cell
phone appears, select either yes or no.
6. Depending on the functionality of your cell phone, the
system may ask you extra questions (for example, if you
would like to download your phonebook). Select either
yes or no to confirm your response.
Delete After deleting a cell phone from the list, the cell phone can
only be connected again by repeating the full pairing process.
Select the delete option and confirm when the system asks
to delete the selected device.
Master The system attempts to connect with the primary cell phone
every time you switch the ignition on. When a cell phone is
selected as primary, it appears first in the list and is marked
with an asterisk.
Set a previously paired cell phone as your primary cell phone.
Select the master option to confirm the primary cell phone.
Conn. Connect a previously paired cell phone. You can only have
one cell phone connected at a time to use the cell phone
functionality. When another cell phone is connected, the
previous cell phone will be disconnected from the telephone
services. The system allows you to use different Bluetooth
devices for the cell phone functionality and the Bluetooth
audio music playback feature at the same time.
Discon. Disconnects the selected cell phone. Select this option and
confirm when asked to. After disconnecting a cell phone, it
can be connected again without repeating the full pairing
process.
*
In some cases the phone will request to enter a PIN. Enter the six-digit PIN provided by
the system in the audio display. The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
2. Select the SYNC settings option, then

System Settings press the OK button.
1. Press the MENU button. 3. Scroll to select from the following
options:
304

Bluetooth on Check or uncheck this option to turn the Bluetooth interface

of the system on or off. Select this option then press the OK
button to change the option's status.
Set defaults This selection does not erase your indexed information
(phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices).
Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio
display. Return to the factory default settings.
Master reset Completely erase all information stored on the system
(phonebook, call history, text messages and paired devices)
and return to the factory default settings.
display. The display indicates when complete and the system
takes you back to the previous menu.
Install on SYNC Install applications or software updates you have down-
loaded.
display. There must be a valid SYNC application or update
available on the USB thumb drive in order to finish an
installation successfully.
System info Display the system's version numbers as well as its serial
number.
Press the OK button to select.
Voice settings The voice settings submenu contains various options. See
Using Voice Recognition (page 291).
Browse USB Browse the actual menu structure of the connected USB
device. Press the OK button and use the up or down arrows
to scroll through the folders and files. Use the left or right
arrows to enter and leave a folder. Media content can be
directly selected for playback from this menu.
Press the MENU button to enter the

system menu.
SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND
SERVICES
A list of available applications appears.
Each application may have its own specific
settings.
305

SYNC-Apps Scroll to this option, and then press OK.
If a crash deploys an airbag or triggers the

SYNC Emergency Assistance fuel pump shut off, the system may
contact emergency services through a
WARNINGS paired and connected cell phone. For more
For this feature to work, your cell information about the system and
phone must have Bluetooth and be Emergency Assistance, visit the regional
compatible with the system. Ford website.
Always place your cell phone in a Note: Before selecting this feature, you
secure location inside your vehicle. must read the Emergency Assistance privacy
Failure to do so may cause serious notice later in this section for important
injury to someone or damage the cell information.
phone which could prevent this feature
Note: When you switch this feature on or
from working correctly.
off, that setting applies for all paired cell
Unless the feature setting is switched phones. If you have turned this feature off
on prior to a crash, the system will and a previously paired phone connects
not attempt to place an emergency when you switch on the ignition, either a
call which could delay the response time, voice message plays, a display message or
potentially increasing the risk of serious icon is shown, or both.
injury or death. Do not wait for the system
Note: Every cell phone operates differently.
to make an emergency call if you can do it
While this feature works with most cell
yourself. Dial emergency services
phones, some cell phones may experience
immediately to avoid a delayed response
difficulties using this feature.
time. If you do not hear Emergency
Assistance within five seconds of the crash, Note: Make sure you are familiar with the
the system or cell phone may be damaged information about airbag deployment. See
or non-functional. Supplementary Restraints System (page
25).
Switching Emergency Assistance

On and Off
Press the MENU button then select:
Message Action
SYNC-Apps Press OK.

Emerg. assist Press OK. Select the option you require and press OK.
306

Display Options In the Event of a Crash

If you switch on this feature, a confirmation Note: Not every crash deploys an airbag or
message appears in the display. triggers the fuel pump shut off (which may
If you switch off this feature, a dialog will turn on Emergency Assistance). However,
appear in the display, which allows you to if Emergency Assistance is triggered the
set a voice reminder. system tries to contact the emergency
services. If a connected cell phone sustains
Off with voice reminder provides a display damage or loses connection to the system,
and voice reminder when your cell phone it searches for and tries to connect to any
connects and your vehicle starts. available previously paired cell phone. The
Off without voice reminder provides a system attempts to make an emergency
display reminder only without a voice call.
reminder when your cell phone connects. Before making a call:
To make sure that Emergency Assistance • If you do not cancel the call and SYNC
works correctly: makes a successful call, an
• The system must have power and be introductory message plays for the
working correctly at the time of the emergency operator. After this
crash and during feature activation and message, there is hands-free
use. communication between your vehicle's
occupants and the operator.
• You must switch on the feature before
a crash. • The system provides a short window
of time (approximately 10 seconds) to
• You must have a cell phone connected cancel the call. If you do not cancel the
to the system. call, the system attempts to make an
• In certain countries, it may be emergency call.
necessary to have a valid and • The system plays a message letting
registered SIM card with credit in order you know when it attempts to make an
to place and maintain an emergency emergency call. You can cancel the call
call. by selecting the relevant function
• A connected cell phone must have the button or by pressing the end call
ability to make and maintain an button on the steering wheel.
outgoing call at the time of the crash.
• A connected cell phone must have
adequate network coverage, battery
power and signal strength.
• Your vehicle must have battery power.
Note: This feature only works in countries
or regions where SYNC Emergency
Assistance can call the local emergency
services. Visit the regional Ford website for
details.
307

During a call: Note: The emergency operator may also

• Emergency Assistance uses your receive information from the cellular
vehicle GPS or cellular network network such as cell phone number, cell
information when available to phone location and cell phone carrier name
determine the most appropriate independent from SYNC Emergency
language to use. It alerts the Assistance.
emergency operator of the crash and Emergency Assistance may not work if:
delivers the introductory message. This
• Your cell phone or Emergency
may include your vehicle GPS
Assistance hardware sustains damage
coordinates.
in the crash.
• The language the system uses to
• The vehicle battery or the system has
interact with the occupants of your
no power.
vehicle may differ from the language
used to deliver information to the • A crash ejects your cell phone from
emergency operator. your vehicle.
• After the delivery of the introductory • You do not have a valid and registered
message the voice line opens so that SIM card with credit in your cell phone.
you can speak hands-free with the • You are in a country or region where
emergency operator. the SYNC Emergency Assistance
• When the line is connected, you must cannot place the call. Visit the regional
be prepared to provide your name, Ford website for details.
phone number and location
information immediately. Important Information about the
Emergency Assistance Feature
Note: While the system provides
information to the emergency operator, the Emergency Assistance does not currently
system plays a message letting you know call emergency services in the following
it is sending important information. It then markets: Albania, Belarus, Bosnia and
lets you know when the line is open to start Herzegovina, Macedonia, Netherlands,
hands-free communication. Ukraine, Moldova and Russia.
Note: During an Emergency Assistance call, Visit the regional Ford website for the
an emergency priority screen appears which latest details.
contains vehicle GPS coordinates when
available. Emergency Assistance Privacy Notice
Note: It is possible that GPS location When you switch on Emergency

information is not available at the time of Assistance, it may disclose to emergency
the crash; in this case, Emergency services that your vehicle has been in a
Assistance will still attempt to place an crash involving the deployment of an
emergency call. airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut
off. This feature has the capability to
Note: It is possible that the emergency disclose your location information to the
services will not receive the GPS emergency operator or other details about
coordinates; in this case, hands-free your vehicle or crash to provide the most
communication with an emergency operator appropriate emergency services.
is available.
If you do not want to disclose this
information, do not switch on the feature.
308

SYNC AppLink Note: Make sure you have an active account

for the app that you have downloaded.
The system enables voice and manual Some apps will work automatically with no
control of SYNC AppLink enabled setup. Other apps will want you to configure
smartphone apps. Once an app is running your personal settings and personalize your
through AppLink, you can control main experience by creating stations or favorites.
features of the app through voice We recommend you do this at home or
commands and manual controls. outside of your vehicle.
Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink. To Access Using the SYNC Menu
Note: iPhone users need to connect the Scroll through the list of available
phone to the USB port. applications and press OK to select an
app. Once an app is running through SYNC,
Note: Android users need to connect the press the right arrow button to access the
phone to SYNC using Bluetooth. app menu. You can access various app
Note: For information on available apps, features from here, for example thumbs
supported smartphone devices and up and thumbs down. Press the left arrow
troubleshooting tips please visit the Ford button to exit the app menu.
website. Press the MENU button then select:
SYNC-Apps
Mobile Apps Scroll to this option, and then press OK.
Find new Apps Select this option if the app required is not listed.
Note: If a SYNC AppLink compatible app cannot be found, make sure the required app is
running on the mobile device.
To Access Using Voice Commands

Press the voice button and when prompted
say:
Command Description and Action
mobile (apps | applica- Say the name of the application after the tone. The applica-
tions) tion will start. While an app is running through SYNC, you can
press the voice button and speak commands specific to the
app.
The following voice commands are always

available:
309

Command Description and Action
[main menu] help Use this command to hear a list of available voice commands.
mobile (apps | applica- The system will prompt you to say the name of the app to
tions) start it.
list [mobile] (apps | The system will list all of the currently available mobile apps.
applications)
find [new] [mobile] The system will search your connected mobile device for
(apps | applications) SYNC compatible apps.
(quit | exit | close) Use this command followed by the name of the app.
You can also say the name of any SYNC Enabling and Disabling Push
compitable app to start it on SYNC. To see Notifications
a list of the available voice commands for
Some apps can send push notifications. A
an app, say the name of an app followed
push notification is an alert from an app
by help. For example you could say
running in the background and is delivered
"Spotify help".
by voice, pop up or both. This may be
particularly useful for news or location
based apps.
Press the MENU button then select:
SYNC-Apps
Mobile Apps
SYNC-Settings
All Apps If push notifications are supported, this setting will be listed.
Select to enable or disable the feature as required.
Data is sent to Ford in the United States

Enabling SYNC Mobile Apps through the connected device. The
information is encrypted and includes your
To use the system you must consent to
VIN, SYNC module number, anonymous
send and receive app authorization
usage statistics and debugging
information and updates, using the data
information. Updates may take place
plan associated with the connected device.
automatically.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for
each connected device the first time you
select a mobile app using the system.
310

Note: Standard data rates will apply. Ford App Status

is not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider, You can view the current status of an app
when your vehicle sends or receives data in the settings menu. There are three
through the connected device. This includes possible statuses:
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
Update needed The system has detected a new app requiring authorization
or a general permissions update is required.
Up-to-date No update is required.
Updating... The system is trying to receive an update.
Options in the settings menu:
Request Update If an update is required and you want to manually request

the update, for example when you are in a Wi-Fi hotspot.
Disable Updates Select this option to disable automatic updates.
When you launch an app using SYNC, the

App Permissions system may ask you to grant certain
Permissions are divided by groups. You can permissions, for example:
grant these group permissions individually. • To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle
You can change a permission group status information to the app including, but
any time when not driving, by using the not limited to: Fuel level, fuel
settings menu. consumption, engine speed, battery
voltage, odometer, VIN, external
temperature, gear position, tire
pressure, ambient temperature, date
and time.
• To allow your vehicle to provide driving
characteristic information, including,
but not limited to: MyKey, seatbelt
status, engine speeds, braking events,
brake pedal switch, acceleration,
accelerator pedal position, clutch pedal
switch, trip length, trip time, trip cost,
percent engine on time, and percent of
time at speed.
311

• To allow your vehicle to provide Confirm that the USB device has been
location information, including: GPS formatted correctly and has the following
and speed. specifications:
• To allow the app to send push • USB 2.0.
notifications using the vehicle display • File format must be FAT16/32.
and voice capabilities while running in
a background state. Note: NTFS file format is not supported.
Note: You will only need to grant The format of the audio files on the USB
permissions the first time you use an app device must be:
with SYNC. • MP3.
Note: We are not responsible or liable for • Non DRM protected WMA.
any damages or loss of privacy relating to • WAV.
usage of an app, or dissemination of any
vehicle data that you approve us to provide • AAC.
to an app.
Connecting Your Media Player to
the USB Port
USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
Note: If your media player has a power
MEDIA PLAYER switch, make sure you switch on the device.
You can access and play music from your To Connect Using Voice Commands
media player through your vehicle's
speaker system using the system's media 1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
menu or voice commands. You can also port.
sort and play your music by specific 2. Press the voice button and when
categories, for example artist or albums. prompted say:
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any
media player including: iPod, Zune, Plays
from device players, and most USB drives.
SYNC also supports audio formats, for
example MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC.
Voice Command Description and Action
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate
[player]) voice commands. Refer to the media voice commands.
Words in brackets [ ] are optional and do not have to be spoken for the system to
understand the command. For example, for where (USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3 [player])
appears, you can say USB or USB stick.
2. Press the Media button (next to the

To Connect Using the System Menu audio display) until an initializing
message appears in the display.
1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
312

Browse USB Depending on how many media files are on your connected
device, an indexing message may appear in the display. When
indexing is complete, the screen returns to the playback menu.
Choose from the following:
Message
Play all
Playlists
Songs
Artists
Albums
Genres
Browse USB
Reset USB
Exit
What's Playing? Media Voice Commands

Press the voice button and when
At any time during playback, you can press
prompted say:
the voice button and ask the system what E142599
is playing. The system reads the metadata
tags of the current track, if populated.
(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate
[player]) voice commands.
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or
what is.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where; who plays this (what's | what is) playing, you must say; who plays
this (what's or what is) playing.
313


Voice Command
play
pause
play all
play [artist] *
play [album] *
play genre *
play next track
play playlist *
play previous
play song , song name *
repeat off
repeat one
(browse | search | show) album
(browse | search | show) artist
(browse | search | show) genre
(browse | search | show) playlist
(browse | search | show) all (album | albums)
(browse | search | show) all (artist | artists)
(browse | search | show) all (genre | genres)
(browse | search | show) all (playlist | playlists)
(browse | search | show) all (song | songs | title | titles | file | files | track | tracks)
shuffle all
shuffle off
314

Voice Command
play similar
((who's | who is) this | who plays this | (what's | what is) playing [now] | (what | which)
(song | track | artist) is this | (who's | who is) playing | (what's | what is) this)
* This voice command is not available until indexing is complete.
Voice Command Guide

(browse | search | show) The system searches all the data from your indexed music
genre and if available, begins to play the chosen type of music.
play similar music, more The system compiles a playlist and then plays similar music
like this to what is currently playing from the USB port using indexed
metadata information.
(browse | search | show) The system searches for a specific artist, track or album from
artist the music indexed through the USB port.
(browse | search | show) The system searches for a specific artist, track or album from
album the music indexed through the USB port.
To switch the Bluetooth audio on, use the

The system is also capable of playing
music from your cell phone through MEDIA button (next to the audio display)
or Source button, or press the voice button
Bluetooth.
and when prompted say:
bluetooth audio
pause
play
play next
play previous
315

Media Menu Features genre, shuffle or repeat, and to find similar

music or reset the index of your USB
The media menu allows you to select how devices.
to play your music, for example by artist,
Press AUX to select USB playback.
Options This will enter the media menu.
Shuffle Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your
choice, it remains on until you switch it off.
Repeat track Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your
choice, it remains on until you switch it off.
Similar music You can play similar types of music to the current playlist
from the USB port. The system uses the metadata informa-
tion of each track to compile a playlist. The system then
creates a new list of similar tracks and then begins playing.
Each track must have the metadata tags populated for this
feature. With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags
are not populated, the tracks will not be available in voice
recognition, the play menu or this option. However, if you
place these tracks onto your playing device in mass storage
device mode they are available in voice recognition, the play
menu or this option. The system places unknowns into any
unpopulated metadata tag.
Reset SYNC USB Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete
you can choose what to play from the USB song library.
2. Press MEDIA button (next to the audio

Accessing Your USB Song Library display) to select USB playback.
1. Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
Browse USB This menu allows you to select and play your media files by
artist, album, genre, playlist and track or even to browse what
is on your USB device.
316

If there are no media files to access, the are media files, you have the following
display indicates there is no media. If there options to scroll through and select:
Play all Play all indexed media files from your playing device one at
*
a time in numerical order.
1. Press OK to select. The first track title appears in the
display.
Playlists Access your playlists from formats, ASX, M3U, WPL or MTP.
*
1. Press OK to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired playlist, and then press OK.
Songs Search for and play a specific indexed track.

*
2. Scroll to select the desired track, and then press OK.
Artists Sort all indexed media files by artist. Once selected, the
system lists and then plays all artists and tracks alphabetic-
*
ally.
2. Scroll to select the desired artist, and then press OK.
Albums Sort all indexed media files by albums.

*
2. Scroll to select the desired albums, and then press OK.
Genres Sort indexed music by genre type.

*
2. Scroll to select the desired genre, and then press OK.
317

Browse USB Browse all supported media files on your media player
connected to the USB port. You can only view media files
that are compatible with SYNC; other saved files are not
visible.
2. Scroll to browse indexed media files on your flash drive,
and then press OK.
Reset USB Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete,
you can choose what to play from the USB song library.
*
You can use the buttons at the bottom of the audio display to jump to a certain
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the numeric keypad to jump
in the list.
Bluetooth Devices and System SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING

Settings
You can access these menus using the Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
audio display. See Using SYNC™ With should questions arise, please refer to the
Your Media Player (page 312). tables below.
Use the website at any time to check your
phone's compatibility. Visit
www.fordsync.com for more information.
Phone Issues
Issue Possible Cause(s) Possible Solution(s)
A lot of background noise The audio control settings Review your phone's user
during a phone call. on your phone may be guide regarding audio
affecting SYNC perform- adjustments.
ance.
During a call, I can hear the Possible phone malfunction. Try turning off the device,
other person but they resetting the device,
cannot hear me. removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
SYNC is not able to down- · This is a phone-dependent · Go to the website to review
load my phonebook. feature. your phone's compatibility.
· Possible phone malfunc- · Try turning off the device,
tion. resetting the device or
removing the device's
318

Phone Issues
· Try "pushing" your phone-

book contacts to SYNC by
using the Download now
feature.
The system says "Phone- Limitations on your phone's · Try "pushing" your phone-
book downloaded" but my capability. book contacts to SYNC by
phonebook in SYNC is using the Download now
empty or is missing feature.
contacts. · If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
· Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associ-
ated with the missing
contact.
I'm having trouble · This is a phone-dependent · Go to the website to review
connecting my phone to feature. your phone's compatibility.
SYNC. · Possible phone malfunc- · Try turning off the device,
· Try deleting your device
from SYNC, deleting SYNC
from your device and trying
again.
· Check the security and
"auto accept/prompt
always" settings relative to
the SYNC Bluetooth
connection on your phone.
· Update your device's firm-
ware.
· Turn off the Auto phone-
book download setting.
Text messaging is not · This is a phone-dependent · Go to the website to review
working on SYNC. feature. your phone's compatibility.
319

Phone Issues
· Possible phone malfunc- · Try turning off the device,

System can not find my · This is a phone-dependent · Check whether your
contacts. feature. phonebook has been down-
· Possible phone malfunc- loaded into SYNC properly
tion. and successfully.
· Do not separate First name
and Last name when
creating new contacts.
Otherwise users need to
speak the contact name as
the order shown on SYNC
screen.
· For some contact names in
SYNC phonebook, if SAYING
the whole name is not
successfully recognized,
please try to find the contact
in SYNC and press the "hear
it". and then say the contact
according to what SYNC
said.
· If users add a new contact
into the paired phone, but it
is not shown in SYNC
phonebook, please redown-
load the phonebook into
SYNC.
· If all contacts in SYNC
phonebook can't be
accessed via voice
commands, please double
check whether your phone-
book has been downloaded
correctly, and then check
contact names are the same
320

Phone Issues
as what you said. If this does

not work, please reset the
system and try again. If still
does not work, please
switch off the audio system
and restart it.
System can not recognise You may be speaking too For a higher successful
the phone number I said. soon or too slowly. recognition rate, try saying
the phone number in several
groups instead of speaking
out at one time. For
example: for a 11 digit phone
number, say the first 3 digits,
wait for SYNC confirmation,
then say the next 4 digits,
wait for SYNC confirmation,
and then say the last 4
digits.
USB/Media Issues
I'm having trouble Possible device malfunction. · Try turning off the device,
connecting my device. resetting the device,
· Make sure you are using the
manufacturer's cable.
· Make sure the USB cable is
properly inserted into the
device and the vehicle's USB
port.
321

USB/Media Issues
· Make sure that the device

does not have an auto-
install program or active
security settings.
SYNC does not recognize This is a device limitation. Make sure you are not
my device when I turn on the leaving the device in your
vehicle. vehicle during very hot or
cold temperatures.
Bluetooth audio does not This is a phone-dependent Make sure the device is
stream. feature. connected to SYNC and that
The device is not connected. you have pressed play on
your device.
SYNC does not recognize · Your music files may not · Make sure that all song
music that is on my device. contain the proper artist, details are populated.
song title, album or genre · Some devices require you
information. to change the USB settings
· The file may be corrupted. from mass storage to MTP
· The song may have copy- class.
right protection which does
not allow it to play.
SYNC is not playing the · You may be using the · Try using the proper name
album I think I have. wrong voice commands. listed on your media player.
· You may not be saying the For instance, if the album is
name exactly as it is saved. titled “Star Wars, the motion
· The system may not be picture soundtrack,” saying
"reading" the name the “Play album Star Wars”
same way you are saying it. won’t work, but saying “Play
album Star Wars the motion
picture soundtrack” will
work.
· MP3 files, normally have
four main attributes in the
mp3's ID3 tag field: Title,
Artist, Album and Genre.
Please note "Title" may not
be the same as the mp3
file's name.
322

USB/Media Issues
· The voice commands for

playing specified artist/
album/genre/title are
effective only for USB
devices. If your device
connected to SYNC via AUX
or bluetooth, these voice
commands are not effective.
All songs can not be played Possible device malfunction. Try resetting the SYNC
by voice commands. system, then try again.
Voice Command Issues
System does not respond to · You may be using the · This could be due to the
my voice. wrong voice commands. ambient noise inside the
· You may be speaking too vehicle. Make sure that other
soon or at the wrong time. passengers in the vehicle are
not speaking at the same
time that the system is
listening. Also, extraneous
sounds, like wind noise,
could interfere with the
system recognizing voice
commands.
· You might be speaking too
soon or speaking when the
system isn’t listening (for
example, during a prompt).
Make sure the system is in
listening state by verifying
that the icon “Listening” is in
the display before saying a
command to the system.
323

· Be aware of the system’s

sensitivities; yelling or
speaking the voice
commands too slowly does
not help. Remember to
speak the voice commands
with a normal smooth,
steady and confident voice.
System could not hear me. You may not be audible to Speak the voice commands
the system. clearly towards the micro-
phone.
SYNC does not understand · You may be using the · Review the phone voice
what I am saying. wrong voice commands. commands and the media
· You may be speaking too voice commands. See
soon or at the wrong time. Using SYNC™ With Your
Phone (page 294). See
Using SYNC™ With Your
Media Player (page 312).
SYNC does not understand · You may be using the · Review the media voice
the name of a song or artist. wrong voice commands. commands. See Using
· You may not be saying the SYNC™ With Your Media
name exactly as it is saved. Player (page 312).
· The system may not be · Say the song or artist
"reading" the name the exactly as they are listed. If
same way you are saying it. you say "Play Artist Prince"
the system does not play
music by Prince and the
Revolution or Prince and the
New Power Generation.
· Make sure you are saying
the complete title such as
"California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles".
· If the songs are saved in all
CAPS, you have to spell
them. LOLA requires you to
say "L-O-L-A".
324

· Do not use special charac-

ters in the title as the system
does not recognize them.
SYNC does not understand · You may be using the · Review the phone voice
or is calling the wrong wrong voice commands. commands. See Using
contact when I want to · You may not be saying the SYNC™ With Your Phone
make a call. name exactly as it is saved. (page 294).
· Contacts in your phone- · Make sure you are saying
book may be very short and the contacts exactly as they
similar, or they may contain are listed. For example, if a
special characters. contact is saved as Joe
· Your phonebook contacts Wilson, say "Call Joe
may be saved in CAPS. Wilson".
· The system works better if
you list full names such as
"Joe Wilson" rather than
"Joe".
· Do not use special charac-
ters such as 123 or ICE as the
system does not recognize
them.
AppLink issues
Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s)
AppLink Mobile Applica- An AppLink capable phone Ensure you have a compat-
tions: When I select "Find is not connected to SYNC. ible smartphone; an Android
New Apps," SYNC does not with OS 2.3 or higher or an
find any applications. iPhone 3GS or newer with
iOS 5.0 or higher. Addition-
ally, ensure your phone is
paired and connected to
325

AppLink issues
SYNC via Bluetooth in order

to find AppLink-capable
apps on your device. iPhone
users must also connect to
SYNC's USB port with an
Apple USB cable.
My phone is connected, but AppLink-enabled apps are Ensure you have down-
I still cannot find any apps. not installed and running on loaded and installed the
your mobile device. latest version of the app
from your phone's app store.
Ensure the app is running on
your phone. Some apps
require you to register or
login on the app on the
phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC"
setting, so check the app's
settings or service menu on
the phone.
My phone is connected, my Sometime apps do not Closing and restarting apps
app(s) are running, but I still properly close and re-open may help SYNC find the
cannot find any apps. their connection to SYNC, application if you cannot
over ignition cycles, for discover it inside the vehicle.
example. On an Android device, if
apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit'
option, select that then
restart the app. If the app
does not have that option,
you can also manually
"Force Close" the app by
going to the phone's settings
menu, selecting 'Apps.' then
finding the particular app
and choosing 'Force stop.'
Don't forget to restart the
app afterwards, then select
"Find New Apps" on SYNC.
326

AppLink issues
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to

force close an app, double
tab the home button then
swipe up on the app to close
it. Tab the home button
again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a
few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC's
Mobile App's Menu.
My Android phone is There is a bluetooth bug on Reset the Bluetooth on your
connected, my app(s) are some order versions of the phone by turning it off and
running, I restarted them, Android OS that may cause then turning Bluetooth back
but I still cannot find any apps that were found on on. If you are in your vehicle,
apps. your previous vehicle drive SYNC should be able to
to not be found again if you automatically re-connect to
have not turned off your phone if you press the
bluetooth. "Phone" button.
327

AppLink issues
My iPhone phone is The USB connection to Unplug the USB cable from
connected, my app is SYNC may need to be reset. the phone, wait a moment,
running, I restarted the app and plug the USB cable
but I still cannot find it on back in to the phone. After a
SYNC. few seconds, the app should
appear in SYNC's Mobile
Apps Menu. If not, "Force
Close" the application and
restart it.
I have an Android phone. I The bluetooth volume on Try increasing the Bluetooth
found and started my media the phone may be low. volume of the device by
app on SYNC, but there is no using the device's volume
sound or the sound is very control buttons which are
low. most often found on the
side of the device.
I can only see some of the Some Android devices have Force close or uninstall the
AppLink apps running on my a limited number of apps you do not want SYNC
phone listed in SYNC's bluetooth ports apps can to find. If the app has a "Ford
Mobile Apps Menu. use to connect. If you have SYNC" setting, disable that
more AppLink apps on your setting in the app's settings
phone than the number of or service menu on the
availble Bluetooth ports, you phone.
will not see all of your apps
listed in SYNC's mobile apps
menu.
328

SYNC™ 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
E142598
Note: This manual describes product • Entertainment, including AM/FM

features and options available throughout radio, DAB Radio (if equipped), or
the range, sometimes even before they are music on USB, SD Card, and other
generally available. It may describe options external devices
not fitted to the vehicle you have purchased. • Navigation assistance (if equipped),
SYNC 2 uses Bluetooth wireless including maps
technology to pass information between • Information such as traffic (if
your vehicle and your phone. You can use equipped), notification, calendar and
voice commands and other simple more through SYNC Application and
controls, such as steering wheel buttons, Services (if equipped)
to make and receive calls or listen to text
• Climate controls
messages. Whatever your phone can do,
SYNC lets you do so you can keep your • Settings
hands on the wheel and your eyes on the
road.
Like a universal remote control, SYNC
controls other systems besides your phone.
SYNC connects you to:
329

SYNC™ 2
SYNC is customized in each vehicle, so the WARNINGS

design is different, but the basics are the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
same. In vehicles with SYNC 2, the 8-inch attempting these operations. This is
touchscreen in the center console lets you important since while setting up or
view information and adjust Phone, changing some functions you might be
Entertainment, Navigation (if equipped), required to distract your attention away
and Climate settings. from the road and remove your hands from
Note: Make sure that you refer your device's the wheel.
user guide before using it with SYNC. Driving while distracted can result in
Note: Your SYNC system performs regular loss of vehicle control, crash and
system maintenance in the background injury. We strongly recommend that
while you are not using the car. you use extreme caution when using any
WARNINGS road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
Operating certain parts of this operation of your vehicle. We recommend
system while driving can distract against the use of any hand-held device
your attention away from the road, while driving and encourage the use of
and possibly cause an accident or other voice-operated systems when possible.
serious consequences. Do not change Make sure you are aware of all applicable
system settings or enter data non-verbally local laws that may affect the use of
(using your hands) while driving. Stop the electronic devices while driving.
A B
F E D
G C
E161891
330

SYNC™ 2
NAVIGATION
Item Message
Press to select any of the following:
A Phone
Message
B Navigation
My Home
C Climate
Favorites
D Settings
Previous Destinations
E Home
Place of Interest
F Information
Emergency
G Entertainment
Address
This system uses a four-corner strategy to Junction
provide quick access to several vehicle
features and settings. The touchscreen Town Center
provides easy interaction with your mobile
Map
phone, multimedia, climate control and
navigation system. The corners display any Edit Route
active modes within those menus, such as
phone status or the climate temperature. Cancel Route
Note: Some features are not available while
your vehicle is moving. CLIMATE
Note: Your system is equipped with a Press the corresponding icons to control
feature that allows you to access and the following options:
control audio features for 10 minutes after • Driver Settings.
you switch the ignition off (and no doors
open). • Recirculated Air.
• Auto.
PHONE
• Dual.
Press to select any of the following: • Passenger Settings.
Message
• A/C.
• Defrost.
Phone
Speed Dial
Phonebook
Call History
Messaging
Settings
331

SYNC™ 2
SETTINGS INFORMATION
E142607 E142608
Press to select any of the following: Press to select any of the following:
Message Message
Clock Traffic
Display Notifications
Sound Calendar
Vehicle Apps
Settings Where Am I?
Help
ENTERTAINMENT
HOME Press to select any of the following:
Message
E142613
AM
Press to access your home screen.
Depending on your vehicle’s option FM
package and software, your screens may
*
vary in appearance from the descriptions DAB
in this section. Your features may also be
limited depending on your market. Check CD
with an authorized dealer for availability. USB
BT Stereo
SD Card
Line In
*
If equipped.
332

SYNC™ 2
Using the Audio Controls

Depending on your vehicle, it may also have the following controls:
Power Switch the media features on or off.

Vol Adjust the volume of playing media.
Seek Use as you normally would in media modes.
Tune Use as you normally would in media modes.
Eject Eject CD from the entertainment system.
Display Press this button to switch the display screen off. Press again,
or touch the screen to switch the display screen on.
Source Touch the control repeatedly to switch between media
modes.
Sound Adjust the settings for:
Bass
Treble
Midrange
Set Balance and Fade
DSP
Speed Compensated Volume
Using the Steering Wheel Controls

Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you can use your steering wheel
controls to interact with the touchscreen
system.
• VOL: Control the volume of audio
output.
• Mute: Mute the audio output.
• Voice: Press to start a voice session.
Press again and hold to end a voice
session.
333

SYNC™ 2
• SEEK and PHONE ACCEPT: Safety Information

• While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets or press WARNING
and hold to seek between stations. Driving while distracted can result in
• While in USB or CD mode, press to loss of vehicle control, crash and
seek between tracks or press and injury. We strongly recommend that
hold to fast seek. you use extreme caution when using any
• While in phone mode, press to road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
answer a call, or to switch between operation of your vehicle. We recommend
calls. against the use of any hand-held device
• SEEK and PHONE REJECT: while driving and encourage the use of
• While in radio mode, press to seek voice-operated systems when possible.
between memory presets or press Make sure you are aware of all applicable
and hold to seek between stations. local laws that may affect the use of
• While in USB or CD mode, press to
seek between tracks or press and
hold to fast seek. • Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. Have an authorized dealer
• While in phone mode, press to end
check your vehicle.
a call, or to reject an incoming call.
• Do not operate playing devices if the
See Steering Wheel (page 40). power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
Cleaning the Touchscreen Display out of the way, so they do not interfere
Use a dry, clean, soft cloth. If dirt or with the operation of pedals, seats,
fingerprints are still visible, apply a small compartments or safe driving abilities.
amount of alcohol to the cloth. Do not pour • Do not leave playing devices in your
or spray alcohol onto the display. Do not vehicle during extreme conditions as it
use detergent or any type of solvent to could cause them damage. See your
clean the display. device's user guide for further
information.
Support
• For your safety, some SYNC functions
For further support, contact an authorized are speed-dependent. Their use is
dealer. For more information, visit the limited to when your vehicle is traveling
regional Ford website. at speeds under 8 km/h.
Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.
Speed-restricted Features
Some features of this system may be too
difficult to use while your vehicle is moving
so they are restricted from use unless your
vehicle is stationary.
See the following chart for more specific
examples.
334

SYNC™ 2
Restricted Features
System Functionality Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park
assist are active.
Text Messages Composing text messages.
Editing preset text messages.
Navigation Demo navigation route.
Special equipment is required to access

Privacy Information system data. Access to your vehicle's
SYNC module is also required. We will not
When a mobile phone connects to SYNC, access the system data for any purpose
the system creates a profile that links to other than as described without consent.
that mobile phone. The system creates the Examples where we can access system
profile to offer you more mobile features data are for a court order, where required
and to operate more efficiently. Among by law enforcement, other government
other things, this profile may contain data authorities or other third parties acting with
about your phonebook, text messages lawful authority. Other parties may seek
(read and unread) and call history. This to access the information independently
includes the history of calls when your of us. Further privacy information is
mobile phone was not connected to the available.
system. If you connect a media player, the
system creates and retains an index of Using Voice Recognition
supported media content. The system also
records a short development log of This system helps you control many
approximately 10 minutes of all recent features using voice commands. This
system activity. Use the log profile and allows you to keep your hands on the
other system data to improve the system wheel and focus on what is in front of you.
and help diagnose any problems that may The system provides feedback through
occur. audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
The mobile phone profile, media player
situation and the chosen level of
index and development log remain in the
interaction (voice settings).
system unless deleted. They are generally
accessible in your vehicle only when you The system also asks short questions
connect your mobile phone or media (confirmation prompts) when it is not sure
player. If you no longer plan to use the of your request or when there are multiple
system or your vehicle, we recommend you possible responses to your request.
complete a master reset to erase all stored When using voice commands, words and
information. See Information Displays icons may appear in the lower left status
(page 67).
bar indicating the status of the voice
command session.
335

SYNC™ 2
How to Use Voice Commands Accessing a List of Available Voice

Commands
To access a list of available voice
E142599 commands you can do either of the
The following are some of the voice following.
commands that you can say at any time
during a voice command session. Using the touchscreen, press:
Press the voice button and when Menu Item

prompted say: Settings
Voice command
Help
Main Menu Voice Command List
What Can I Say
Using the steering wheel control, press
Previous Page the voice button and when prompted
say one of the following:
Go Back
Voice Commands
Help
List of Commands
Helpful Hints
Radio List of Commands
• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from Phone List of Commands
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly Voice Instructions List of Commands
recognizing spoken voice commands.
Voice Command Settings
• After pressing the voice command icon,
wait until after the tone sounds and a These allow you to customize the level of
message appears before saying a voice system interaction, help and feedback. The
command. Any voice command spoken system defaults to standard interaction
prior to this does not register with the that uses candidate lists and confirmation
system. prompts as these provide the highest level
• Speak naturally, without long pauses of guidance and feedback.
between words.
• At any time, you can interrupt the
system while it is speaking by pressing
the voice command icon.
336

SYNC™ 2
Interaction Mode Novice In this mode the system provides

detailed interaction and guidance.
Advanced This mode has less audible interac-
tion and more tone prompts.
Confirmation Prompts The system uses these short questions to confirm your voice
command. If turned off, the system simply makes a best guess
as to what you requested. The system may still occasionally
ask you to confirm a voice command.
Phone Candidate Lists Candidate lists are lists of possible results from your voice
commands. The system creates these lists when it has the
Media Candidate Lists same confidence level of several options based on your voice
command.
Using Voice Commands with the

Using the touchscreen, press the Touchscreen Options
settings icon, then press:
The voice command system has a dual
Menu Item mode feature which allows you to switch
between using voice commands and
Voice Settings making on-screen selections. This is
available only when the system displays a
Voice Control list of candidates generated during a voice
Select from the following: command session. For example, this can
be used when entering a street address or
Interaction Mode trying to call a contact from a mobile
phone paired to the system.
Confirmation Prompts
Media Candidate Lists
Phone Candidate Lists
Voice Control Volume
337

SYNC™ 2
SETTINGS
A
B
C
D
E
F
E161968
Item Menu Item
A Clock
B Display
C Sound
D Vehicle
E Settings
F Help
Clock
E142607
Under this menu, you can set the clock,

access and adjust the display, sound and
vehicle settings as well as access settings
for specific modes or the help feature.
338

SYNC™ 2
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:

Settings Press the settings icon.

Clock Press the + or - to adjust the time.
From this screen, you can also make other adjustments such
as 12-hour or 24-hour mode, activate GPS time synchroniza-
tion and have the system automatically update new time
zones.
You can also switch the outside air temperature display off
and on. It appears at the top center of the touchscreen, next
to the time and date.
Note: You cannot manually set the date. Your vehicle’s GPS does this for you.
Note: If the battery has been disconnected, your vehicle needs to acquire a GPS signal to
update the clock. Once your vehicle acquires the signal, it may take a few minutes for the
update to display the correct time.
Display
E142607
You can adjust the display using the

touchscreen or the voice button on the
steering wheel controls.


Display
Then select from the following:
Mode Allows you to switch the display off. It also allows you to set the screen
to a certain brightness or have the system automatically change based
on the outside light level.
If you also select:
Auto These features will allow you to adjust the dimming of
your screen.
Night
Edit Wallpaper Allows you to display the default photo or upload your own.
339

SYNC™ 2
Auto Dim When set to On, lets you use the automatic dimming feature.
When set to Off you are able to adjust the brightness of the screen.
Brightness Make the screen display brighter or dimmer.
Auto Dim Allows you to adjust screen dimming as the outside lighting conditions
Manual Offset change from day to night.
Note: Photographs with extremely large

dimensions (such as 2048 x 1536) may not
E142599 be compatible and appear as a blank
You can adjust the display settings using (black) image on the display.
the touchscreen or the voice button on the The system allows you to upload and view
steering wheel controls. up to 32 photos.
To make adjustments using the voice
button, press the button and when
E142607
prompted, say:
To access, press the settings button.
Voice command
Display Settings
Uploading Photos for Your Home

Screen Wallpaper
Note: You cannot load photos directly from
your camera. You must access the photos
either from your USB mass storage device
or from an SD card.
To upload your photos, select:


Display
Edit Wallpaper Follow the system prompts to upload your photographs.
340

SYNC™ 2
Only the photograph(s), which meets the • Recommended dimensions: 800 x 384.
following conditions display:
• Compatible file formats are as follows:
Sound
JPG, GIF, PNG, BMP.
• Each file must be 1.5 MB or less.
E142607

Menu Item
Settings
Sound
Bass
Midrange
Treble
DSP occupancy
Adaptive volume
Note: Your vehicle may not have all of these sound settings.
Vehicle
E142607

Menu Item
Settings
Vehicle
Ambient light
Camera Settings
Enable Valet Mode
341

SYNC™ 2
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped) lighting illuminates the footwells, media

bin, door release handles, and the door
When you switch this feature on, ambient map pockets with a choice of colors.


Vehicle
Ambient light
• You can then touch the desired color.
• Use the scroll bar to increase or decrease the intensity.
• To switch the feature on or off, press the power button.
Camera Settings
E142607
This menu allows you to access settings

for your rear view camera.


Vehicle
Camera Settings
Enhanced Park Pilot
Rear Camera Delay
You can find more information on the rear view camera system in another chapter. See
Parking Aids (page 140).
342

SYNC™ 2
Enable Valet Mode No information is accessible until the

system is unlocked with the correct PIN.
Note: If the system locks, and you need to
E142607 reset the PIN, contact an authorized dealer.
Valet mode allows you to lock the system.


Vehicle
Enable Valet Mode Then enter a four digit PIN twice, as prompted.
Continue After you press Continue the system locks until you enter the
PIN again.
System
Settings
Access and adjust system settings, voice
features, as well as phone, navigation and E142607
wireless settings.


System
Language Select to have the touchscreen display and voice controls in
*
any of the selectable language options .
Distance Select to display units in kilometers or miles.
Temperature Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.
System Prompt Volume Adjust the volume of voice prompts from the system.
Touch Screen Button Select to have the system beep to confirm choices made
Beep through the touchscreen.
Keyboard Layout Have the touchscreen keyboard display in QWERTY or ABC
format.
343

SYNC™ 2
Install Applications Install any downloaded applications or view the current

software licenses.
Master Reset Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all personal
settings and personal data.
*
Language options are region dependent. Some languages are only supported on screen,
not via voice. Visit the regional Ford website for details.
Voice Control
E142607

Settings
Voice Control
Interaction Mode Standard interaction mode provides more detailed interaction
and guidance. Advanced mode has less audible interaction
and more tone prompts.
Confirmation Prompts Have the system ask you short questions if it has not clearly
heard or understood your request.
Note: Even with confirmation prompts turned off, the system
may occasionally ask you to confirm settings.
Media Candidate Lists Candidate lists are possible results from your voice
commands. The system simply makes a best guess at your
request with these turned off.
Phone Candidate Lists Candidate lists are possible results from your voice
commands. The system simply makes a best guess at your
request with these turned off.
Voice Control Volume This allows you to adjust the system’s voice volume level.
Media Player
E142607
344

SYNC™ 2


Media Player
Autoplay When this feature is on, the system automatically switches
to the media source upon initial connection. This allows you
to listen to music during the indexing process. When this
feature is off, the system does not automatically switch to
the inserted media source.
Bluetooth Devices Select to connect, disconnect, add or delete a device. You
can also set a device as your favorite so that the system
automatically attempts to connect to that device at every
ignition cycle.
Gracenote Database
® This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote
Info Database.
Gracenote Management With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplies
®
metadata information for your music files. This overrides

information from your device. This feature defaults to off.
Cover Art Priority With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplies cover
art for your music files. This overrides any art from your device.
This feature defaults to Media Player.
Navigation
E142607


Navigation
Map Prefer- Switch breadcrumbs on and off.
ences
345

SYNC™ 2
Have the system display your turn list top to bottom or bottom to top.
Switch the Parking POI notification on and off.
Route Pref- Select shortest route, fastest route or ecological route as your preferred
erences route. This route displays first.
Always use preferred route. If set to yes, the system only calculates a single
route. This speeds up your destination entry process.
Select a low, medium or high cost for the calculated ecological route. This
may incur a time penalty.
Have the system avoid freeways.
Have the system avoid toll roads.
Have the system avoid ferries or car trains.
Have the system avoid tunnels.
Navigation Have the system use guidance prompts.
Prefer-
ences Have the system automatically fill in Country information.
Hazard Spot Warning
Have the system activate hazard spot warning in countries where legally
allowed.
Traffic Have the system avoid traffic problems automatically.
Prefer-
ences Switch traffic alert notifications on or off.
Have the system display accident icons.
Have the system display traffic jam icons.
Have the system display closed roads.
Have the system display road work icons.
Have the system display incident icons.
Have the system display icons for areas where difficult driving conditions
may occur.
Have the system display icons for areas where snow and ice on the road
may occur.
Have the system display any smog icons.
346

SYNC™ 2
Have the system display weather warning icons.

Have the system display where there may be reduced visibility.
Have the system display icons to recommend switching on your radio for
traffic announcements.
Avoid Enter specific areas that you would like to avoid on planned navigation
Areas routes.
Phone
E142607


Phone
Bluetooth Devices Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as save
it as a favorite.
Bluetooth Switch Bluetooth on and off.
Do Not Disturb Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not ring inside
your vehicle. With this feature turned on, text message noti-
fications are also suppressed and do not ring inside your
vehicle.
Emergency Assistance Switch on or turn off the Emergency Assistance feature. See
Phone Ringer Select the type of notification for phone calls - ring tone,
beep, text to speech or silent.
Text Message Notifica- Select the type of notification for text messages - alert tone,
tion beep, text to speech, or have it be silent.
347

SYNC™ 2
Internet Data Connection If compatible with your phone, you can adjust your internet
data connection. Select to make your connection profile with
the personal area network or to switch off your connection.
You can also choose to adjust your settings or have the
system always connect, never connect when roaming, or
query on connect. Press ? for more information.
Manage Phonebook Access features, such as automatic phonebook download,
re-download your phonebook, add contacts from your phone
as well as delete or upload your phonebook.
Roaming Warning Have the system alert you when in Roaming mode.
feature, everyone in your vehicle can also

Wireless and Internet access the internet if you have a USB
mobile broadband connection inside your
vehicle, your phone supports personal area
E142607 networking or if you park outside a wireless
Your system has a Wi-Fi feature that hotspot.
creates a wireless network within your
vehicle, thereby allowing other devices
(such as personal computers or phones)
in your vehicle to speak to each other,
share files or play games. Using this Wi-Fi


Wireless & Internet
Wi-Fi Settings Wi-Fi Network (Client) Mode
Turns the Wi-Fi feature on and off in your vehicle. Make sure
you switch it on for connectivity purposes.
Choose a Wireless Network
Allows you to use a previously stored wireless network. You
can categorize by alphabetical listing, priority and signal
strength. You can also choose to search for a network,
connect to a network, disconnect from a network, receive
more information, prioritize a network or delete a network.
348

SYNC™ 2
Gateway (Access Point) Mode

Makes SYNC an access point for a phone or a computer when
turned on. This forms the local area network within your
vehicle for things, such as game playing, file transfer and
internet browsing. Press ? for more information.
Gateway (Access Point) Settings
Allows you to view and change settings for using SYNC as
the internet gateway.
Gateway (Access Point) Devices List
Allows you to view recent connections to your Wi-Fi system.
USB Mobile Broadband Instead of using Wi-Fi, your system can also use a USB mobile
broadband connection to access the internet. (You must
switch on your mobile broadband device on your personal
computer before connecting it to the system.) This screen
allows you to set up what is your typical area for your USB
mobile broadband connection. (USB mobile broadband
settings may not display if the device is already on.) You can
select the following:
Country
Carrier
Phone Number
User Name
Password
Bluetooth Settings Shows you the currently paired devices as well as giving you
your typical Bluetooth options to connect, disconnect, set as
favorite, delete and add device. Bluetooth is a registered
trademark of the Bluetooth SIG.
Prioritize Connection Choose your connection methods and change them as
Methods needed. You can select to change order and have the system
either always attempt to connect using a USB mobile
broadband or using Wi-Fi.
349

SYNC™ 2
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is the

certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Help
E142607
E142626


Help Select Help
System Inform- Touchscreen system serial number
ation
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Touchscreen system software version
Navigation system version
Map database version
Gracenote® Database Information and Library version
View Software View the licenses for any software and applications installed on your
Licenses system.
Driving Restric- Certain features are not accessible when your vehicle is moving.
tions
Emergency Switch on and off the Emergency Assistance feature. See Information
Assistance (page 369).
In Case of Emergency (ICE) speed dial Allows you to save up to two
numbers as ICE contacts for
quick access if there is an
emergency.
350

SYNC™ 2
The ICE contacts you select

appear at the end of the
Emergency Assistance call
process.
Edit Select to access your phone-
book and then select the
desired contacts. The
numbers then appear as
options on this screen for the
ICE 1 and ICE 2 buttons.
Voice View categorized lists of voice commands.
Command List

prompted say:
E142599
You can also access Help using the voice Voice command
commands. The system provides
allowable voice commands for the current Help
mode.
You can say help at any time to get
assistance with commands, menus or
other information.
351

SYNC™ 2
ENTERTAINMENT
A
B
G
C
D
E
H
F
E161892
Message Message and Description

Message Message and Description
G These buttons provide addi-
A AM tional controls for the radio or
media source. See the AM/FM
B FM radio controls table for more
C DAB information.
D CD H Radio memory presets and CD

controls.
E USB Note: Some features may not be available
F Touch this button to scroll in your area. Contact an authorized dealer
down for more options, such as for more information.
SD Card, BT Stereo and Line In.
You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.
AM/FM/DAB Radio
E142611
The following controls are available for

AM/FM/DAB radio
352

SYNC™ 2
Controls
Item Action and Description
AM Touch either tab to listen to the radio. To change between AM, FM

and DAB presets, just touch the AM, FM or DAB tab.
FM
DAB
Presets Save a station by pressing and holding one of the memory preset
areas. There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound
returns when finished.
Scan Touch this button to go to the next strong AM, FM or DAB radio
station. The light on the button illuminates when the feature is on.
Information (DAB When the info button is pressed, the system shows the
only) corresponding block number for the active DAB radio
station. If you press the info button a second time the
radio station name is displayed again.
Tune For AM and FM only, touch this button to manually enter the desired
station number. Touch Enter when you are done.
TA Turn on to receive traffic announcements.
Browse See a list of all currently available radio stations.
Options
Sound Settings Touch this button to adjust settings for:

Bass
Midrange
Treble
DSP occupancy
Adaptive volume
Radio Text This allows you to view the information
broadcast by FM stations.
353

SYNC™ 2
AST AST (Autostore) allows you to have the

system automatically store the six
strongest stations in your current location.
News announcement With news announcement option active,
the system interrupts active audio source
to provide incoming news announcements,
if currently tuned station (or last tuned
station in case of other media active)
supports news.
Regional With Regional option active, the system
stays on the regional subprogram instead
of switching to a different frequency with
better reception.
Alternate Frequency With alternative frequency option active,
the system re-tunes to a different
frequency with better reception for the
same station.
Service Linking With Service Linking active, the system
automatically switches from DAB to FM, in
case DAB becomes unavailable.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these Radio Voice Commands
sound settings.
E142599
Press the voice button and when prompted say:

Voice command
Radio
Then you can say a command similar to the following:
FM Say a frequency or preset.
DAB Say a preset.
Off
help
354

SYNC™ 2
CD To access, press the lower left corner

on the touchscreen, then select:
Menu Item
E142611
CD
Insert your CD then select:

Repeat Touch this button to repeat the currently playing track, all tracks
on the disc or switch the feature off if already on.
Shuffle Touch this button to play the tracks or entire albums in random
order, or switch the feature off if already on.
Scan Touch this button to hear a brief sampling of all available tracks.
More Info Touch this button to see disc information.
Browse Touch this button to look through all available CD tracks.
CD Voice Commands
To adjust the Sound Settings, select:
Menu Item
E142599
Options
If you are listening to a CD, press the voice
Sound Settings button on the steering wheel controls.
When prompted, say any of the following
Then any of the following: commands.
Bass
Midrange
Treble
DSP occupancy
Adaptive volume
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these

sound settings.
355

SYNC™ 2
If you are not listening to a CD, press

the voice button and, after the tone,
say:
Voice command
CD
When listening to a CD you can say

many commands. Following are a few
examples of what you can say.
E175710
Voice command
To access and play music from your device,
Play press the lower left corner of the
touchscreen.
Pause
Next Track
Previous Track
Help
SD Card Slot and USB Port

The SD card slot and USB port are located E142620
in the Media Hub. See Navigation (page
376). SD logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
SD Card USB Port
Note: Your SD card slot is spring-loaded.

To remove the SD card, press the card in
and the system ejects it. Do not attempt to
pull the card to remove it as this could cause
damage.
Note: The navigation system also uses this
card slot. See Navigation (page 376).
E175711
To access and play music from your device,

press the lower left corner of the
touchscreen.
356

SYNC™ 2
This feature allows you to plug in media Playing Music from Your Device
playing devices, memory sticks, flash drives
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they Note: The system is capable of indexing up
support this feature. to 30,000 songs.
E142611
Insert your device and select:

USB Once the system recognizes your USB or SD card you can
then select from the following options:
SD Card
Repeat This feature replays the currently playing song or album.
Shuffle Touch this button to play music on the selected album or
folder in random order.
Similar Music This feature allows you to choose music similar to what is
currently playing.
More Info Touch this button to see disc information, for example current
track, artist name, album and genre.
Options Touch this button to view and adjust various media settings.
Sound
Sound settings allows you to adjust settings for:

Bass
Midrange
Treble
DSP
Adaptive volume
Media Player Settings Allows you to select more settings, which is under Media
Player. See Settings (page 338).
357

SYNC™ 2
Device Information Displays software and firmware information about the

currently connected media device.
Update Media Index Indexes your device when you connect it for the first time and
each time the content changes (for example adding or
removing tracks) to make sure you have the latest voice
commands available for all media on the device.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings.
If you want to view song information, for

Browse example Title, Artist, File, Folder, Album,
This feature allows you to view the and Genre, touch the on-screen album art.
contents of the device. It also allows you
to search by categories, for example genre,
artist or album.
You can also select:

What’s Playing? To hear how the system pronounces the current band and
song. This can be helpful when using voice commands to
make sure the system correctly plays your request.
USB and SD Card Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button and when prompted say:

Voice command
SD Card
USB
Then commands such as the following:
Browse
Next Track
Pause
Play Say the name of what you would like to listen to such as a band, song,
album or playlist.
358

SYNC™ 2
Voice command
Play Artist ___ *
Play Song ___ *
Similar Music
Help
*
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it could be the name of anything, such as a group,
artist or song. For example you could say "Play artist The Beatles" or "Play song Penny
Lane".
Supported Media Players, Formats

and Metadata Information E142611
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any To access, press the lower left corner
digital media player, including iPod, on the touchscreen, then select:
Zune™, plays from device players, and
most USB drives. Supported audio formats Message
include MP3, WMA, WAV and AAC.
BT audio
It is also able to organize your indexed
media from your playing device by Bluetooth Audio Voice Commands
metadata tags. Metadata tags, which are
descriptive software identifiers embedded
in the media files, provide information
about the file. E142599
The voice system allows you to control
If your indexed media files contain no
your media with a simple voice command.
information embedded in these metadata
For example to change songs, press the
tags, SYNC may classify the empty
voice button and follow the system
metadata tags as unknown.
prompts.
Bluetooth Audio Line In
The system allows you to stream audio
over your vehicle's speakers from your WARNINGS
connected, Bluetooth-enabled cell phone. Driving while distracted can result in
359

SYNC™ 2
WARNINGS To use the auxiliary input jack feature,

against the use of any handheld device make sure that your portable music player
while driving and encourage the use of is designed for use with headphones and
voice-operated systems when possible. that it is fully charged. You also need an
Make sure you are aware of all applicable audio extension cable with stereo male
local laws that may affect the use of 1/8-inch (3.5 millimeter) connectors at
electronic devices while driving. both ends.
For safety reasons, do not connect 1. Switch off the engine, radio and
or adjust the settings on your portable music player. Set the parking
portable music player while your brake and put the transmission in
vehicle is moving. position Park (P).
2. Attach one end of the audio extension
Store the portable music player in a
cable to the headphone output of your
secure location, such as the center
player and the other end into the
console or the glove box, when your
adapter in one of the jack inside the
vehicle is moving. Hard objects may
center console.
become projectiles in a crash or sudden
stop, which may increase the risk of serious 3. Press the lower left corner on the
injury. The audio extension cable must be touchscreen. Select either a tuned FM
long enough to allow the portable music station or a CD (if there is a CD already
player to be safely stored while your loaded into the system).
vehicle is moving. 4. Adjust the volume as desired.
5. Turn the portable music player on and
adjust the volume to half of the
maximum.
6. Press the lower left corner on the
touchscreen. Then select:
Menu Item
Line In You should hear audio

from your portable music
player although it may be
low.
E191800
Your auxiliary input jack allows you to play

music from your portable music player over
your vehicle's speakers. The jack is located
in the center console.
Press the lower left corner of the
touchscreen, and then select Line In.
360

SYNC™ 2
Menu Item • Do not set the portable music player's

volume level higher than is necessary
Adjust the sound on your to match the volume of the CD or FM
portable music player until radio as this causes distortion and
it reaches the level of the reduces sound quality.
FM station by switching • If the music sounds distorted at lower
back and forth between listening levels, turn the portable music
the controls. player volume down. If the problem
persists, replace or recharge the
Troubleshooting batteries in the portable media player.
• Do not connect the audio input jack to • Control the portable media player in
a line level output. The jack only works the same manner when used with
correctly with devices that have a headphones, as the auxiliary input jack
headphone output with a volume does not provide control (such as Play
control. or Pause) over the attached portable
media player.
PHONE
A
B
C
D
E
F
E161968
Item Menu Item
A Phone
B Speed dial
C Phonebook
361

SYNC™ 2
Item Menu Item
D Call History
E Messaging
F Settings
Hands-free calling is one of the main Pairing Your Cell Phone for the
features of SYNC. Once you pair your cell First Time
phone, you can access many options using
the touchscreen or voice commands. While WARNING
the system supports a variety of features, Driving while distracted can result in
many are dependent on your cell phone’s loss of vehicle control, crash and
functionality. injury. We strongly recommend that
At a minimum, most cell phones with you use extreme caution when using any
Bluetooth wireless technology support the device that may take your focus off the
following functions: road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
• Answering an incoming call.
against the use of any handheld device
• Ending a call. while driving and encourage the use of
• Dialing a number. voice-operated systems when possible.
• Call waiting notification. Make sure you are aware of all applicable
• Caller ID. electronic devices while driving.
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook The first thing you must do to use the
download, are phone-dependent features. phone features of SYNC is to pair your
To check your phone’s compatibility, see Bluetooth-enabled cell phone with SYNC.
your phone’s user manual or the local Ford This allows you to use your cell phone in a
website. hands-free manner.
Touch the upper left corner of the touchscreen:

Pair phone
Find SYNC Follow the on-screen instructions.
Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cell phone
is in the correct mode. See your cell phone’s manual if
necessary.
1. Select SYNC and a six-digit PIN appears on your device.
2. If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, it does
not support Secure Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN
displayed on the touchscreen. Skip the next step.
362

SYNC™ 2
3. When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm

that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cell phone.
4. The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
5. SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options. For
more information on your cell phone's capability, see your
cell phone's manual and visit the website.
Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones

Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and
that your cell phone is in the correct mode.
See your device's manual if necessary.
To pair a subsequent cell phone, select:

Phone
Settings
Bluetooth Devices
Add Device
Find SYNC Follow the on-screen instructions.
Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cell phone
is in the correct mode. See your cell phone’s manual if
necessary.
1. Select SYNC and a six-digit PIN appears on your device.
2. If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, it does
not support Secure Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN
displayed on the touchscreen. Skip the next step.
3. When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm
that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cell phone.
4. The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
5. SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options. For
more information on your cell phone's capability, see your
cell phone's manual and visit the website.
363

SYNC™ 2
Making Calls
E142599
To reject the call, select:
Press the voice button and say a Menu Item
command similar to the following:
Reject
Voice command
Note: You can also reject the call by
Call pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
Dial
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC logs
You can say the name of a person from it as a missed call.
your phone book to call or a say a number
to dial. For example "Call Jenny" or "Dial Phone Menu Options
867-5309".
Press the top left corner on the
touchscreen to select from the following
options:
To end the call or exit phone mode, press Menu Item Action and Description
and hold the phone button.
Phone Touch this button to access
Receiving Calls the on-screen numerical pad
to enter a number and place
During an incoming call, an audible tone a call. During an active call,
sounds. Call information appears in the you can also choose any of
display if it is available. these options:
Mute Call
Hold Call
To accept the call, select: Hands-free off
Menu Item Join Calls
Accept End
Note: You can also accept the call by Speed dial Select to call stored
pressing the phone button on the steering contacts.
wheel.
364

SYNC™ 2
Menu Item Action and Description Menu Item Action and Description
Phone- Touch this button to access Favorites Quick Dial

book and call any contacts in your
previously downloaded Messaging Send text messages using
phonebook. The system the touchscreen. See Text
places the entries in alpha- Messaging later in this
betical categories summar- section.
ized at the top of the screen Settings Touch this button to access
To turn on contact picture various phone settings, for
settings, if your device example turning Bluetooth
supports this feature, select: on and off, managing your
phonebook and more. See
Phone Phone Settings later in this
section
Settings
Manage Phonebook Text Messaging
Display Photos from Phone- WARNING
book
Local laws may prohibit some or all
Certain smart phones may of the text messaging functions while
support transferring street driving. Check your local road rules
addresses when listed with before using these functions.
phonebook contact informa-
tion. If your cell phone Note: Downloading and sending text
supports this feature, you messages using Bluetooth are cell
can select and use these phone-dependent features.
addresses as destinations
and save them as favorites. Note: Certain features in text messaging
are speed-dependent and not available
Call Note: This is a cell phone- when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over
History dependent feature. If your 8 km/h.
cell phone does not support Note: SYNC does not download read text
downloading call history messages from your cell phone.
using Bluetooth, SYNC keeps
track of calls made with the You can send and receive text messages
SYNC system. using Bluetooth, read them aloud and
After you connect your translate text messaging acronyms, for
Bluetooth-enabled cell example LOL.
phone to SYNC, you can
access any previously dialed,
received or missed calls. You
can also choose to save
these to:
365

SYNC™ 2
Menu Item
Touch the top left corner of the display,
then select: View
Menu Item Delete
Phone Delete All
Messaging
Composing a Text Message
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature.
Listen (speaker icon) It is unavailable when your vehicle is
traveling at speeds over 8 km/h.
Dial
Note: Downloading and sending text
Send Text messages using Bluetooth are cell
phone-dependent features.
To compose and send a text message, select:

Phone
Messaging
Send Text Enter a cell phone number or choose from your phonebook.
Edit Text Allows you to customize the pre-defined message or create
a message on your own.
Send Sends the message as it is.
You can then preview the message, verify Messages

the recipient as well as update the
message list, and send it to a connected I’m ahead of schedule, so I’ll be there
device, for example a USB drive. early.
I’m outside.
Text Message Options
I’ll call you when I get there.
Messages
OK
I’ll call you back in a few minutes.
Yes
I just left, I’ll be there soon.
No
Can you give me a call?
Thanks
I’m on my way.
I’m running a few minutes late.
366

SYNC™ 2
Messages Messages
Stuck in traffic. LOL

Call me later.
Receiving a Text Message
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen displays a
pop-up with the caller name and ID, if supported by your cell phone. You can select:
View To view the text message.

Listen For SYNC to read the message to you.
Dial To call the contact.
Ignore To exit the screen.
Phone Settings
To enter the phone settings menu select:
Phone
Settings
Bluetooth Devices Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as save
it as a favorite.
Bluetooth To turn Bluetooth off or on.
Do Not Disturb If you want all calls to go directly to your voicemail and not
ring in the vehicle. When this feature is on, text message
notifications do not ring inside the cabin either.
Emergency Assistance Switch the Emergency Assistance feature on or off. See
Phone Ringer Select the ring tone you want to hear when you receive a call.
Choose from possible system ring tones, your currently paired
cell phone’s ring tone, a beep, text-to-speech or a silent
notification.
367

SYNC™ 2
Text Message Notifica- Select a text message notification, if supported by your cell
tion phone. Choose from possible system alert tones, text-to-
speech or silent.
Internet Data Connection If your cell phone is compatible, use this screen to adjust your
internet data connection. Select to make your connection
profile with the personal area network or to turn off your
connection. You can also choose to adjust your settings or
have the system always connect, never connect when
roaming or query on connect. Press ? for more information.
Manage Phonebook To access features such as automatic phonebook download,
re-download your phonebook, add contacts from your cell
phone as well as delete or upload your phonebook.
Roaming Warning To have the system alert you when your cell phone is in
roaming mode.
Phone Voice Commands
E142599

prompted say any of the following or a
similar command:
Voice command
Call Voicemail
Listen to Message
Reply to Message
Pair Phone
Help
368

SYNC™ 2
INFORMATION
A
B
C
D
E
E161889
Item Menu Item
A Traffic
B Notifications
C Calendar
D Apps
E Where Am I?
If your vehicle is equipped with

Navigation, touch the I
E142608
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, touch the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.
369

SYNC™ 2
Notifications
Press Notifications, and then choose from any of the following services:
View The complete message

Delete The message
Delete All Messages
This screen displays any system messages WARNINGS

(such as an SD card fault). emergency call if you can do it yourself.
Dial emergency services immediately to
Note: The system alerts you to any
avoid a delayed response time. If you do
messages by turning the information icon
not hear Emergency Assistance within five
yellow. After you read or delete the
seconds of the crash, the system or cell
messages, the icon returns to white.
phone may be damaged or non-functional.
Calendar
Note: Before setting the feature on, please
Press Calendar. You can view the current read the important notice about the
calendar by day, week or month. Emergency Assistance feature and the
Emergency Assistance privacy notice later
Emergency Assistance (If Equipped) in this section for important information.
WARNINGS Note: When you switch Emergency
For this feature to work, your mobile Assistance on or off, the setting applies to
phone must be Bluetooth capable all paired mobile phones. If you switch
and compatible with the system. Emergency Assistance off and a previously
paired phone connects when you switch the
Always place your mobile phone in ignition on, either a voice message plays, a
a secure location inside your vehicle. display message or icon is shown, or both.
Failure to do so may cause serious
injury to someone or damage the phone Note: Every mobile phone operates
which could prevent Emergency Assistance differently. While Emergency Assistance
from working correctly. works with most mobile phones, some
mobile phones may experience difficulties
Unless the Emergency Assistance using this feature.
setting is set to on prior to a collision,
the system will not attempt to place Note: Ford is not the provider of the
an emergency call which could delay the emergency services contacted by SYNC
response time, potentially increasing the when an emergency call is initiated. Ford
risk of serious injury or death. Do not wait does not accept any liability in relation to
for Emergency Assistance to make an the provision, quality or timeliness of those
services.
370

SYNC™ 2
If a crash deploys an airbag or triggers the Off with reminder provides a display and
fuel pump shut off, the system may voice reminder when your cell phone
contact emergency services by dialing the connects and your vehicle starts.
emergency assistance number through a Off without reminder provides a display
paired and connected cell phone. For more reminder only without a voice reminder
information about the system and when your cell phone connects.
Emergency Assistance, visit the regional
Ford website. To make sure that Emergency Assistance
works correctly:
Note: In case of an emergency, Emergency
Assistance, as a means of communication • The system must have power and be
aid, can help you contact specific rescue working correctly at the time of the
departments of public security. Emergency crash and during feature activation and
Assistance does not implement the rescue use.
operations. The local public security • You must switch on the feature before
department deploys specific rescue a crash.
operations according to the actual situation. • You must have a cell phone connected
See Supplementary Restraints System to the system.
(page 25). Important information • In certain countries, it may be
regarding airbag deployment is in this necessary to have a valid and
chapter. registered SIM card with credit in order
See Roadside Emergencies (page 179). to place and maintain an emergency
Important information regarding the fuel call.
pump shut-off is in this chapter. • A connected cell phone must have the
ability to make and maintain an
Setting Emergency Assistance On outgoing call at the time of the crash.
From the information menu you can select • A connected cell phone must have
Apps and go to the Emergency Assistance adequate network coverage, battery
settings by pressing on Emergency Assist power and signal strength.
. In the upcoming menu you can switch the • Your vehicle must have battery power.
feature On or Off .
Note: This feature only works in countries
If you switch on this feature, a confirmation or regions where SYNC Emergency
message appears in the display when your Assistance can call the local emergency
cell phone connects and your vehicle services. Visit the regional Ford website for
starts. details.
Menu Item
Apps
Emergency Assistance
On
If you switch off this feature, the dialog

allows you to set a reminder.
371

SYNC™ 2
In the Event of a Crash • The language the system uses to

interact with the occupants of your
Note: Not every crash deploys an airbag or vehicle may differ from the language
triggers the fuel pump shut off (which may used to deliver information to the
turn on Emergency Assistance). However, emergency operator.
if Emergency Assistance is triggered the
system tries to contact the emergency • After the delivery of the introductory
services. If a connected cell phone sustains message the voice line opens so that
damage or loses connection to the system, you can speak hands-free with the
it searches for and tries to connect to any emergency operator.
available previously paired cell phone. The • When the line is connected, you must
system attempts to dial the local be prepared to provide your name,
emergency services. phone number and location
Before making a call: information immediately.
• The system provides a short time Note: While the system provides
window (approximately 10 seconds) information to the emergency operator, the
to cancel the call. If you do not cancel system plays a message letting you know
the call, the system attempts to dial it is sending important information. It then
the local emergency assistance service. lets you know when the line is open to start
hands-free communication.
• The system plays a message letting
you know when it attempts to make an Note: During an Emergency Assistance call,
emergency call. You can cancel the call an emergency priority screen appears which
by selecting the relevant button or by contains vehicle GPS coordinates when
pressing the end call button on the available.
steering wheel. Note: It is possible that GPS location
• If you do not cancel the call and SYNC information is not available at the time of
makes a successful call, an the crash; in this case, Emergency
introductory message plays for the Assistance will still attempt to place an
emergency operator. After this emergency call.
message, there is hands-free Note: It is possible that the emergency
communication between your vehicle's services will not receive the GPS
occupants and the operator. coordinates; in this case, hands-free
During a call: communication with an emergency operator
• An introductory message plays for the is available.
emergency operator. Note: The emergency operator may also
• Emergency Assistance uses your receive information from the cellular
vehicle GPS or cellular network network such as cell phone number, cell
information when available to phone location and cell phone carrier name
determine the most appropriate independent from SYNC Emergency
language to use. It alerts the Assistance.
emergency operator of the crash and
delivers the introductory message. This
may include your vehicle GPS
coordinates.
372

SYNC™ 2
Emergency Assistance may not work Important Information about the

if: Emergency Assistance Feature
• Your cell phone or Emergency Emergency Assistance does not currently
Assistance hardware sustains damage call emergency services in some countries.
in the crash.
Visit the regional Ford website for latest
• The vehicle battery or the system has details.
no power.
• A crash ejects your cell phone from Emergency Assistance Privacy Notice
your vehicle. When you switch on Emergency
• You do not have a valid and registered Assistance, it may disclose to emergency
SIM card with credit in your cell phone. services that your vehicle has been in a
• You are in a country or region where crash involving the deployment of an
the SYNC Emergency Assistance airbag or activation of the fuel pump shut
cannot place the call. Visit the regional off. This feature has the capability to
Ford website for details. disclose your location information to the
emergency operator or other details about
your vehicle or crash to provide the most
appropriate emergency services.
If you do not want to disclose this
information, do not switch on the feature.
Where Am I?
For vehicle location and information select:

Information
Help
Then select:
Where Am I? View your vehicle's current location.
If your vehicle is equipped with navigation
this screen will show your location
coordinates and give your location inform-
ation like the current street address.
If your vehicle is not equipped with naviga-
tion, you will only see the location coordin-
ates.
373

SYNC™ 2
CLIMATE and option package, your climate screen

may look different from this screen.
Press the lower right corner on the Note: You can switch temperature units
touchscreen to access your climate control between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
features. Depending on your vehicle line Settings (page 338).
B K
C L
E206105
D E F G H I J
A Power: Touch to switch the system off and on. Outside air cannot enter your
vehicle when you switch off the system.
B Passenger settings: Touch + or – to adjust the temperature.
Touch the heated seat icon to turn the heated seat off and on.
Touch MyTemp to select your preset temperature setpoint. Touch and hold
MyTemp to save a new preset temperature setpoint.
C Manual airflow distribution controls:
Floor and Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents,
demister vents and floor vents.
Panel: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
Panel and Floor: Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, demister
vents, floor vents.
Floor: Distributes air through the demister vents and floor vents.
Defrost: Touch to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice. When on, defrost
provides outside air to reduce window fogging and distributes air through the
windshield defroster vents and demister vents.
374

SYNC™ 2
D Heated windscreen: Press the button to clear the windscreen of thin ice and
fog.
E MAX Defrost: Touch to switch on maximum defrosting. Outside air flows
through the windshield vents, air conditioning automatically turns on, fan adjusts
to the highest speed and temperature is set to the full heat position. You can
also use this setting to defog or clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
The heated rear window also automatically turns on when you select MAX
Defrost.
F Heated rear window: Turns the heated rear window on and off.
G AUTO: Touch to switch on automatic operation. Then set the temperature
using the temperature control. Fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning
operation, and outside or recirculated air are automatically adjusted to heat or
cool the vehicle to maintain the desired temperature. You can also turn off dual
zone mode by pressing and holding the button for more than two seconds.
H A/C: Touch to switch the air conditioning on or off. To improve the time to
reach a comfortable temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open
until you feel cold air through the air vents. Use A/C with recirculated air to
improve cooling performance and efficiency.
I MAX A/C: Touch for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically turns on and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest speed. Touch again for normal A/C
operation. MAX A/C is more economical and efficient than normal A/C mode.
J Recirculated air: Touch to switch between outside air and recirculated air.
The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This can reduce
the time needed to cool the interior(when used with A/C) and reduce unwanted
odours from entering your vehicle.
K Driver settings: Touch + or – to adjust the temperature.
DUAL:Touch to switch on independent driver and passenger temperature
control.
Touch the heated seat icon to turn the heated seat off and on.
L Fan speed: Touch + or - to adjust fan speed.
Note: MAX DefrostTo prevent window Climate Control Voice Commands

fogging, you cannot select recirculated air
when defrost is on. Press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When
E142599 prompted, say any of the
following or a similar command:
375

SYNC™ 2
Voice commands
Climate AUTO On
Climate Off
Climate, Set Temperature Adjust the temperature to between 15°C - 30°C
Note: The SD card slot is spring-loaded. To

remove the SD card, just push the card in
NAVIGATION and release it. Do not attempt to pull the
card out to remove it; this could cause
Note: The navigation SD card must be in damage.
the SD card slot to operate the navigation
system. If you need a replacement SD card, Your navigation system is comprised of
contact an authorized dealer. two main features, destination mode and
map mode.
Note: Handle the SD card with care to avoid
contamination or damage. Never touch the
metal contacts. Do not clean the SD card
with anything other than a soft cloth. Never
attempt to use an SD card that has been
cracked, deformed or repaired using
adhesive, as doing to may damage the
equipment. Do not put on any sticker or
write anything on the SD card. Do not
attempt to alter the data contained on the
SD card in any way.
Destination Mode
To set a destination press the green corner of your touchscreen, then press:
Menu Item
Dest.
Choose any of the following:
My Home
Favourites
Previous Destinations
Place of interest
Emergency
Address
376

SYNC™ 2
Menu Item
Junction
Town centre
*
Map
Edit Route
Cancel Route
*
- For some vehicles it may display "Latitude/Longitude".
To set your destination, enter the

necessary information into the highlighted
text fields (in any order).
For an address destination entry, press:

Go Pressing this button makes the address

location appear on the map.
To choose a previous destination, press:

Previous Destinations The last 20 destinations you have selected

appear.
Once you have chosen your destination press:

Set as Destination This will start the route calculation and guidance.
Avoid Areas Your pre-set selections are considered when your route is
calculated. For more information on these selections, see
Setting Your Navigation Preferences later in this chapter.
377

SYNC™ 2
Michelin Travel Guide (If Equipped) Main categories

The Michelin travel guide is a service which Shopping
provides additional information about
certain places of interests (POI) such as Financial
restaurants, hotels and touristic sites (if
available). Entertainment & Arts
If you have paired your phone with the Emergency
system, you can press the phone button
to directly establish a call with the selected Recreation & Sports
POI. Community
Note: Not all features are available in all
languages and countries. Government
Health & Medicine
Places of Interest (POI)
Categories Domestic Services
Main categories To expand these listings, press the + in

front of the listing.
Fuel Station
The system also allows you to sort
Parking alphabetically or by distance.
Food, Drink and Dining Setting Your Navigation
Automotive Preferences
Travel and Transportation Select settings for the system to

take into account when planning
E142607
your route.
To access the settings options, press:

Menu Item
Settings
Navigation
Then select any of the following:
378

SYNC™ 2
Map Preferences
Menu Item Second Level Messages, Actions and Descriptions
Map Preferences
Breadcrumbs Display your vehicle’s previously traveled route with white dots.
You can switch this feature:
On Off
Turn List Format Have the system display your turn list:
Top to Bottom Bottom to Top
Parking POI Notification When parking point of interest notification is on, the icons
display on the map when you get close to your destination.
This may not be very useful in dense areas, and may clutter
the map when other points of interest are displayed. Set the
automatic parking point of interest notification. You can switch
this feature:
On Off
Route Preferences
Route Prefer-
ences
Preferred Route Choose to have the system display your chosen route type.
Shortest Fastest Eco
Always use Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system only
Preferred Route calculates one route based on preferred route setting.
When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculate
only one route to the desired destination.
Eco Time Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the
Penalty setting, the longer the time allotment is for the route.
Avoid When activated, you can choose to have the system avoid motorways,
toll roads, ferries, car trains and tunnels when planning your route.
379

SYNC™ 2
Navigation Preferences
Navigation Preferences
Guidance Prompts Select the type of prompts the system uses.
Auto-fill country Have the system automatically fill in the country based on
the information already entered into the system. You can
switch this feature:
On Off
Hazard Spot Warning Have the system activate hazard spot warning in countries
where legally allowed.
Traffic Preferences
Traffic Preferences
Avoid Traffic Problems You can choose how you want the system to handle traffic
problems along your route.
Automatic Have the system reroute you to avoid
traffic incidents that develop and
impact the current route. The system
does not provide a traffic alert notific-
ation
Manual Have the system always provide a
traffic alert notification for traffic
incidents along the planned route.
You have a choice to accept or ignore
the notification before making the
route deviation.
Traffic alert notification Turn the traffic alert notifications on or off.
Traffic Icon Settings You can choose to turn on any of the following Traffic alert
categories.
Have the system display accident information.
380

SYNC™ 2
Have the system display traffic jam information.

Have the system display closed roads.
Have the system display road work information.
Have the system display incident information.
Have the system display icons for areas where difficult driving
conditions may occur.
Have the system display icons for areas where snow and ice
on the road may occur.
Have the system display any smog information.
Have the system display weather warning information.
Have the system display where there may be reduced visibility.
Have the system display icons to recommend switching on
your radio for traffic announcements.
Avoid Area
Avoid Areas Choose areas which you want the system to avoid when
calculating a route for you.
Add Once you make a selection, the system tries to avoid the
area(s) if possible for all routes. To program an entry, press:
Delete To delete a section choose the listing on the screen. The screen
will change, then press:
2D city maps show detailed outlines of

Map Mode buildings, visible land use and land
elements and detailed railway
Press the green bar in the upper right area infrastructure for the most essential cities
of the touchscreen to view map mode. Map around the globe. These maps also contain
mode shows advanced viewing comprised features, such as town blocks, building
of both 2D city maps as well as 3D footprints and railways.
landmarks (when available).
381

SYNC™ 2
3D landmarks appear as clear, visible

objects that are typically recognizable and You can also select the following
have a certain tourist value. The 3D options:
landmarks appear in 3D map mode only.
Coverage varies and improves with Menu Items
updated map releases. View Switches between
Change the appearance of the full map, street list
map display by repeatedly and exit view in
E174016
pressing the arrow button in the route guidance.
upper left corner of the screen. It toggles
between three different map modes: Menu Displays a pop-up
box that allows
Heading up (2D map) This direct access to
always shows the direction of navigation settings.
forward travel to be upward on
E142642 the screen. This view is available Press the speaker button on the
for map scales up to 5 km/h. map to mute route guidance.
E174017 When the light on the button
North up (2D map) always illuminates, the feature is on. The speaker
shows the northern direction to button appears on the map only when
be upward on the screen. route guidance is active.
E142643
Re-center the map by pressing
3D map mode provides an
this icon whenever you scroll the
elevated perspective of the map. E146188
map away from your vehicle’s
This viewing angle can be
current location.
E142644 adjusted and the map can be
rotated 180 degrees by touching
the map twice, and then dragging your Auto Zoom
finger along the shaded bar with arrows at Press the green bar to access map mode,
the bottom of the map. then select the + or - zoom button to bring
up the zoom level and Auto buttons on the
touchscreen. When you press Auto, Auto
Zoom turns on and Auto displays in the
bottom left corner of the screen in the map
scale. The map zoom level then
synchronizes with vehicle speed. The
slower your vehicle is traveling, the farther
the map zooms in; the faster your vehicle
is traveling, the farther the map zooms out.
To switch the feature off, just press the +
or - button again.
In 3D mode, rotate the map view by
swiping your finger across the shaded bar
with the arrows.
382

SYNC™ 2
The ETA box under the zoom buttons POI (Point Of Interest) icons
appears when a route is active and indicate locations of any point
displays the distance and time to your of interest categories you choose
destination. If the button is pressed, a pop E142650 to display on the map. You can
up appears with the destination listed (and choose to display three point of
waypoint if applicable) along with mileage interest categories on the map at one time.
and time to destination. You may also
select to have either the estimated time Starting point indicates the
to reach your destination or your estimated starting point of a planned route.
arrival time.
E142651
Map Icons
Waypoint indicates the location
Vehicle mark shows the current of a waypoint on the map. The
location of your vehicle. It stays number inside the circle is
in the center of the map display, E142652 different for each waypoint and
E142646 except when in scroll mode. represents the position of the
waypoint in the route list.
Scroll cursor allows you to
scroll the map; the fixed icon is Destination symbol indicates
in the center of the screen. The the ending point of a planned
E142647 map position closest to the route.
cursor is in a window on the top E142653
center part of the screen.
Next maneuver point indicates
Address book entry default the location of the next turn on
icon(s) indicates the location the planned route.
on the map of an address book E142654
E142648 entry. This is the default symbol
No GPS symbol indicates that
shown after the entry has been
insufficient GPS satellite signals
stored to the Address Book by any method
are available for accurate map
other than the map. You can select from
E142655 positioning. This icon may
any of the 22 icons available. You can use
display under normal operation
each icon more than once.
in an area with poor GPS access.
Home indicates the location on
the map currently stored as the Quick-touch Buttons
home position. You can only
save one address from the When in map mode, touch anywhere on
E142649
Address Book as your Home the map display to access the following
entry. You cannot change this icon. options:
383

SYNC™ 2
Set as Dest Touch this button to select a scrolled location on the map as
your destination. You may scroll the map by pressing your index
finger on the map display. When you reach the desired location,
simply let go and then touch this button.
Set as Waypoint Touch this button to set the current location as a waypoint.
Save to Favorites Touch this button to save the current location to your favorites.
POI Icons Touch this button to select icons to display on the map. You
can select up to three icons to display on the map at the same
time. You can switch these features:
On Off
Cancel Route Touch this button to cancel the active route.
Traffic List Touch this button to show a list of traffic incidents.
HERE is the digital map provider for the

View/Edit Route navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to
Access these features when a route is HERE by going to www.here.com. HERE
active: evaluates all reported map errors and
Menu Item
responds with the result of their
investigation by e-mail.
View Route
Navigation Map Updates
Edit Destination/Waypoints
Annual navigation map updates are
Edit Turn List available for purchase through your
dealership.
Detour
Navigation Voice Commands
Edit Route Preferences
When in navigation mode, press
Edit Traffic Preferences the voice button on the steering
Cancel Route
E142599 wheel controls.
384

SYNC™ 2
After the tone, say any of the following or a similar command:

Voice command
Destination
Zoom out
Zoom in
Where Am I
help
The following commands can only be used when a navigation route is active:
Voice command
Reroute
Cancel Route
Show whole route
Repeat last instruction
Show route summary
Traffic Information
One-shot Destination Street Address
Traffic information is provided through an
To set a destination with voice arrangement with Intelematics Australia
commands, you can say: Pty Ltd. For license terms and conditions
Voice Command Action and Descrip-
refer to the Appendices. Traffic information
tion
is based on data provided with the
permission of one or more third parties.
Find an Address The system asks Please note: Should Ford's arrangement
you to say the full with Intelematics Australia Pty Ltd cease
address and for any reason, the ongoing provision of
displays an traffic information cannot be guaranteed.
example on-screen.
SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING
You can then speak the address naturally,
such as "One two three four Main Street, Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
Any town". should questions arise, please refer to the
tables below.
385

SYNC™ 2
To check your mobile phone's website.

compatibility, visit the regional Ford
Mobile phone issues
Issue Possible cause Possible solution
A lot of back- The audio control

ground noise settings on your mobile Refer to your device's manual about audio
during a phone phone may be affecting adjustments.
call. SYNC performance.
During a call, I Try switching off your mobile phone, reset-

can hear the ting it or removing the battery, then trying
Possible mobile phone again.
other person
malfunction.
but they cannot Make sure that the microphone for SYNC
hear me. is not set to off.
This is a mobile phone-
Check your mobile phone's compatibility.
dependent feature.
Try switching off your mobile phone, reset-
SYNC is not ting it or removing the battery, then trying
able to down- again.
load my phone- Possible mobile phone Try pushing your phonebook contacts to
book. malfunction. SYNC by selecting the option to add.
You must switch on your mobile phone and
the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC.
Try pushing your phonebook contacts to
SYNC by selecting the option to add.
The system
says "Phone- If the missing contacts are stored on your
book down- SIM card, try moving them to your mobile
Limitations on your phone's memory.
loaded" but my
mobile phone's capab-
SYNC phone- Remove any pictures or special ring tones
ility.
book is empty or associated with the missing contact.
is missing
contacts. You must switch on your mobile phone and
the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC.
386

SYNC™ 2
Mobile phone issues

dependent feature.
Try switching off your mobile phone, reset-
ting it or removing the battery, then trying
again.
I am having Try deleting your device from SYNC and
trouble deleting SYNC from your device, then trying
connecting my again.
mobile phone to Possible mobile phone
SYNC. malfunction. Always check the security and auto accept
prompt settings relative to the SYNC
Bluetooth connection on your mobile
phone.
Update your mobile phone's firmware.
Switch off the auto download setting.
dependent feature.
Possible mobile phone Try switching off your mobile phone, reset-
malfunction. ting it or removing the battery, then trying
again.
iPhone • Go to your mobile phone's Settings.
• Go to the Bluetooth Menu.
• Make sure the connection status shows
Not Connected.
Text messaging • Press the blue circle to enter the next
is not working menu.
on SYNC.
• Turn on Show Notifications.
• Turn on Sync Contacts.
Your iPhone is now set up to forward

incoming text messages to SYNC.
Repeat these steps for every other Sync
vehicle you are connected to.
Your iPhone will only forward incoming text
messages to SYNC if it is unlocked.
Replying to text messages using SYNC is
not supported by iPhone.
387

SYNC™ 2
Mobile phone issues
Text messages from third party applica-

tions are not supported.
Your mobile phone must support down-
loading text messages through Bluetooth
to receive incoming text messages.
This is a mobile phone- Access the text messaging menu of SYNC
dependent feature. to see if your mobile phone supports the
Audible text feature. Press the PHONE button and then
messages do scroll and select the option for text
not work on my messaging, then press OK.
mobile phone.
Because each mobile phone is different,
refer to your device's manual for the
This is a mobile phone specific mobile phone you are pairing. In
limitation. fact, there can be differences between
mobile phones due to brand, model, service
provider and software version.
USB and media issues
Try switching off the device, resetting it or

removing the battery, then try again.
Make sure you are using the manufacturer's
I am having cable.
trouble Possible device malfunc- Make sure you correctly insert the USB
connecting my tion. cable into the device and the vehicle USB
device. port.
Make sure that the device does not have
an auto-install program or active security
settings.
SYNC does not
Make sure you are not leaving the device in
recognize my
This is a device limitation. your vehicle during very hot or cold
device when I
temperatures.
start my vehicle.
388

SYNC™ 2
USB and media issues
This is a device-
Bluetooth audio dependent feature.
Make sure you connect the device to SYNC
does not
The device is not and press play on your device.
stream.
connected.
Your music files may not
contain the correct artist, Make sure that all song details are popu-
song title, album or genre lated.
SYNC does not information.
recognize music
The file may be Try replacing the corrupt file with a new
that is on my
corrupted. version.
device.
The song may have Some devices require you to change the
copyright protection that USB settings from mass storage to media
does not allow it to play. transfer protocol class.
When I connect From the iPhone or iPod Touch music now
my iPhone or playing screen, select the audio device
iPod Touch airplay icon at the very bottom of your
through the iPhone or iPod Touch screen.
USB and
This is a device limitation. To listen to the iPhone or iPod Touch
Bluetooth Audio
at the same through Bluetooth Audio, select SYNC.
time, I some- To listen to the iPhone or iPod Touch
times do not through USB, select Dock Connector.
hear any sound.
Voice command issues
SYNC does not Review the mobile phone voice commands

understand and the media voice commands at the
what I am You may be using the beginning of their respective sections.
saying. wrong voice commands. Refer to the audio display during an active
voice session to find a list of voice
commands there.
You may be speaking too Start speaking when the second SYNC tone
soon or at the wrong sounds and the system is ready for voice
time. input.
389

SYNC™ 2
You may not be speaking Make sure you speak into the microphone.
into the microphone It is located in the headliner just above the
windshield.
You may be using the Review the media voice commands at the
wrong voice commands. beginning of the media section.
Say the song or artist exactly as the system
saved it. If you say, "Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music by Prince and
the Revolution or Prince and the New
Power Generation.
You may not be saying
SYNC does not
the name exactly as the Make sure you are saying the complete title
understand the
system saved it. such as "California remix featuring Jennifer
name of a song
Nettles".
or artist.
If the song titles are in capital letters, you
have to spell them. LOLA requires you to
say "L-O-L-A".
The system may not be
reading the name the Try to avoid using special characters as the
same way you are saying system does not recognize them.
it.
Review the mobile phone voice commands
at the beginning of the mobile phone
section.
You may be using the You can also use the mobile phone and
wrong voice commands. media suggestion lists to get a list of
SYNC does not possible suggestions when the system
understand or is cannot fully understand you. See Using
calling the Voice Recognition (page 291).
wrong contact
when I want to Make sure you are saying the name exactly
make a call. as the system saved it. For example, if the
You may not be saying contact name is Joe Wilson, say "Call Joe
the name exactly as the Wilson".
system saved it. The system works better if you list full
names such as "Joe Wilson" rather than
"Joe".
390

SYNC™ 2
Contacts in your phone-

book may be very short
Try to avoid using special characters as the
and similar or they may
system does not recognize them.
contain special charac-
ters.
Your phonebook If the contacts are in capital letters, you
contacts may be in have to spell them. JAKE requires you to
capital letters. say "Call J-A-K-E".
SYNC applies the phonetic pronunciation
rules of the selected language to the
The SYNC voice contact names stored on your mobile
control system phone.
You may be saying the
is having trouble Helpful Hint: You can select your contact
foreign names using the
recognizing manually. Press PHONE. Select the option
currently selected
foreign names for phonebook and then contact name.
language for SYNC.
stored on my Press the soft-key option to hear it. SYNC
mobile phone. will read the contact name to you, giving
you some idea of the pronunciation it is
expecting.
The SYNC voice
control system
is having trouble SYNC applies the phonetic pronunciation
recognizing rules of the selected language to the names
You may be saying the
foreign tracks, stored on your media player or USB flash
foreign names using the
artists, albums, drive. It is able to make some exceptions
currently selected
genres and for very popular artist names (for example,
language for SYNC.
playlist names U2) such that you can always use the
from my media English pronunciation for these artists.
player or USB
flash drive.
SYNC uses a synthetically generated voice
The system rather than pre-recorded human voice.
generates voice SYNC offers several new voice control
prompts and features for a wide range of languages.
SYNC uses text-to-
the pronunci- Dialing a contact name directly from the
speech voice prompt
ation of some phonebook without pre-recording (for
technology.
words may not example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
be accurate for track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
my language. from your media player (for example," play
artist Madonna").
391

SYNC™ 2
General
SYNC only supports four languages in a

The language single module for text display, voice control
selected for the and voice prompts. The country where you
instrument bought your vehicle dictates the four
cluster and languages based on the most popular
information and SYNC does not support languages spoken. If the selected language
entertainment the currently selected is not available, SYNC remains in the
display does not language for the instru- current active language.
match the ment cluster and inform- SYNC offers several new voice control
SYNC language ation and entertainment features for a wide range of languages.
(phone, USB, display. Dialing a contact name directly from the
Bluetooth phonebook without pre-recording (for
audio, voice example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
control and track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
voice prompts). from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").
SYNC with Touchscreen System Reset
The system has a System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of your
Sync unit is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase any
information previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook, call
history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold
the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. After
approximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow a 1-2 minutes for the system
reset to complete. You may then resume using the SYNC system.
392

Appendices
ELECTROMAGNETIC WARNINGS
COMPATIBILITY The RF (radio frequency) transmitter
equipment (e.g. cellular telephones,
WARNINGS amateur radio transmitters etc.) may
only be fitted to your vehicle if they comply
Your vehicle has been tested and with the parameters shown in the table
certified to legislations relating to below. There are no special provisions or
electromagnetic compatibility conditions for installations or use.
(72/245/EEC, UN ECE Regulation 10 or
other applicable local requirements). It is Do not mount any transceiver,
your responsibility to ensure that any microphones, speakers, or any other
equipment you have fitted complies with item in the deployment path of the
applicable local legislations. Have any airbag system.
equipment fitted by properly trained Do not fasten antenna cables to
technicians. original vehicle wiring, fuel pipes and
brake pipes.
Keep antenna and power cables at
least 10 centimetres (4 inches) from
any electronic modules and airbags.
1 2 3
E205691
Frequency Band Maximum output power Watt (Peak Antenna Positions

MHz RMS)
1 - 30 100 W 3
50 - 54 100 W 2
68 – 87.5 50 W 2
142 – 176 50 W 2
393

Appendices
Frequency Band Maximum output power Watt (Peak Antenna Positions

MHz RMS)
220 - 225 50 W 2
380 – 512 50 W 2
806 – 870 10 W 2
1200 – 1400 10 W 2
1710 – 1885 10 W 2
1885 – 2025 10 W 2
Note: After the installation of RF and "online" or electronic

transmitters, check for disturbances from documentation ("MS SOFTWARE")
and to all electrical equipment in the are protected by international
vehicle, both in the standby and transmit intellectual property laws and treaties.
modes. The MS SOFTWARE is licensed, not
sold. All rights reserved.T
Check all electrical equipment:
• The MS SOFTWARE may interface with
• with the ignition ON
and/or communicate with, or may be
• with the engine running later upgraded to interface with and/or
• during a road test at various speeds. communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
Check that electromagnetic fields MOTOR COMPANY. The additional
generated inside the vehicle cabin by the software and systems of FORD
transmitter installed do not exceed MOTOR COMPANY origin, as well as
applicable human exposure requirements. associated media, printed materials,
and "online" or electronic
END USER LICENSE documentation ("FORD SOFTWARE")
are protected by international
AGREEMENT intellectual property laws and treaties.
The FORD SOFTWARE is licensed, not
SYNC™ End User License sold. All rights reserved.
Agreement (EULA)
• You have acquired a device ("DEVICE")
that includes software licensed by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY from an
affiliate of Microsoft Corporation
("MS") . Those installed software
products of MS origin, as well as
associated media, printed materials,
394

Appendices
• The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORD Description of Other Rights and

SOFTWARE may interface with and/or Limitations
communicate with, or may be later
upgraded to interface with and/or • Speech Recognition: If the
communicate with additional software SOFTWARE includes speech
and/or systems provided by third party recognition component(s), you should
software and service suppliers. The understand that speech recognition is
additional software and services of an inherently statistical process and
third party origin, as well as associated that recognition errors are inherent in
media, printed materials, and "online" the process. Neither FORD MOTOR
or electronic documentation ("THIRD COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
PARTY SOFTWARE") are protected by liable for any damages arising out of
international intellectual property laws errors in the speech recognition
and treaties. The THIRD PARTY process.
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All • Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
rights reserved. Decompilation and Disassembly:
• The MS SOFTWARE, FORD You may not reverse engineer,
SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY decompile, or disassemble nor permit
SOFTWARE hereinafter collectively others to reverse engineer, decompile
and individually will be referred to as or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
"SOFTWARE". and only to the extent that such activity
is expressly permitted by applicable
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END law notwithstanding this limitation.
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
• Limitations on Distributing,
DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY
Copying, Modifying and Creating
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
Derivative Works: You may not
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
distribute, copy, make modifications
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL
to or create derivative works based on
CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO
the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY
extent that such activity is expressly
PREVIOUS CONSENT).
permitted by applicable law
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This notwithstanding this limitation.
EULA grants you the following license: • Single EULA: The end user
• You may use the SOFTWARE as documentation for the DEVICE and
installed on the DEVICE and as related systems and services may
otherwise interfacing with systems contain multiple EULAs, such as
and/or services provide by or through multiple translations and/or multiple
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third media versions (e.g., in the user
party software and service providers. documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the SOFTWARE.
395

Appendices
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may • Consent to Use of Data: You agree

permanently transfer your rights under that MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
this EULA only as part of a sale or MOTOR COMPANY, third party
transfer of the DEVICE, provided you software and systems suppliers, their
retain no copies, you transfer all of the affiliates and/or their designated agent
SOFTWARE (including all component may collect and use technical
parts, the media and printed materials, information gathered in any manner as
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the part of product support services related
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the to the SOFTWARE or related services.
recipient agrees to the terms of this MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, MOTOR COMPANY, third party
any transfer must include all prior software and services suppliers, their
versions of the SOFTWARE. affiliates and/or their designated agent
• Termination: Without prejudice to any may use this information solely to
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY improve their products or to provide
or MS may terminate this EULA if you customized services or technologies to
fail to comply with the terms and you. MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
conditions of this EULA. MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and systems suppliers, their
• Security Updates/Digital Rights affiliates and/or their designated agent
Management: Content owners use may disclose this information to others,
the WMDRM technology included in but not in a form that personally
your DEVICE to protect their identifies you.
intellectual property, included
copyrighted content. Portions of the • Internet-Based Services
SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use Components: The SOFTWARE may
WMDRM software to access contain components that enable and
WMDRM-protected content. If the facilitate the use of certain
WMDRM software fails to protect the Internet-based services. You
content, content owners may ask acknowledge and agree that MS,
Microsoft to revoke the SOFTWARE's Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR
ability to use WMDRM to play or copy COMPANY, third party software and
protected content. This action does service suppliers, their affiliates and/or
not affect unprotected content. When their designated agent may
your DEVICE downloads licenses for automatically check the version of the
protected content, you agree that SOFTWARE and/or its components
Microsoft may include a revocation list that you are utilizing and may provide
with the licenses. Content owners may upgrades or supplements to the
require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE SOFTWARE that may be automatically
on your DEVICE to access their content. downloaded to your DEVICE.
If you decline an upgrade, you will not • Additional Software/Services: The
be able to access content that requires SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
the upgrade. COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, their affiliates and/or their
designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
396

Appendices
supplements, add-on components, or • Links to Third Party Sites: The MS

Internet-based services components SOFTWARE may provide you with the
of the SOFTWARE after the date you ability to link to third party sites through
obtain your initial copy of the the use of the SOFTWARE. The third
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental party sites are not under the control of
Components"). MS, Microsoft Corporation, their
affiliates and/or their designated
If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party
agent. Neither MS nor Microsoft
software and services suppliers provide or
Corporation nor their affiliates nor their
make available to you Supplemental
designated agent are responsible for
Components and no other EULA terms are
(i) the contents of any third party sites,
provided along with the Supplemental
any links contained in third party sites,
Components, then the terms of this EULA
or any changes or updates to third
shall apply.
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates other form of transmission received
and/or their designated agent make from any third party sites. If the
available Supplemental Components, and SOFTWARE provides links to third
no other EULA terms are provided, then party sites, those links are provided to
the terms of this EULA shall apply, except you only as a convenience, and the
that the MS, Microsoft Corporation or inclusion of any link does not imply an
affiliate entity providing the Supplemental endorsement of the third party site by
Component(s) shall be the licensor of the MS, Microsoft Corporation, their
Supplemental Component(s). affiliates and/or their designated
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft agent.
Corporation, their affiliates and/or their • Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
designated agent reserve the right to You recognize your obligation to drive
discontinue without liability any responsibly and keep attention on the
Internet-based services provided to you or road. You will read and abide with the
made available to you through the use of DEVICE operating instructions
the SOFTWARE. particularly as they pertain to safety
and assumes any risk associated with
the use of the DEVICE.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the
DEVICE on media such as a ROM chip, CD
ROM disk(s) or via web download or other
means, and is labeled "For Upgrade
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE as a
replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with
this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
397

Appendices
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant

All title and intellectual property rights in you any rights in connection with any
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not trademarks or service marks of FORD
limited to any images, photographs, MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft
animations, video, audio, music, text and Corporation, third party software or service
"applets" incorporated into the providers, their affiliates or suppliers.
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support
materials, and any copies of the for the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS,
SOFTWARE, are owned by MS, Microsoft its parent corporation Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or Corporation, or their affiliates or
their affiliates or suppliers. The subsidiaries. For product support, please
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may refer to FORD MOTOR COMPANY
not copy the printed materials instructions provided in the documentation
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title for the DEVICE. Should you have any
and intellectual property rights in and to questions concerning this EULA, or if you
the content which may be accessed desire to contact FORD MOTOR
through use of the SOFTWARE is the COMPANY for any other reason, please
property of the respective content owner refer to the address provided in the
and may be protected by applicable documentation for the DEVICE.
copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no No Liability for Certain Damages:
rights to use such content. All rights not EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
specifically granted under this EULA are MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THRID PARTY
reserved by MS, Microsoft Corporation, SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND
software and service providers, their THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
affiliates and suppliers. Use of any on-line LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
services which may be accessed through CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
respective terms of use relating to such CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
services. If this SOFTWARE contains PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
documentation that is provided only in LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
electronic form, you may print one copy of REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
such electronic documentation. PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS,
MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You THEIR AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO
subject to U.S. and European Union export
HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
$250.00).
applicable international and national laws
that apply to the SOFTWARE, including • THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, THAN THOSE THAT MAY EXPRESSLY
as well as end-user, end-use and BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and VEHICLE.
other governments. For additional
information, see
http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
398

Appendices
End User Notice WARNING

Microsoft® Windows® Mobile for Operating certain parts of this
Automotive Important Safety system while driving can distract
Information your attention away from the road,
and possibly cause an accident or other
This system Ford SYNC contains software serious consequences. Do not change
that is licensed to Manufacturer FORD system settings or enter data non-verbally
MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of (using your hands) while driving. Stop the
Microsoft Corporation pursuant to a license vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
agreement. Any removal, reproduction, attempting these operations. This is
reverse engineering or other unauthorized important since while setting up or
use of the software from this system in changing some functions you might be
violation of the license agreement is strictly required to distract your attention away
prohibited and may subject you to legal from the road and remove your hands from
action. the wheel.
Read and follow instructions: Before
using your Windows Automotive- based General Operation
system, read and follow all instructions
and safety information provided in this end Voice Command Control: Functions
user manual ("User's Guide"). Not within the Windows Automotive-based
following precautions found in this User's system may be accomplished using only
Guide can lead to an accident or other voice commands. Using voice commands
serious consequences. while driving allows you to operate the
system without removing your hands from
Keep User's Guide in vehicle: When kept
the wheel.
in the vehicle, the User's Guide will be a
ready reference for you and other users Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
unfamiliar with the Windows access any function requiring a prolonged
Automotive-based system. Please make view of the screen while you are driving.
certain that before using the system for Pull over in a safe and legal manner before
the first time, all persons have access to attempting to access a function of the
the User's Guide and read its instructions system requiring prolonged attention. Even
and safety information carefully. occasional short scans to the screen may
be hazardous if your attention has been
diverted away from your driving task at a
critical time.
Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume
excessively. Keep the volume at a level
where you can still hear outside traffic and
emergency signals while driving. Driving
while unable to hear these sounds could
cause an accident.
399

Appendices
Use of Speech Recognition Functions: • The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORD

Speech recognition software is inherently SOFTWARE may interface with and/or
a statistical process which is subject to communicate with, or may be later
errors. It is your responsibility to monitor upgraded to interface with and/or
any speech recognition functions included communicate with additional software
in the system and address any errors. and/or systems provided by third party
software and service suppliers. The
additional software and services of
END USER LICENSE third party origin, as well as associated
AGREEMENT media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation ("THIRD
SYNC / SYNC2 End User License PARTY SOFTWARE") are protected by
Agreement (EULA) international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The THIRD PARTY
• You have acquired a device ("DEVICE") SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
that includes software licensed by Ford rights reserved.
Motor Company and its affiliates
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY") from an • The MS SOFTWARE, FORD
affiliate of Microsoft Corporation SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY
("MS") . Those installed software SOFTWARE hereinafter collectively
products of MS origin, as well as and individually will be referred to as
associated media, printed materials, "SOFTWARE".
and "online" or electronic IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
documentation ("MS SOFTWARE") USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
are protected by international DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY
intellectual property laws and treaties. THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
The MS SOFTWARE is licensed, not SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
sold. All rights reserved. LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL
• The MS SOFTWARE may interface with CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO
and/or communicate with, or may be THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY
later upgraded to interface with and/or PREVIOUS CONSENT).
communicate with additional software GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
and/or systems provided by FORD EULA grants you the following license:
MOTOR COMPANY. The additional
software and systems of FORD • You may use the SOFTWARE as
MOTOR COMPANY origin, as well as installed on the DEVICE and as
associated media, printed materials, otherwise interfacing with systems
and "online" or electronic and/or services provide by or through
documentation ("FORD SOFTWARE") FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third
are protected by international party software and service providers.
intellectual property laws and treaties.
The FORD SOFTWARE is licensed, not
sold. All rights reserved.
400

Appendices
Description of Other Rights and • SOFTWARE Transfer: You may

Limitations permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or
• Speech Recognition: If the transfer of the DEVICE, provided you
SOFTWARE includes speech retain no copies, you transfer all of the
recognition component(s), you should SOFTWARE (including all component
understand that speech recognition is parts, the media and printed materials,
an inherently statistical process and any upgrades, and, if applicable, the
that recognition errors are inherent in Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR recipient agrees to the terms of this
COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,
liable for any damages arising out of any transfer must include all prior
errors in the speech recognition versions of the SOFTWARE.
process.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering, other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Decompilation and Disassembly: or MS may terminate this EULA if you
You may not reverse engineer, fail to comply with the terms and
decompile, or disassemble nor permit conditions of this EULA.
others to reverse engineer, decompile
or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except • Security Updates/Digital Rights
and only to the extent that such activity Management: Content owners use
is expressly permitted by applicable the WMDRM technology included in
law notwithstanding this limitation. your DEVICE to protect their
intellectual property, included
• Limitations on Distributing, copyrighted content. Portions of the
Copying, Modifying and Creating SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use
Derivative Works: You may not WMDRM software to access
distribute, copy, make modifications WMDRM-protected content. If the
to or create derivative works based on WMDRM software fails to protect the
the SOFTWARE, except and only to the content, content owners may ask
extent that such activity is expressly Microsoft to revoke the SOFTWARE's
permitted by applicable law ability to use WMDRM to play or copy
notwithstanding this limitation. protected content. This action does
• Single EULA: The end user not affect unprotected content. When
documentation for the DEVICE and your DEVICE downloads licenses for
related systems and services may protected content, you agree that
contain multiple EULAs, such as Microsoft may include a revocation list
multiple translations and/or multiple with the licenses. Content owners may
media versions (e.g., in the user require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE
documentation and in the software). on your DEVICE to access their content.
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you If you decline an upgrade, you will not
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of be able to access content that requires
the SOFTWARE. the upgrade.
401

Appendices
• Consent to Use of Data: You agree supplements, add-on components, or

that MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD Internet-based services components
MOTOR COMPANY, third party of the SOFTWARE after the date you
software and systems suppliers, their obtain your initial copy of the
affiliates and/or their designated agent SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
may collect and use technical Components").
information gathered in any manner as If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party
part of product support services related software and services suppliers provide or
to the SOFTWARE or related services.
make available to you Supplemental
MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
Components and no other EULA terms are
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
provided along with the Supplemental
software and services suppliers, their
Components, then the terms of this EULA
affiliates and/or their designated agent
shall apply.
may use this information solely to
improve their products or to provide If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates
customized services or technologies to and/or their designated agent make
you. MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD available Supplemental Components, and
MOTOR COMPANY, third party no other EULA terms are provided, then
software and systems suppliers, their the terms of this EULA shall apply, except
affiliates and/or their designated agent that the MS, Microsoft Corporation or
may disclose this information to others, affiliate entity providing the Supplemental
but not in a form that personally Component(s) shall be the licensor of the
identifies you. Supplemental Component(s).
• Internet-Based Services FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft
Components: The SOFTWARE may Corporation, their affiliates and/or their
contain components that enable and designated agent reserve the right to
facilitate the use of certain discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services. You Internet-based services provided to you or
acknowledge and agree that MS, made available to you through the use of
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR the SOFTWARE.
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, their affiliates and/or
their designated agent may
automatically check the version of the
SOFTWARE and/or its components
that you are utilizing and may provide
upgrades or supplements to the
SOFTWARE that may be automatically
downloaded to your DEVICE.
• Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, their affiliates and/or their
designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
402

Appendices
• Links to Third Party Sites: The MS INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:

SOFTWARE may provide you with the All title and intellectual property rights in
ability to link to third party sites through and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
the use of the SOFTWARE. The third limited to any images, photographs,
party sites are not under the control of animations, video, audio, music, text and
MS, Microsoft Corporation, their "applets" incorporated into the
affiliates and/or their designated SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
agent. Neither MS nor Microsoft materials, and any copies of the
Corporation nor their affiliates nor their SOFTWARE, are owned by MS, Microsoft
designated agent are responsible for Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or
(i) the contents of any third party sites, their affiliates or suppliers. The
any links contained in third party sites, SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
or any changes or updates to third not copy the printed materials
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
other form of transmission received and intellectual property rights in and to
from any third party sites. If the the content which may be accessed
SOFTWARE provides links to third through use of the SOFTWARE is the
party sites, those links are provided to property of the respective content owner
you only as a convenience, and the and may be protected by applicable
inclusion of any link does not imply an copyright or other intellectual property
endorsement of the third party site by laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
MS, Microsoft Corporation, their rights to use such content. All rights not
affiliates and/or their designated specifically granted under this EULA are
agent. reserved by MS, Microsoft Corporation,
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly: FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party
You recognize your obligation to drive software and service providers, their
responsibly and keep attention on the affiliates and suppliers. Use of any on-line
road. You will read and abide with the services which may be accessed through
DEVICE operating instructions the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
particularly as they pertain to safety respective terms of use relating to such
and assumes any risk associated with services. If this SOFTWARE contains
the use of the DEVICE. documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: such electronic documentation.
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
DEVICE on media such as a ROM chip, CD acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
ROM disk(s) or via web download or other subject to U.S. and European Union export
means, and is labeled "For Upgrade jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes applicable international and national laws
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE as a the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
replacement copy for the existing as well as end-user, end-use and
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
this EULA, including any additional EULA other governments. For additional
terms accompanying the upgrade information, see
SOFTWARE. http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
403

Appendices
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant Adobe

you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD Contains Adobe® [Flash® Player] or
MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft [AIR®] technology by Adobe Systems
Corporation, third party software or service Incorporated. This [Licensee Product]
providers, their affiliates or suppliers. contains [Adobe® Flash® Player]
[Adobe® AIR®] software under license
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support from Adobe Systems Incorporated,
for the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS, Copyright ©1995-2009 Adobe
its parent corporation Microsoft Macromedia Software LLC. All rights
Corporation, or their affiliates or reserved. Adobe, Flash and AIR are
subsidiaries. For product support, please trademarks of Adobe Systems
refer to FORD MOTOR COMPANY Incorporated.
instructions provided in the documentation
for the DEVICE. Should you have any End User Notice
questions concerning this EULA, or if you
desire to contact FORD MOTOR Microsoft® Windows® Mobile for
COMPANY for any other reason, please Automotive Important Safety
Information
refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICE. This system Ford SYNC contains software
No Liability for Certain Damages: that is licensed to Manufacturer FORD
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY Microsoft Corporation pursuant to a license
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, agreement. Any removal, reproduction,
MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND reverse engineering or other unauthorized
THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO use of the software from this system in
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, violation of the license agreement is strictly
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL prohibited and may subject you to legal
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN action.
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR Read and follow instructions: Before
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS using your Windows Automotive- based
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY system, read and follow all instructions
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL and safety information provided in this end
PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS, user manual ("User's Guide"). Not
MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR following precautions found in this User's
THEIR AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY Guide can lead to an accident or other
AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO serious consequences.
HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.
Keep User's Guide in vehicle: When kept
$250.00).
in the vehicle, the User's Guide will be a
• THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER ready reference for you and other users
THAN THOSE THAT MAY EXPRESSLY unfamiliar with the Windows
BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW Automotive-based system. Please make
VEHICLE. certain that before using the system for
the first time, all persons have access to
the User's Guide and read its instructions
and safety information carefully.
404

Appendices
WARNING Use of Speech Recognition Functions:

Speech recognition software is inherently
Operating certain parts of this a statistical process which is subject to
system while driving can distract errors. It is your responsibility to monitor
your attention away from the road, any speech recognition functions included
and possibly cause an accident or other in the system and address any errors.
serious consequences. Do not change
system settings or enter data non-verbally Navigation Features: Any navigation
(using your hands) while driving. Stop the features included in the system are
vehicle in a safe and legal manner before intended to provide turn by turn
attempting these operations. This is instructions to get you to a desired
important since while setting up or destination. Please make certain all
changing some functions you might be persons using this system carefully read
required to distract your attention away and follow instructions and safety
from the road and remove your hands from information fully.
the wheel. Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual (non-verbal)
General Operation setup. Attempting to perform such set-up
or insert data while driving can seriously
Voice Command Control: Functions distract your attention and could cause an
within the Windows Automotive-based accident or other serious consequences.
system may be accomplished using only Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner
voice commands. Using voice commands before attempting these operations.
while driving allows you to operate the
system without removing your hands from Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
the wheel. navigation features are provided only as
an aid. Make your driving decisions based
Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not on your observations of local conditions
access any function requiring a prolonged and existing traffic regulations. Any such
view of the screen while you are driving. feature is not a substitute for your personal
Pull over in a safe and legal manner before judgment. Any route suggestions made by
attempting to access a function of the this system should never replace any local
system requiring prolonged attention. Even traffic regulations or your personal
occasional short scans to the screen may judgment or knowledge of safe driving
be hazardous if your attention has been practices.
diverted away from your driving task at a
critical time. Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an
Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be
excessively. Keep the volume at a level placed in an unsafe situation, or if you
where you can still hear outside traffic and would be directed into an area that you
emergency signals while driving. Driving consider unsafe. The driver is ultimately
while unable to hear these sounds could responsible for the safe operation of the
cause an accident. vehicle and therefore, must evaluate
whether it is safe to follow the suggested
directions.
405

Appendices
Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used Telenav may revise this Agreement and
by this system may be inaccurate because the privacy policy at any time, with or
of changes in roads, traffic controls or without notice to you. You agree to visit
driving conditions. Always use good http://www.telenav.com from time to time
judgment and common sense when to review the then current version of this
following the suggested routes. Agreement and of the privacy policy.
Emergency Services: Do not rely on any 1. Safe and Lawful Use
navigation features included in the system
to route you to emergency services. Ask You acknowledge that devoting attention
local authorities or an emergency services to the Telenav Software may pose a risk
operator for these locations. Not all of injury or death to you and others in
emergency services such as police, fire situations that otherwise require your
stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to undivided attention, and you therefore
be contained in the map database for such agree to comply with the following when
navigation features. using the Telenav Software: (a) observe
all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely;
Telenav Software End User License (b) use your own personal judgment while
Agreement driving. If you feel that a route suggested
by the Telenav Software instructs you to
Please read these terms and conditions
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
carefully before you use the Telenav
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
Software. Your use of the Telenav
you into an area that you consider to be
Software indicates that you accept these
unsafe, do not follow such instructions; (c)
terms and conditions. If you do not accept
do not input destinations, or otherwise
these terms and conditions, do not break
manipulate the Telenav Software, unless
the seal of the package, launch, or
your vehicle is stationary and parked; (d)
otherwise use the Telenav Software.
do not use the Telenav Software for any
These terms and conditions represent the illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe,
agreement (“Agreement”) between you hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any
and Telenav, Inc. (“Telenav”) with respect manner inconsistent with this Agreement;
to the Telenav Software (including (e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
upgrades, modifications, or additions and cables necessary for use of the
thereto) (collectively “Telenav Software”). Telenav Software in a secure manner in
All references herein to “you” and “your” your vehicle so that they will not interfere
means you, your employees, agents, and with your driving and will not prevent the
contractors, and any other entity on whose operation of any safety device (such as an
behalf you accept these terms and airbag).
conditions, all of whom shall also be bound
You agree to indemnify and hold Telenav
by this Agreement. Additionally, all of your
harmless against all claims resulting from
account information, as well as other
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
payment and personal information
use of the Telenav Software in any moving
provided by you to Telenav (directly or
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
through the use of the Telenav Software,
to comply with the directions above.
is subject to Telenav’s privacy policy
located at http://www.telenav.com.
406

Appendices
2. Account Information or proprietary rights, rights of publicity or

privacy or other rights of any party, (ii)
You agree: (a) when registering the
violates any law, statute, ordinance or
Telenav Software, to provide Telenav with
regulation, including but not limited to laws
true, accurate, current, and complete
and regulations related to spamming,
information about yourself, and (b) to
privacy, consumer and child protection,
inform Telenav promptly of any changes
obscenity or defamation, or (iii) is harmful,
to such information, and to keep it true,
threatening, abusive, harassing, tortuous,
accurate, current and complete.
defamatory, vulgar, obscene, libelous, or
3. Software License otherwise objectionable; and (f) lease, rent
out, or otherwise permit unauthorized
Subject to your compliance with the terms access by third parties to the Telenav
of this Agreement, Telenav hereby grants Software without advanced written
to you a personal, non-exclusive, permission of Telenav.
non-transferable license (except as
expressly permitted below in connection 4. Disclaimers
with your permanent transfer of the
To the fullest extent permissible pursuant
Telenav Software license), without the
to applicable law, in no event will Telenav,
right to sublicense, to use the Telenav
its licensors and suppliers, or agents or
Software (in object code form only) in
employees of any of the foregoing, be
order to access and use the Telenav
liable for any decision made or action
Software. This license shall terminate upon
taken by you or anyone else in reliance on
any termination or expiration of this
the information provided by the Telenav
Agreement. You agree that you will use the
Software. Telenav also does not warrant
Telenav Software only for your personal
the accuracy of the map or other data used
business or leisure purposes, and not to
for the Telenav Software. Such data may
provide commercial navigation services to
not always reflect reality due to, among
other parties.
other things, road closures, construction,
3.1 License Limitations weather, new roads and other changing
conditions. You are responsible for the
You agree not to do any of the following: entire risk arising out of your use of the
(a) reverse engineer, decompile, Telenav Software. For example but
disassemble, translate, modify, alter or without limitation, you agree not to rely on
otherwise change the Telenav Software the Telenav Software for critical navigation
or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive in areas where the well-being or survival
the source code, audio library or structure of you or others is dependent on the
of the Telenav Software without the prior accuracy of navigation, as the maps or
express written consent of Telenav; (c) functionality of the Telenav Software are
remove from the Telenav Software, or not intended to support such high risk
alter, any of Telenav’s or its suppliers’ applications, especially in more remote
trademarks, trade names, logos, patent or geographical areas.
copyright notices, or other notices or
markings; (d) distribute, sublicense or TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND
otherwise transfer the Telenav Software EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
to others, except as part of your permanent CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
transfer of the Telenav Software; or (e) SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
use the Telenav Software in any manner EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
that (i) infringes the intellectual property WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM
407

Appendices
COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT

TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY YOU.
RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not 6. Arbitration and Governing Law
permit the disclaimer of certain warranties, You agree that any dispute, claim or
so this limitation may not apply to you. controversy arising out of or relating to this
5. Limitation of Liability Agreement or the Telenav Software shall
be settled by independent arbitration
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER involving a neutral arbitrator and
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO administered by the American Arbitration
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR Association in the County of Santa Clara,
ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE California. The arbitrator shall apply the
LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, American Arbitration Association, and the
CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR judgment upon the award rendered by the
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES (INCLUDING IN arbitrator may be entered by any court
EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, having jurisdiction. Note that there is no
DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding
THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA, and the decision of the arbitrator shall be
LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS, binding upon both parties. You expressly
LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS agree to waive your right to a jury trial.
INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING
This Agreement and performance
OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO
hereunder will be governed by and
USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
construed in accordance with the laws of
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
the State of California, without giving
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
effect to its conflict of laws provisions. To
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES the extent judicial action is necessary in
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY connection with the binding arbitration,
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, both Telenav and you agree to submit to
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT the County of Santa Clara, California. The
OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT, United Nations Convention on Contracts
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR for the International Sale of Goods shall
OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF not apply.
TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV’S
SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE 7. Assignment
AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR You may not resell, assign, or transfer this
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in connection
with your permanent transfer of the
Telenav Software, and expressly
conditioned upon the new user of the
Telenav Software agreeing to be bound by
408

Appendices
the terms and conditions of this Notices by posting them on Telenav’s

Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or Website or by downloading such Notices
transfer that is not expressly permitted to your wireless device. If you desire to
under this paragraph will result in withdraw your consent to receive Notices
immediate termination of this Agreement, electronically, you must discontinue your
without liability to Telenav, in which case use of the Telenav Software.
you and all other parties shall immediately
cease all use of the Telenav Software. 8.4
Notwithstanding the foregoing, Telenav Telenav’s or your failure to require
may assign this Agreement to any other performance of any provision shall not
party at any time without notice, provided affect that party’s right to require
the assignee remains bound by this performance at any time thereafter, nor
Agreement. shall a waiver of any breach or default of
8. Miscellaneous this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
8.1 of the provision itself.
This Agreement constitutes the entire 8.5
agreement between Telenav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof. If any provision herein is held
unenforceable, then such provision will be
8.2 modified to reflect the intention of the
parties, and the remaining provisions of
Except for the limited licenses expressly this Agreement will remain in full force and
granted in this Agreement, Telenav retains effect.
all right, title and interest in and to the
Telenav Software, including without 8.6
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are The headings in this Agreement are for
not expressly granted in this Agreement convenience of reference only, will not be
are intended to, or shall be, granted or deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
conferred by implication, statute, and will not be referred to in connection
inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and with the construction or interpretation of
Telenav and its suppliers and licensors this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
hereby reserve all of their respective rights the words “include” and “including,” and
other than the licenses explicitly granted variations thereof, will not be deemed to
in this Agreement. be terms of limitation, but rather will be
deemed to be followed by the words
8.3 “without limitation.”
By using the Telenav Software, you 9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
consent to receive from Telenav all
communications, including notices, The Telenav Software utilizes map and
agreements, legally required disclosures other data licensed to Telenav by third
or other information in connection with the party vendors for the benefit of you and
Telenav Software (collectively, “Notices”) other end users. This Agreement includes
electronically. Telenav may provide such end-user terms applicable to these
companies (included at the end of this
409

Appendices
Agreement), and thus your use of the 9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
Telenav Software is also subject to such (Shanghai) Co., Ltd
terms. You agree to comply with the
following additional terms and conditions, The data (“Data”) is provided for your
which are applicable to Telenav’s third personal, internal use only and not for
party vendor licensors: resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE conditions which are agreed to by you, on
North America, LLC the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co.,
Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including
The data (“Data”) is provided for your their licensors and suppliers) on the other
personal, internal use only and not for hand.
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and © 20xx. All rights reserved.
conditions which are agreed to by you, on Permitted Use.
the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and
its licensors (including their licensors and You agree to use this Data together with
suppliers) on the other hand. the Telenav Software solely for the internal
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved. business and personal purposes for which
you were licensed, and not for service
The Data for areas of Canada includes bureau, time-sharing or other similar
information taken with permission from purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the
Canadian authorities, including: © Her restrictions set forth in the following
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, © paragraphs, you agree not to otherwise
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post reproduce, copy, modify, decompile,
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of disassemble, create any derivative works
Natural Resources Canada. of, or reverse engineer any portion of this
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from Data, and may not transfer or distribute it
the United States Postal Service® to in any form, for any purpose, except to the
publish and sell ZIP+4® information. extent permitted by mandatory laws.
©United States Postal Service® 2014. Restrictions.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal Except where you have been specifically
Service®. The following trademarks and licensed to do so by Telenav, and without
registrations are owned by the USPS: limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
United States Postal Service, USPS, and not use this Data (a) with any products,
ZIP+4. systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
The Data for Mexico includes certain data communication with vehicles, capable of
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
Geografía. real time route guidance, fleet
TERMS AND CONDITIONS management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
410

Appendices
positioning devices or any mobile or Disclaimer of Liability:

wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND
computers, pagers, and personal digital SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO
assistants or PDAs. YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM,
DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF
Warning. THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING
The Data may contain inaccurate or ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT
incomplete information due to the passage OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM
of time, changing circumstances, sources THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THE
used and the nature of collecting INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF
comprehensive geographic data, any of PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR
which may lead to incorrect results. SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
No Warranty. CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
This Data is provided to you “as is,” and OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO
you agree to use it at your own risk. Telenav USE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN
and its licensors (and their licensors and THE INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF
suppliers) make no guarantees, THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS,
representations or warranties of any kind, WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT
express or implied, arising by law or OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY,
otherwise, including but not limited to, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS
content, quality, accuracy, completeness, HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
particular purpose, usefulness, use or States, Territories and Countries do not
results to be obtained from this Data, or allow certain liability exclusions or
that the Data or server will be damages limitations, so to that extent the
uninterrupted or error-free. above may not apply to you.
Disclaimer of Warranty: Export Control.

TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS You shall not export from anywhere any
(INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND part of the Data or any direct product
SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY thereof except in compliance with, and
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF with all licenses and approvals required
QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, under, applicable export laws, rules and
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A regulations, including but not limited to the
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR laws, rules and regulations administered
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States, by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of
Territories and Countries do not allow the U.S. Department of Commerce and the
certain warranty exclusions, so to that Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S.
extent the above exclusion may not apply Department of Commerce. To the extent
to you.
411

Appendices
that any such export laws, rules or

regulations prohibit HERE from complying NOTICE OF USE
with any of its obligations hereunder to
deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
be excused and shall not constitute a SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
breach of this Agreement.
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
Entire Agreement. SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
These terms and conditions constitute the 60606
entire agreement between Telenav (and
its licensors, including their licensors and This Data is a commercial item as
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to
matter hereof, and supersedes in their these End-User Terms under which this
entirety any and all written or oral Data was provided.
agreements previously existing between
us with respect to such subject matter. © 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
Governing Law. If the Contracting Officer, federal

The above terms and conditions shall be government agency, or any federal official
governed by the laws of the State of refuses to use the legend provided herein,
Illinois, without giving effect to (i) its the Contracting Officer, federal
conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United government agency, or any federal official
Nations Convention for Contracts for the must notify HERE prior to seeking
International Sale of Goods, which is additional or alternative rights in the Data.
explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois for I. US/Canada Territory
any and all disputes, claims and actions
A. United States Data. The End-User
arising from or in connection with the Data
Terms for any Application containing
provided to you hereunder.
Data for the United States shall contain
Government End Users. the following notices:
If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf “HERE holds a non-exclusive license

of the United States government or any from the United States Postal
other entity seeking or applying rights Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4®
similar to those customarily claimed by the information.”
United States government, this Data is a
“©United States Postal Service®
“commercial item” as that term is defined
20XX. Prices are not established,
at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
controlled or approved by the United
accordance with these End-User Terms,
States Postal Service®. The following
and each copy of Data delivered or
trademarks and registrations are
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
owned by the USPS: United States
embedded as appropriate with the
Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”
following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:
412

Appendices
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with

B. Canada Data. The following provi- each copy of all or any portion of the
sions apply to the Data for Canada, Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
which may include or reflect data from shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
third party licensors (“Third Party following copyright notice on at least
Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen one of: (i) the label for the storage
in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”), media of the copy; (ii) the packaging
Canada Post Corporation (“Canada for the copy; or (iii) other materials
Post”) and the Department of Natural packaged with the copy, such as user
Resources of Canada (“NRCan”): manuals or end user license agree-
ments: “This data includes information
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client taken with permission from Canadian
agrees that its use of the Third Party authorities, including © Her Majesty
Data is subject to the following provi- the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
sions: Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The
is licensed on an “as is” basis. The Department of Natural Resources
licensors of such data, including Her Canada. All rights reserved.”
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, 3. End-User Terms: Except as other-
make no guarantees, representa- wise agreed by the parties, in connec-
tions or warranties respecting such tion with the provision of any portion
data, either express or implied, of the Data for the Territory of Canada
arising by law or otherwise, including to End-Users as may be authorized
but not limited to, effectiveness, under the Agreement, Client shall
completeness, accuracy or fitness provide such End-Users, in a reason-
for a particular purpose. ably conspicuous manner, with terms
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third (set forth with other end user terms
Party Data licensors, including Her required to be provided under the
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, Agreement, or as otherwise may be
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of provided, by Client) which shall include
any claim, demand or action, irre- the following provisions on behalf of
spective of the nature of the cause the Third Party Data licensors,
of the claim, demand or action including Her Majesty, Canada Post
alleging any loss, injury or damages, and NRCan:
direct or indirect, which may result The Data may include or reflect
from the use or possession of such data of licensors, including Her
Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of Majesty the Queen in the Right of
revenues or contracts, or any other Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada
consequential loss of any kind Post Corporation (“Canada Post”)
resulting from any defect in the and the Department of Natural
Data. Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such
data is licensed on an “as is” basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no
guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data,
413

Appendices
either express or implied, arising by

law or otherwise, including but not II. Mexico. The following provision applies
limited to, effectiveness, complete- to the Data for Mexico, which includes
ness, accuracy or fitness for a certain data from the Instituto Nacional
particular purpose. The licensors, de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
respect of any claim, demand or packaging containing Data for Mexico
action, irrespective of the nature of shall contain the following notice:
the cause of the claim, demand or “Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
action alleging any loss, injury or Estadística y Geografía)”
damages, direct or indirect, which
may result from the use or posses- III. Latin America Territory
sion of the data or the Data. The
licensors, including Her Majesty, A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not of the Data and/or packaging relating
be liable in any way for loss of thereto shall include the respective Third
revenues or contracts, or any other Party Notices set forth below and used
consequential loss of any kind as described below corresponding to
resulting from any defect in the data the Territory (or portion thereof)
or the Data. included in such copy:
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her Territory Notice
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, Ecuador “INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
and their officers, employees and MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
agents from and against any claim, AUTORIZACION N° IGM-
demand or action, irrespective of 2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE
the nature of the cause of the claim, ENERO DE 2011”
demand or action, alleging loss, “source: © IGN 2009 - BD
costs, expenses, damages or injuries TOPO ®”
(including injuries resulting in death)
arising out of the use or possession Guade-
of the data or the Data. loupe,
French
4. Additional Provisions: The terms Guiana
contained in this Section are in addi- and
tion to all of the rights and obligations Marti- “Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
of the parties under the Agreement. nique Nacional de Estadística y
To the extent that any of the provi- Mexico Geografía)”
sions of this Section are inconsistent
with, or conflict with, any other provi- IV. Middle East Territory
sions of the Agreement, the provisions
of this Section shall prevail.
414

Appendices
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies

of the Data and/or packaging relating V. Europe Territory
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
as described below corresponding to 1. General Restrictions Applicable to
the Territory (or portion thereof) Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges
included in such copy: and agrees that in certain countries of
Country Notice the Europe Territory, Client will need
to obtain rights directly from third
Jordan “© Royal Jordanian party RDS-TMC code providers to
Geographic Centre”. The receive and use the Traffic Codes in
foregoing notice requirement the Data and to deliver to End-Users
for Jordan Data is a material Transactions in any way derived from
term of the Agreement. If or based on such Traffic Codes. For
Client or any of its permitted such countries, HERE shall deliver the
sublicensees (if any) fail to Data incorporating Traffic Codes to
meet such requirement, HERE Client only after receiving certification
shall have the right to from Client of its having obtained such
terminate Client’s license rights.
with respect to the Jordan
Data. 2. Display of Third Party Rights
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted each Transaction that uses Traffic
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from Codes for Belgium, provide the
licensing and/or otherwise distributing following notice to the End-User:
HERE’s database for the country of “Traffic Codes for Belgium are
Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enter- provided by the Ministerie van de
prise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
entities for use of the Jordan Data solely Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers. Transports.”
In addition, Client, its permitted subli-
censees (if any) and End-Users are B. Paper Maps. With respect to any
restricted from using the Jordan Data in license granted to Client relating to
Enterprise Applications if such party is making, selling or distributing paper
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or
Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a paper-like medium): (a) such license
Jordan-based customer. For purposes with respect to Data for the Territory of
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applica- Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s
tions” shall mean Geomarketing applic- entering into and complying with a
ations, GIS applications, mobile business separate written agreement with the
asset management applications, call Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and
center applications, telematics applica- sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the
tions, public organization Internet OS any and all applicable paper map
applications or for providing geocoding royalties, and Client’s complying with
services. the OS copyright notice requirements;
(b) such license for selling or otherwise
distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic
415

Appendices
is conditioned on Client’s obtaining prior Austria “© Bundesamt für Eich- und

written consent from Kartografie a.s.; Vermessungswesen”
(c) such license for selling or distributing
with respect to Data for the Territory of Croatia
Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s Cyprus,
obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für Estonia,
Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d) Latvia,
Client is restricted from using Data for Lithuania,
the Territory of France to create paper Moldova,
maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and Poland,
1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted Slovenia
from using any Data to create, sell or and/or
distribute paper maps that are the same Ukraine “© EuroGeographics”
or substantially similar, in terms of data France “source: © IGN 2009 – BD
content and specific use of color, TOPO ®”
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national Germany “Die Grundlagendaten
mapping agencies, including without wurden mit Genehmigung der
limitation, Landervermessungämter of zuständigen Behörden
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the entnommen”
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für Great “Contains Ordnance Survey
Landestopografie of Switzerland, Britain data © Crown copyright and
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung- database right 2010 Contains
swesen of Austria, and the National Royal Mail data © Royal Mail
Land Survey of Sweden. copyright and database right
2010”
C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Section IV(B) above, with respect to Greece “Copyright Geomatics Ltd.”
Data for the Territory of Great Britain, Hungary “Copyright © 2003; Top-Map
Client acknowledges and agrees that Ltd.”
the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring
a direct action against Client to enforce Italy “La Banca Dati Italiana è
compliance with the OS copyright notice stata prodotta usando quale
(see Section IV(D) below) and paper riferimento anche cartografia
map requirements (see Section IV(B) numerica ed al tratto
above) contained in this Agreement. prodotta e fornita dalla
Regione Toscana.”
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all
copies of the Data and/or packaging Norway “Copyright © 2000; Norwe-
relating thereto shall include the gian Mapping Authority”
respective Third Party Notices set forth
below and used as described below Portugal “Source: IgeoE – Portugal”
corresponding to the Territory (or
Spain “Información geográfica
portion thereof) included in such copy:
propiedad del CNIG”
Country(ies) Notice
416

Appendices
Sweden “Based upon electronic data Product incorporates data which is ©

© National Land Survey 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Sweden.” Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
Switzer- “Topografische Grundlage: ©
land Bundesamt für Landestopo- B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
graphie. addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Terms for any Application containing
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia
acknowledges that HERE has not shall contain the following notice:
received approvals to distribute map “Product incorporates traffic location
data for the following countries in such codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corpora-
respective countries: Albania, Belarus, tion Limited and its licensors.”
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan.
HERE may update such list from time to
time. The license rights granted to Client VII. China Territory
under this TL with respect to the Data Personal Use Only
for such countries are contingent upon
Client’s compliance with all applicable You agree to use this Data together with
laws and regulations, including, without [insert name of Client Application] for the
limitation, any required licenses or solely personal, non-commercial purposes
approvals to distribute the Application for which you were licensed, and not for
incorporating such Data in such service bureau, time-sharing or other
respective countries. similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject
to the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only
VI. Australia Territory as necessary for your personal use to (i)
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you
of the Data and/or packaging relating do not remove any copyright notices that
thereto shall include the respective Third appear and do not modify the Data in any
Party Notices set forth below and used way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce,
as described below corresponding to copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or
the Territory (or portion thereof) reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
included in such copy: and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
Copyright. Based on data provided permitted by mandatory laws.
under license from PSMA Australia
Limited (www.psma.com.au). Restrictions
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not (a) use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
417

Appendices
with or in communication with any No Other Warranty:

positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY
devices, including without limitation SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
computers, pagers, and personal digital AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
using this Data if you fail to comply with ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
these terms and conditions. OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
Limited Warranty PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will exclusions may not be permitted under
perform substantially in accordance with applicable law, so to that extent the above
the accompanying written materials for a exclusion may not apply to you.
period of ninety (90) days from the date
of receipt, and (b) any support services Limited Liability:
provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as
described in applicable written materials TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
support engineers will make commercially LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
reasonable efforts to solve any problem LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
issues. BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
rigCustomer Remedies IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2 CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
with a copy of your receipt. This Limited OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
resulted from accident, abuse, or ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
misapplication. Any replacement Data will INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
be warranted for the remainder of the ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR
original warranty period or thirty (30) days, THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
whichever is longer. Neither these remedies CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
nor any product support services offered IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
by NAV2 are available without proof of WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
purchase from an authorized international LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
source. POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
418

Appendices
Export Control Gracenote® Copyright

You agree not to export to anywhere any CD and music-related data from
part of the Data provided to you or any Gracenote, Inc., copyright© 2000-2007
direct product thereof except in Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright
compliance with, and with all licenses and © 2000-2007 Gracenote. This product and
approvals required under, applicable service may practice one or more of the
export laws, rules and regulations. following U.S. Patents #5,987,525,
#6,061,680, #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
IP Protection #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6.240,459,
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its #6,330,593 and other patents issued or
suppliers and are protected by applicable pending. Some services supplied under
copyright and other intellectual property license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
law and treaties. The Data are provided Patent: #6,304,523.
solely on the basis of a license to use, not Gracenote and CDDB are registered
sale. trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Entire Agreement Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
These terms and conditions constitute the Gracenote.
entire agreement between NAV2(and its
licensors, including their licensors and Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their This device contains software from
entirety any and all written or oral Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
agreements previously existing between Emeryville, California 94608
us with respect to such subject matter. ("Gracenote").
Governing Law. The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
The above terms and conditions shall be to do disc and music file identification and
governed by the laws of the People’s obtain music-related information, including
Republic of China, without giving effect to name, artist, track, and title information
(i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the ("Gracenote Data") from online servers
United Nations Convention for Contracts ("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform
for the International Sale of Goods, which other functions. You may use Gracenote
is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising Data only by means of the intended End
from or in connection with the Data User functions of this device.
provided to you hereunder shall be
submitted to the Shanghai International This device may contain content belonging
Economic and Trade Arbitration to Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
Commission for arbitration. restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
content and such content providers shall
be entitled to all of the benefits and
protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote.
419

Appendices
You agree that you will use the content THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
from Gracenote ("Gracenote Content") , OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
and Gracenote Servers for your own TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
personal, non-commercial use only. You MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
agree not to assign, copy, transfer or WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
transmit the Gracenote Content, REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
Data (except in a Tag associated with a GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
music file) to any third party. YOU AGREE CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN. GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
Data, the Gracenote Software, and WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
violate these restrictions. If your licenses GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
terminate, you agree to cease any and all GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
Data, the Gracenote Software, and GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote, GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
respectively, reserve all rights in Gracenote UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
Data, the Gracenote Software, and the OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content, ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
including all ownership rights. Under no THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
circumstances will either Gracenote PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
become liable for any payment to you for TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
any information that you provide, including AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
any copyrighted material or music file WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
information. You agree that Gracenote INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
may enforce its respective rights, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
collectively or separately, under this MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
agreement against you, directly in each PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
company's own name. NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
queries for statistical purposes. The OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
queries without knowing anything about CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
who you are. For more information, see the DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
web page at www.gracenote.com for the OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
Gracenote Privacy Policy. WHATSOEVER.
© Gracenote 2007.
420

Appendices
Vehicle with SYNC only SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS

AND CONDITIONS
United States and Mexico
FCC ID: KMHSG1G1 By activating, using and/or accessing the
SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or
IC: 1422A-SG1G1 other content or material provided by
Mexico Intelematics (together, SUNA Products
and/or Services), you must accept
Model: KMHSG1P1 certain terms and conditions. The following
NOM-121-SCT1-2009 is a brief summary of the terms and
conditions that apply to you. To view the
The operation of this equipment is subject full terms and conditions relevant to your
to the following two conditions: (1) This use of the SUNA Products and/or Services,
equipment or device may not cause please consult
harmful interference, and (2) this www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandconditions/.
equipment or device must accept any
interference, including interference that 1. Acceptance
may cause undesired operation. By using SUNA Products and/or Services,
Vehicle with SYNC with you will be deemed to have accepted and
Touchscreen/My Touch agreed to be bound by the terms and
conditions fully detailed at
FCC ID: KMHSYNCG2 www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandconditions/.
IC: 1422A-SYNCG2 2. Intellectual Property
This device complies with Part 15 of the SUNA Products and/or Services are for
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry your personal use. You may not record, or
Canada. Operation is subject to the retransmit the content, nor use the content
following two conditions: (1) This device in association with any other traffic
may not cause harmful interference, and information or route guidance service or
(2) this device must accept any device not approved by Intelematics. You
interference received, including obtain no right of ownership in any
interference that may cause undesired Intellectual Property Rights (including
operation. copyright) in the data that is used to
WARNING provide SUNA Products and/or Services.
Changes or modifications not 3. Appropriate Use
expressively approved by the party SUNA Products and/or Services are
responsible for compliance could intended as an aid to personal motoring
void the user's authority to operate the and travel planning, and do not provide
equipment. The term "IC" before the radio comprehensive or accurate information on
certification number only signifies that all occasions. On occasions, you may
Industry Canada technical specifications experience additional delay as a result of
were met. using SUNA Products and/or Services. You
acknowledge that it is not intended, or
The antenna used for this transmitter must suitable, for use in applications where time
not be co-located or operating in of arrival or driving directions may impact
conjunction with any other antenna or the safety of the public or yourself.
transmitter.
421

Appendices
4. Use of SUNA Products and Services Services, and to the extent which it is
while driving lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each
Supplier excludes any warranties which
You, and other authorised drivers of the
might otherwise be implied by any State
vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or
or Federal legislation in relation to SUNA
Services are available or installed and
Products and/or Services.
active, remain at all times responsible for
observing all relevant laws and codes of 7. Please Note
safe driving. In particular, you agree to only Great care has been taken in preparing this
actively operate SUNA Products and/or manual. Constant product development
Services when the Vehicle is at a complete may mean that some information is not
stop and it is safe to do so. entirely up-to-date. The information in this
5. Service Continuity and Reception of document is subject to change without
the SUNA Traffic Channel notice.
We will use reasonable endeavours to WARNING
provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic Operating certain parts of this
Channel may occasionally be unavailable system while driving can distract
for technical reasons or for planned your attention away from the road,
maintenance. We will try to perform and possibly cause an accident or other
maintenance at times when congestion is serious consequences. Do not change
light. We reserve the right to withdraw system settings or enter data non-verbally
SUNA Products and/or Services at any (using your hands) while driving. Stop the
time. vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
attempting these operations. This is
Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted important since while setting up or
reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel changing some functions you might be
RDS-TMC signal at any particular location. required to distract your attention away
6. Limitation of Liability from the road and remove your hands from
the wheel.
Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or
the manufacturer of your device (the
“Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to TYPE APPROVALS
any third party for any damages either
direct, indirect, incidental, consequential RF Certification Logos
or otherwise arising out of the use of or
inability to use SUNA Products and/or Brazil
Services even if Intelematics or a Supplier
has been advised of the possibility of such
damages. You also acknowledge that the
neither Intelematics nor any Supplier
guarantees nor make any warranties that
relate to the availability, accuracy or
completeness of SUNA Products and/or
E207816
Argentina
422

Appendices
E207817
Abu Dhabi, Dubai
E212162
E207818
E197509
Jordan
E202555
E207819
Brazil
E207820
E207818
Malaysia
European Union EU
423

Appendices
E197811 E207822
Moldova Singapore
E207821 E198002
Morocco South Africa
E198001
Philippines
E203899
E197844
Serbia
424

Appendices
SD Card
E97713
E203679
Taiwan
E97714
SD Logo is a trademark.
E198009
Bluetooth
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are
owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Ford Motor Company
is under license. Other trademarks and
trade names are those of their respective
owners.
iPod
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc.
425

426

Index
4 Audio Control..................................................40
Audio System..................................................271
4WD General Information...........................................271
See: Four-Wheel Drive......................................126 Audio Troubleshooting..............................289
Audio Unit.......................................................272
A Alternative Frequencies...................................277
Automatic Volume Control.............................277
A/C Autostore Control..............................................276
See: Climate Control..........................................89 Digital Signal Processing (DSP)...................277
About This Manual...........................................5 News Broadcasts................................................277
ABS On, Off Control....................................................275
See: Brakes............................................................132 Regional Mode....................................................278
ABS driving hints Sound Button......................................................275
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Station Preset Buttons....................................276
Brakes.................................................................132 Station Tuning Control.....................................275
Accessories Traffic Information Control.............................276
See: Replacement Parts Waveband Button..............................................275
Recommendation..............................................7 Audio Unit Clock and Date
ACC Displays........................................................284
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control.............147 Changing the Time...........................................284
Adjusting the Steering Wheel...................40 Exact Hour Adjustment...................................284
Air Conditioning Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
See: Climate Control..........................................89 SYNC/Navigation System.....................278
Air Vents............................................................89 Alternative Frequencies..................................283
Alarm Automatic Volume Control............................282
See: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................38 Autostore Control..............................................282
Ambient Lighting............................................52 News Broadcasts...............................................283
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................38 On, Off Control....................................................281
Alarm System........................................................38 Regional Mode....................................................283
Arming the Alarm.................................................39 Station Preset Buttons.....................................281
Disarming the Alarm...........................................39 Station Tuning Control.....................................281
Full and Reduced Guard....................................39 Traffic Information Control............................282
Triggering the Alarm............................................39 Waveband Button..............................................281
Appendices....................................................393 Autolamps........................................................48
Approach Lamps.............................................51 Automatic Climate Control........................92
At a Glance..........................................................9 Type 1........................................................................92
Front Exterior Overview........................................9 Type 2.......................................................................94
Instrument Panel Overview................................11 Automatic Transmission............................122
Rear Exterior Overview........................................13 Emergency Park Position Release
Vehicle Interior Overview...................................10 Lever....................................................................125
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............65 Hints on driving with an automatic
Door Ajar..................................................................65 transmission....................................................124
Front and Rear Park Aid....................................66 Selector lever positions....................................122
Headlamps On......................................................65 Sport Mode and Manual Shifting.................123
Key in Ignition.........................................................65
Lane Departure Warning...................................66
Parking Brake On..................................................65
Seatbelt Reminder..............................................65
427

Index
Auto-Start-Stop.............................................115 Changing a Bulb..........................................240

Limitations of Use...............................................115 Approach Lamp and Side Direction
Switching the System On and Off................116 Indicator............................................................242
Using Auto-Start-Stop Manual Central High Mounted Brake Lamp............244
Transmission....................................................115 Front Fog Lamps................................................242
Autowipers........................................................43 Lamp Assembly Condensation...................240
Type 1........................................................................43 License Plate Lamp..........................................243
Type 2.......................................................................44 Rear Lamps..........................................................242
Auxiliary Power Points................................107 Replacing the Headlamp Bulbs...................240
12 Volt DC Power Point.....................................107 Side Repeater.......................................................241
AC Power Point....................................................107 Changing a Fuse..........................................228
Locations...............................................................107 Changing a Road Wheel...........................258
Installing a Road Wheel..................................263
B Jacking and Lifting Points................................261
Locking Wheel Nuts.........................................258
Battery Removing a Road Wheel................................262
See: Changing the 12V Battery.....................239 Spare Wheel.........................................................261
Battery Charging Stowing the Flat Tire........................................264
See: Charging the 12V Battery......................238 Vehicle Jack..........................................................259
Bonnet Lock Vehicles with a Spare Wheel........................258
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........229 Changing the 12V Battery.........................239
Brake and Clutch Fluid Check.................237 Auxiliary Battery.................................................239
Brakes................................................................132 Main Battery........................................................239
General Information...........................................132 Changing the Wiper Blades.....................239
Breaking-In......................................................176 Changing the Windshield Wiper
Brakes and Clutch...............................................176 Blades...............................................................239
Engine......................................................................176 Charging the 12V Battery..........................238
Tires..........................................................................176 Battery Management System.......................238
Bulb Specification Chart...........................245 Checking MyKey System Status...............33
Checking the Wiper Blades......................239
C Child Restraints................................................14
......................................................................................14
Cabin Air Filter.................................................98 Child Safety.......................................................14
Capacities and Specifications................266 Child Safety Locks.........................................20
Cargo Lamps....................................................52 Manual Child Safety Locks...............................20
Car Wash Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................248
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................247 Cleaning the Exterior...................................247
Catalytic Converter.......................................119 Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts......................247
Driving with a Catalytic Converter.................119 Cleaning the Chrome Trim..............................247
Center Console...............................................110 Cleaning the Headlamps.................................247
Underbody............................................................247
Using a Car Wash...............................................247
Cleaning the Interior....................................247
Instrument Cluster Screens, LCD Screens
and Radio Screens.......................................248
Rear Windows.....................................................248
Seatbelts...............................................................247
Clearing All MyKeys........................................31
428

Index
Climate.............................................................374
Climate Control Voice Commands..............375
E
Climate Control..............................................89 Electromagnetic Compatibility..............393
Principle of Operation........................................89 Electronic Locking Differential..................131
Clock....................................................................75 End User License Agreement.................394
Cold Weather Precautions........................176 SYNC / SYNC2 End User License
Compact Disc Player..................................285 Agreement (EULA).....................................400
CD Text Display Options.................................288 SYNC™ End User License Agreement
Compact Disc Playback..................................285 (EULA)..............................................................394
Compact Disc Track Scanning.....................286 Engine Coolant Check................................235
Ending Compact Disc Playback..................288 Adding Engine Coolant....................................236
Fast Forward and Reverse.............................285 Engine Immobilizer
MP3 Display Options.......................................288 See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................38
MP3 File Playback.............................................286 Engine Oil Check..........................................235
Repeat Compact Disc Tracks........................285 Adding Oil.............................................................235
Shuffle and Random........................................285 Engine Oil Dipstick......................................235
Track Selection...................................................285 Entertainment...............................................352
Coolant Check AM/FM/DAB Radio...........................................352
See: Engine Coolant Check............................235 Bluetooth Audio.................................................359
Cool Box.............................................................111 CD............................................................................355
Creating a MyKey.............................................31 Line In.....................................................................359
Programming/Changing Configurable SD Card Slot and USB Port...........................356
Settings................................................................31 Supported Media Players, Formats and
Cruise Control...................................................41 Metadata Information................................359
Principle of Operation.......................................146 Exterior Mirrors.................................................57
Cruise control Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................58
See: Using Cruise Control................................146 Heated Exterior Mirrors.......................................57
Cup Holders...................................................109 Power Exterior Mirrors.........................................57
Power-Folding Mirrors........................................58
D
Daytime Running Lamps............................49
F
Diesel Particulate Filter...............................113 Fastening the Seatbelts...............................22
Regeneration.........................................................113 Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy................23
Direction Indicators........................................51 Floor Mats........................................................177
DPF Fog Lamps - Front
See: Diesel Particulate Filter............................113 See: Front Fog Lamps........................................49
Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap........237 Fog Lamps - Rear
Driver Alert.......................................................153 See: Rear Fog Lamps..........................................49
Principle of Operation.......................................153 Four-Wheel Drive.........................................126
Using Driver Alert................................................154 Principle of Operation.......................................126
Driving Aids.....................................................153 Front Fog Lamps............................................49
Driving Hints....................................................176 Front Parking Aid..........................................142
Driving Through Water.................................177 Front Sensing System.......................................142
DRL Obstacle Distance Indicator...........................143
See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................49 Fuel and Refueling.........................................117
429

Index
Fuel Quality.....................................................118
Biodiesel Usage....................................................118
H
Diesel-Winter Driving.........................................118 Handbrake
Long-Term Storage.............................................118 See: Parking Brake..............................................132
Fuse Box Locations......................................182 Hazard Warning Flashers...........................179
Auxiliary Fuse Box..............................................183 Headlamp Leveling.......................................50
Engine Compartment Fuse Box (Power Headlamp Leveling to Suit Vehicle
Distribution Box - PDB)...............................182 Load.......................................................................51
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box............183 Headlamp Removal
Pre-fuse Box.........................................................182 See: Removing a Headlamp..........................240
Fuses.................................................................182 Head Restraints..............................................99
Fuse Specification Chart...........................184 Heated Seats.................................................105
Auxiliary Fuse Box - Type 1...............................191 Heated Windows and Mirrors...................98
Auxiliary Fuse Box - Type 2 (2.2L and 3.2L Heated Exterior Mirror........................................98
Diesel)................................................................227 Heated Rear Window.........................................98
Auxiliary Fuse Box - Type 2 (2.5L Heated Windshield..............................................98
Gasoline).........................................................205 Heating
Engine Compartment Fuse Box - Type See: Climate Control..........................................89
1............................................................................184 Hill Descent Control....................................138
Engine Compartment Fuse Box - Type 2 Principle of Operation.......................................138
(2.2L Diesel)...................................................206 Hill Start Assist..............................................132
Engine Compartment Fuse Box - Type 2 Enable and Disable the System....................133
(2.5L Gasoline)...............................................193 Switching the System On and Off...............134
Engine Compartment Fuse Box - Type 2 Using Hill Start Assist........................................133
(3.2L Diesel)....................................................214 Hints on Controlling the Interior
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box............201 Climate............................................................95
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box - Type Cooling the Interior Quickly..............................97
1............................................................................189 General Hints.........................................................95
Heating the Interior Quickly.............................96
G Recommended Settings for Cooling.............97
Recommended Settings for Heating...........96
Gauges...............................................................59 Side Window Defogging in Cold
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge............60 Weather...............................................................97
Fuel Gauge...............................................................61 Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Information Display............................................60 Brakes.............................................................132
Type 1........................................................................59 Hood Lock
Type 2.......................................................................60 See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........229
General Information on Radio
Frequencies....................................................27
Glasses Holder.................................................111
I
Global Opening and Closing......................56 Ignition Switch................................................112
Closing the Windows..........................................57 Information Display Control........................41
Opening the Windows........................................57 Information Displays.....................................67
Glove Box........................................................109 General Information............................................67
Information....................................................369
Calendar................................................................370
Emergency Assistance....................................370
Notifications........................................................370
430

Index
Information Messages..................................76
4x4.............................................................................79
K
Active Park...............................................................77 Keys and Remote Controls.........................27
Adaptive Cruise Control......................................77
Airbag........................................................................78
Alarm.........................................................................78
L
Auto-Start-Stop...................................................78 Lane Keeping System.................................155
AWD...........................................................................79 Switching the System On and Off...............156
Battery and Charging System.........................80 Lighting Control..............................................46
Doors and Locks...................................................80 Headlamp Low and High Beam.....................48
Driver Alert...............................................................81 Parking Lamps.......................................................47
Fuel.............................................................................81 Position Lamps......................................................47
Hill Descent Control.............................................81 Lighting..............................................................46
Hill Start Assist......................................................81 General Information...........................................46
Keys and Starting.................................................82 Limited Slip Differential..............................131
Lane Keeping System.........................................83 Load Carriers
Maintenance..........................................................83 See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers.............166
Parking Aid.............................................................84 Load Carrying.................................................164
Parking Brake.........................................................84 General Information..........................................164
Power Steering......................................................85 Load Retaining Fixtures..............................167
Powertrain..............................................................85 Load Rest..............................................................169
Starting System ...................................................86 Tie Down Points..................................................167
Terrain Management System..........................86 Locking and Unlocking.................................35
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...................87 Child play protection function.........................36
Traction Control....................................................87 Driver configuration mode................................36
Trailer........................................................................88 Locking and unlocking the doors from
Transmission.........................................................88 inside....................................................................36
Installing Child Restraints............................15 Locking and unlocking the doors with the
CHECKING SEATBELT FIT................................20 key.........................................................................35
CHILD RESTRAINT ANCHORAGE Locking and unlocking the doors with the
LOCATIONS........................................................16 remote control..................................................35
PROTECTING LARGER CHILDREN................19 Locks...................................................................35
Instrument Cluster........................................59 Luggage Covers.............................................164
Interior Lamps.................................................52 Locking and unlocking into position...........164
Courtesy lamp.......................................................52 Operation..............................................................164
Reading lamps.......................................................52 Lug Nuts
Interior Mirror...................................................58 See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................258
Auto-Dimming Mirror.........................................58
Introduction........................................................5 M
J Maintenance..................................................229
General Information.........................................229
Jump Starting the Vehicle.........................179 Manual Climate Control..............................90
Connecting the Jumper Cables.....................179
To Start the Engine............................................180
431

Index
Manual Seats................................................100 Passive Anti-Theft System.........................38

Adjusting the Height of the Driver's Arming the Engine Immobilizer......................38
Seat......................................................................101 Coded Keys.............................................................38
Adjusting the Lumbar Support......................101 Disarming the Engine Immobilizer................38
Folding the Seatback - Stretch cab............102 Principle of Operation........................................38
Moving the Seat Backward and PATS
Forward..............................................................101 See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................38
Recline Adjustment...........................................102 Personalized Settings...................................75
Manual Transmission..................................122 Chime deactivation..............................................76
Selecting Reverse Gear.....................................122 Languages...............................................................75
Media Hub......................................................288 Measure units.........................................................75
Message Center MyKey........................................................................76
See: Information Displays.................................67 Temperature units................................................76
Mirrors Phone................................................................361
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors................98 Making Calls........................................................364
See: Windows and Mirrors................................54 Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones.................363
Mobile Communications Equipment........8 Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
MyKey Troubleshooting...............................34 Time...................................................................362
MyKey™.............................................................30 Phone Menu Options.......................................364
Principle of Operation........................................30 Phone Settings...................................................367
Phone Voice Commands...............................368
N Receiving Calls...................................................364
Text Messaging...................................................365
Navigation.......................................................376 Power Door Locks
Destination Mode..............................................376 See: Locking and Unlocking.............................35
Map Mode.............................................................381 Power Seats...................................................102
Michelin Travel Guide.......................................378 Adjusting the Height of the Driver's
Navigation Map Updates...............................384 Seat.....................................................................103
Navigation Voice Commands.......................384 Moving the Seat Backward and
Places of Interest (POI) Categories............378 Forward.............................................................103
Quick-touch Buttons........................................383 Recline Adjustment...........................................103
Setting Your Navigation Preferences.........378 Tilting the Seat....................................................104
Power Steering Fluid Check - Vehicles
O With: Hydraulic Power Assist Steering
(HPAS)..........................................................237
Oil Check Topping up............................................................237
See: Engine Oil Check......................................235
Opening and Closing the Hood..............229
Closing the Hood...............................................230
Opening the Hood.............................................229
Overhead Console........................................110
P
Parking Aids...................................................140
Principle of Operation......................................140
Parking Brake..................................................132
432

Index
Power Windows..............................................54 Removing a Headlamp.............................240

Bounce-Back.........................................................56 Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............248
Driver’s Door Switches (Double Cab)..........54 Replacement Parts
Driver’s Door Switches (Single and Stretch Recommendation..........................................7
Cab)......................................................................54 Collision Repairs......................................................7
Front and Rear Passengers’ Door Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Switches.............................................................55 Repairs....................................................................7
Opening and Closing Other Windows Warranty on Replacement Parts.......................7
Automatically...................................................55 Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Opening and Closing the Driver Side Control.............................................................29
Window Automatically.................................55 Roadside Emergencies...............................179
Resetting the Memory of the Electric Roof Racks and Load Carriers.................166
Windows - Vehicle with One Touch Running-In
Up/Down on Driver Side only.....................55 See: Breaking-In..................................................176
Safety Mode...........................................................56 Running Out of Fuel.....................................118
Safety Switch for the Rear Windows............55 Filling a Portable Fuel Container...................119
Pre-Collision Assist.....................................160 Fuel Run Dry Protection Feature....................119
Using the Pre-Collision Assist
System..............................................................160 S
R Safety Precautions........................................117
Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................23
Rear Axle...........................................................131 Seatbelt Maintenance..................................24
Rear Fog Lamps.............................................49 Seatbelt Reminder.........................................23
Rear Parking Aid.............................................141 Deactivating the seatbelt reminder..............24
Rear Sensing System.........................................141 Seatbelts............................................................21
Rear Seat Armrest..........................................111 Principle of Operation..........................................21
Rear Seats.......................................................104 Seats...................................................................99
Folding the Seatback........................................105 Security..............................................................38
Folding the Seat Cushion................................104 Selecting a Child Restraint System..........14
Unfolding the Seatback...................................105 ......................................................................................14
Unfolding the Seat Cushion...........................104 Settings...........................................................338
Rear View Camera........................................143 Clock.......................................................................338
Switching the Rear View Camera Off.........145 Display...................................................................339
Switching the Rear View Camera On..........143 Settings.................................................................343
Using the Display................................................144 Sound......................................................................341
Rear View Camera Vehicle....................................................................341
See: Rear View Camera....................................143 Sitting in the Correct Position...................99
Recommended Towing Weights.............172 Snow Chains
Reduced Engine Performance.................176 See: Using Snow Chains.................................254
Refueling...........................................................119 Special Notices..................................................7
Vehicles with Fuel Filler Cap..........................120 Speed Control
Remote Control...............................................27 See: Cruise Control............................................146
Changing the Remote Control Battery........28 Speed Limiter.................................................153
Programming a New Remote Control..........27 Principle of Operation.......................................153
Programming the additional key....................27 Using the System................................................153
Reprogramming the Unlocking Stability Control............................................136
Function...............................................................27 Principle of Operation.......................................136
433

Index
Starter Switch Tires

See: Ignition Switch.............................................112 See: Wheels and Tires.....................................249
Starting a Diesel Engine..............................112 Tow Ball............................................................173
Cold or Hot Engine...............................................112 Anti-rattle pinch bolt removal (If
Failure to Start......................................................113 equipped)..........................................................174
Starting and Stopping the Engine...........112 Driving with a trailer...........................................174
General Information............................................112 Driving without a trailer.....................................174
Steering............................................................159 Maintenance.........................................................174
Electric Power Steering....................................159 Type 1.......................................................................173
Steering Wheel Lock.....................................112 Type 2......................................................................173
Unlocking the Steering Wheel........................112 Type 3......................................................................174
Steering Wheel...............................................40 Towing a Trailer...............................................171
Storage Compartments............................109 Towing Points.................................................175
Supplementary Restraints System.........25 Towing the Vehicle on Four
Principle of Operation.........................................25 Wheels...........................................................175
Switching Off the Engine............................114 All Vehicles............................................................175
Vehicles With a Turbocharger.........................114 Vehicles With Automatic
Symbols Glossary.............................................5 Transmission....................................................175
SYNC™ 2........................................................329 Towing................................................................171
General Information.........................................329 Traction Control............................................135
SYNC™ Applications and Trailer Sway Control......................................171
Services........................................................305 Transmission...................................................122
In the Event of a Crash.....................................307 Transmission
Switching Emergency Assistance On and See: Transmission...............................................122
Off......................................................................306 Transporting the Vehicle...........................180
SYNC AppLink....................................................309 Trip Computer..................................................75
SYNC Emergency Assistance.......................306 Average Fuel Consumption..............................75
SYNC™...........................................................290 Average Speed.......................................................75
General Information.........................................290 Digital Speedometer...........................................75
SYNC™ Troubleshooting..........................318 Distance to Empty................................................75
Instantaneous fuel consumption...................75
T Odometer................................................................75
Outside Air Temperature...................................75
Tailgate.............................................................170 Resetting the trip computer.............................75
Lowering the Tailgate........................................170 Trip Odometer........................................................75
Technical Specifications Type Approvals.............................................422
See: Capacities and Specifications............266 Bluetooth..............................................................425
Tire Care..........................................................249 iPod.........................................................................425
Tire Care................................................................249 RF Certification Logos......................................422
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........254 SD Card.................................................................425
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.......................................255
How Temperature Affects the Tire
U
Pressures..........................................................255 Under Hood Overview - 2.2L
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Reset Duratorq-TDCi (Puma) Diesel..............231
Procedure.........................................................257 Under Hood Overview - 3.2L
Understanding the Tire Pressure Monitoring Duratorq-TDCi (Puma) Diesel.............233
System..............................................................255 Under Seat Storage.......................................111
434

Index
Unique Driving Characteristics.................115 Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............294

Using Adaptive Cruise Control.................147 Accessing Features Through the Cell Phone
Automatic Cancellation...................................150 Menu.................................................................298
Blocked Sensor.....................................................151 Accessing Your Cell Phone Settings...........301
Canceling the Set Speed.................................149 Bluetooth Devices.............................................303
Changing the Set Speed..................................148 Cell Phone Options During an Active
Detection Issues...................................................151 Call......................................................................297
Following a Vehicle............................................149 Cell Phone Voice Commands.......................295
Hilly Condition Usage.......................................150 Making a Call.......................................................297
Overriding the System......................................150 Pairing a Cell Phone For the First
Resuming the Set Speed.................................149 Time...................................................................294
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed.............148 Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones.................295
Setting the Gap...................................................149 Receiving a Call...................................................297
Switching the System Off...............................149 Text Messaging..................................................300
Switching the System On................................148 Using Traction Control................................135
Switching to Normal Cruise Control............152 Using Voice Recognition............................291
System Not Available.........................................151 Helpful Hints........................................................291
Using Cruise Control...................................146 Initiating a Voice Session................................292
Switching Cruise Control Off..........................147 System Interaction and Feedback..............292
Switching Cruise Control On..........................146
Using Four-Wheel Drive.............................126
Driving in Special Conditions With
V
Four-Wheel Drive...........................................127 Vehicle Care...................................................247
Four-Wheel Drive, High Range (4H)...........126 Vehicle Dimensions....................................266
Four-Wheel Drive, Low Range (4L).............126 Double cab...........................................................269
Shifting Between 2H and 4H..........................126 Single cab.............................................................266
Shifting Between 2H and 4L...........................127 Stretch cab...........................................................267
Shifting Between 4H and 4L...........................127 Vehicle Identification Number................270
Two-Wheel Drive, High Range (2H)............126 Ventilation
Using Hill Descent Control........................138 See: Climate Control..........................................89
HDC Operation....................................................138 Vents
Selecting HDC......................................................138 See: Air Vents........................................................89
Using Snow Chains.....................................254 VIN
Vehicles with Stability Control.....................254 See: Vehicle Identification Number............270
Using Stability Control...............................136 Voice Control....................................................41
2-wheel drive vehicles.......................................137
4-wheel drive vehicles......................................137
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player..............................................................312
Accessing Your USB Song Library................316
Bluetooth Devices and System
Settings.............................................................318
Connecting Your Media Player to the USB
Port......................................................................312
Media Menu Features.......................................316
Media Voice Commands..................................313
What's Playing?..................................................313
435

Index
W Wheels and Tires.........................................249

General Information.........................................249
Warning Lamps and Indicators..................61 Technical Specifications.................................264
Adaptive Cruise Control Lamp.........................61 Windows and Mirrors....................................54
Anti-Lock Braking System Warning Windshield Washers.....................................45
Lamp....................................................................62 Type 1........................................................................45
Automatic High Beam Lamp...........................62 Type 2.......................................................................45
Auto Start-Stop Lamp.......................................62 Windshield Wipers.........................................42
Battery Warning Lamp.......................................62 Intermittent Wipe.................................................42
Blind Spot Monitor Indicator............................62 Type 1........................................................................42
Brake System Warning Lamp..........................62 Type 2.......................................................................42
Cruise Control Indicator.....................................62 Wiper Blades
Direction Indicator................................................62 See: Checking the Wiper Blades..................239
Door Ajar Indicator...............................................62 Wipers and Washers.....................................42
Electronic Locking Differential........................63
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Lamp....................................................................62
Engine Oil Warning Lamp.................................63
Fasten Rear Seatbelt Warning Lamp...........64
Fasten Seatbelt Warning Lamp......................63
Four-Wheel Drive Indicators............................63
Front Airbag Warning Lamp.............................63
Front Fog Lamps Indicator...............................63
Frost Warning Lamp...........................................63
Glow Plug Indicator.............................................63
High Beam Indicator...........................................63
Hill Descent Control............................................63
Hood Ajar Warning Lamp.................................63
Lane Keeping Aid Indicator..............................64
Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp........................64
Low Tire Pressure Warning...............................64
Low Washer Fluid................................................64
Over Speed Warning...........................................64
Parking Lamps Indicator...................................64
Powertrain Fault...................................................64
Rear Fog Lamps Indicator................................64
Service Engine Soon...........................................64
Shift Indicator........................................................65
Speed Limiter........................................................65
Stability Control Off Indicator.........................65
Stability Control Warning Lamp.....................65
Water-In-Fuel Warning Lamp.........................65
Washer Fluid Check.....................................237
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................247
See: Wipers and Washers.................................42
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................258
436

Ford Ranger Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ford Ranger Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FORD RANGER Owner's Manual

All rights reserved.

Introduction Checking MyKey System Status...............33

Ranger (), EB3B-19G219-ZAB enAUS

Exterior Mirrors.................................................57 Center Console...............................................110

Ranger (), EB3B-19G219-ZAB enAUS

Brakes Roof Racks and Load Carriers.................166

Cruise Control Fuses

Driving Aids Maintenance

Ranger (), EB3B-19G219-ZAB enAUS

Power Steering Fluid Check - Vehicles Audio Troubleshooting..............................289

Capacities and Specific-

Ranger (), EB3B-19G219-ZAB enAUS

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

Note: This manual describes product

manual may show features as used in Anti-lock braking system

Ranger (), EB3B-19G219-ZAB enAUS

Brake system Front airbag

Cabin air filter Front fog lamps

Check fuel cap Fuse compartment

Child safety door lock or unlock Hazard warning flashers

Child seat lower anchor Heated rear window

Child seat tether anchor Heated windshield

Cruise control Interior luggage compartment

Do not open when hot Jack

Engine air filter Lighting control

Engine coolant Lock rear window

Engine coolant temperature Low tire pressure warning

Engine oil Maintain correct fluid level

Explosive gas Panic alarm

Fan warning Parking aid

Fasten seatbelt Parking brake

Ranger (), EB3B-19G219-ZAB enAUS

Power steering fluid Scheduled Maintenance and

Your vehicle has been built to the highest SPECIAL NOTICES

Ranger (), EB3B-19G219-ZAB enAUS

Ranger (), EB3B-19G219-ZAB enAUS

Front Exterior Overview

A See Locking and Unlocking (page 35).

Ranger (), EB3B-19G219-ZAB enAUS

Vehicle Interior Overview

A See Transmission (page 122).

Ranger (), EB3B-19G219-ZAB enAUS

Instrument Panel Overview

Ranger (), EB3B-19G219-ZAB enAUS

Ranger (), EB3B-19G219-ZAB enAUS

Rear Exterior Overview

A Fuel filler flap. See Refueling (page 119).

Ranger (), EB3B-19G219-ZAB enAUS

CHILD RESTRAINTS WARNINGS

Ranger (), EB3B-19G219-ZAB enAUS

1. The child restraint system complies WARNINGS

Ranger (), EB3B-19G219-ZAB enAUS

Installation of a child restraint anchor

Ranger (), EB3B-19G219-ZAB enAUS

Illustrations of the restraint attaching clip

Ranger (), EB3B-19G219-ZAB enAUS

WARNING The diagram below shows the correct

There are two child restraint anchor fittings

1. Each anchor fitting is accessed by

Ranger (), EB3B-19G219-ZAB enAUS

Illustrations of the restraint attaching clip

Your vehicle has ISOFIX lower anchorages

Ranger (), EB3B-19G219-ZAB enAUS